Home

D-Link DGS-3120-48PC

1. MSTI ID Total Entries 1 instance Type CIST Instance Status Disabled STP Instance Operational Status MSTP ID External Root Cost Internal Root Cost Root Port Forward Delay Last Topology Change Priority Apply Instance Priority 32768 Bridge Priority 32768 SYS ID Ext 0 Designated Root Bridge Regional Root Bridge Designated Bridge Max Age Remaining Hops Topology Changes Count Figure 4 28STP Instance Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description MSTI ID Enter the MSTI ID in this field An entry of O denotes the CIST default MSTI Enter the priority in this field The available range of values is from 0 to 61440 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the View button to display the information of the specific entry MSTP Port Information This window displays the current MSTI configuration information and can be used to update the port configuration for an MSTI ID If a loop occurs the MSTP function will use the port priority to select an interface to put into the forwarding state Set a higher priority value for interfaces to be selected for forwarding first In instances where the priority value is identical the MSTP function will implement the lowest MAC address into the forwarding state and other interfaces will be blocked Remember that lower priority values mea
2. 00 20 50 01 14 11 00 20 50 01 22 22 Table 4 Ethernet Frame Format The switch will also examine the Source Address of the Ethernet frame and find that the address is not in the Forwarding Table The switch will learn PC B s MAC and update its Forwarding Table Forwarding Table Port 1 00 20 5C 01 11 11 How ARP Spoofing Attacks a Network ARP spoofing also known as ARP DNS Server poisoning is a method to attack an Ethernet network which may allow ae an attacker to sniff data frames on a LAN modify the traffic or stop a the traffic altogether known as a a Ps jja iaat Denial of Service DoS attack Port 23 on The principle of ARP spoofing is to send the fake or spoofed ARP iia ca tha waren to spoof all the PCs Port1 messages to an Ethernet network 00 20 5001 54 54 Generally the aim is to associate VY 10 10 10 254 the attacker s or random MAC MACKER address with the IP address of A A eee another node such as the default gateway Any traffic meant for that 00 20 5C 01 11 11 00 20 5C 01 22 22 IP address would be mistakenly re 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 2 directed to the node specified by the attacker IP spoofing attack is caused by Gratuitous ARP that occurs when a host sends an ARP request to resolve its own IP address Figure 4 shows a hacker within a LAN to initiate ARP spoofing attack In the Gratuitous ARP packet the Sender protocol address and Target pro
3. 152 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Chapter7 ACL ACL Configuration Wizard Access Profile List CPU Access Profile List ACL Finder ACL Flow Meter Egress Access Profile List El Mode Only Egress ACL Flow Meter EI Mode Only ACL Configuration Wizard The ACL Configuration Wizard will aid the user in the creation of access profiles and ACL Rules automatically by simply inputting the address or service type and the action needed It saves administrators a lot of time To view this window click ACL gt ACL Configuration Wizard as shown below General ACL Rules Type Profile Name Profile ID 1 768 Access ID 1 1536 O Atos From Ww Action Permit t Option Apply To Ports fe 1 1 1 4 1 6 Apply Note The ACL wizard will create the access profile and rule automatically The access profiles and rules can be manually configured in the Access Profile List Figure 7 1 ACL Configuration Wizard window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Type Use the drop down menu to select the general ACL Rule types Normal Selecting this option will create a Normal ACL Rule CPU Selecting this option will create a CPU ACL Rule Egress El Mode Only Selecting this option will create an Egress ACL Rule Profile Name After selecting to configure a Normal type rule the user can enter the Profile Name for the
4. 802 1Q VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN identifier of each packet header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding 802 1p Selecting this option instructs the Switch to specify that the access profile will apply only to packets with this 802 1p priority value Ethernet Type Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s header 173 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Select button to select a CPU ACL type Click the Create button to create a profile Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page PU ACL Profile Details Profile ID a Profile Type Ethernet OxFFF Show All Profiles Figure 7 25 CPU Access Profile Detail Information Ethernet ACL Click the Show All Profiles button to navigate back to the CPU ACL Profile List Page After clicking the Add View Rules button the following page will appear a iv h m PLA Unused Rule Entries 99 Profile ID Access ID Profile Type Action n L E Figure 7 26 CPU Access Rule List Ethernet ACL Click the Add Rule button to create a new CPU ACL rule in this profile Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page Click the Show Details button to view more information about the specific rule created Click the Delete Rules button to remove the specific entry
5. CIR Specify the Committed Information Rate The unit is in kilobyte CBS Specify the Committed Burst Size The unit is in kilobyte EBS Specify the Excess Burst Size The unit is in kilobyte Conform This field denotes the green packet flow Green packet flows may have their DSCP field rewritten to a value stated in this field Users may also choose to count green packets by using counter parameter Replace DSCP Packets that are in the green flow may have their DSCP field rewritten using this parameter and entering the DSCP value to replace Counter Use this parameter to enable or disable the packet counter for the specified ACL entry in the green flow Exceed This field denotes the yellow packet flow Yellow packet flows may have excess packets permitted through or dropped Users may replace the DSCP field of these packets by checking its radio button and entering a new DSCP value in the allotted field Counter Use this parameter to enable or disable the packet counter for the specified ACL entry in the yellow flow Violate This field denotes the red packet flow Red packet flows may have excess packets permitted through or dropped Users may replace the DSCP field of these packets by checking its radio button and entering a new DSCP value in the allotted field Counter Use this parameter to enable or disable the packet counter for the specified ACL entry in the red flow Click the lt lt Back
6. Figure 11 7 RX Packets Analysis window table for Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Packets The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description SUnit Select the unit you want to configure 286 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Pot ss Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Unicast Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address Multicast Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Clear button to clear all statistics counters on this window Click the View Table link to display the information in a table rather than a line graph Click the View Graphic link to display the information in a line graph rather than a table Transmitted TX To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Statistics gt Po
7. IPv6 ACL O Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask IPv6 Class IPv6 Flow Label IPv6 TCP IPv6 Address IPv6 Class C IPv6 Class IPv6 Flow Label J IPV6 Flow Label TCP OTCP Source Port Mask 0 FFFF Destination Port Mask 0 FFFF IPv6 Address CJipv Source Mask DiPv6 Destination Mask o o o Figure 7 13 Add ACL Profile window IPv6 ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Enter a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 1 to 768 Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 address or packet content This will change the window according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header 164 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Select Packet Content to instruct the Switch to examine the packet content in each frame s header IPv6 Class Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Ser
8. Select the appropriate Filter action and enter the service name in the space provided Click Upload to initiate the upload Upload Configuration To HTTP This page allows the user to upload the configuration file from the Switch to a computer 310 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide O Upload Configuration To TFTP Upload Configuration To HTTP Figure 12 15 Upload Configuration HTTP window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Unit Use the drop down menu to select a unit for uploading the configuration file Destination File Enter the location and name of the Destination File Click Upload to initiate the upload Upload Log File The following window is used to upload the log file from the Switch Upload Log To TFTP This page allows the user to upload the log file from the Switch to a TFTP Server Upload Log To TFTP Upload Log To HTTP Log Type CommonLog Attack Log Figure 12 16 Upload Log TFTP window SI Mode Only Upload Log To TFTP Upload Log To HTTP TFTP Server IP Or Destination File A Log Type CommonLog Attack Log Upload Figure 12 17 Upload Log TFTP window El Mode Only The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description TFTP Server IP Enter the TFTP server IP address used 311 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Man
9. Unit Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Activity Active Active LACP ports are capable of processing and sending LACP control frames This allows LACP compliant devices to negotiate the aggregated link so the group may be changed dynamically as needs require In order to utilize the ability to change an aggregated port group that is to add or subtract ports from the group at least one of the participating devices must designate LACP ports as active Both devices must support LACP Passive LACP ports that are designated as passive cannot initially send LACP control frames In order to allow the linked port group to negotiate adjustments and make changes dynamically one end of the connection must have active LACP ports see above Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 89 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide FDB Static FDB Settings Unicast Static FDB Settings Users can set up static unicast forwarding on the Switch To view the following window click L2 Features gt FDB gt Static FDB Settings gt Unicast Static FDB Settings as show below Unicast Forwarding Settings VLAN Name MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 O VLAN List i Total Entries 1 VID VLAN Name MAC Address EE Figure 4 33 Unicast Static FDB Settings window The fields that can be
10. xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Authenticator Statistics Time Interval 0 0 0 0 0 E 0 Figure 8 15 Authenticator Statistics window LA NOTE The Authenticator Statistics cannot be viewed on the Switch unless 802 1X is enabled by port lt lt or by MAC address To enable 802 1X go to Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Global Settings and select Port based or Mac based from the Authentication Mode drop down menu Authenticator Session Statistics This table contains the session statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt Authenticator Session Statistics as shown below 214 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide ee Authenticator Session Statistics Time Interval oki Figure 8 16 Authenticator Session Statistics window NOTE The Authenticator Session Statistics cannot be viewed on the Switch unless 802 1X is DP enabled by port or by MAC address To enable 802 1X go to Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X lt Global Settings and select Port based or Mac based from the Authentication Mode drop down menu Authenticator Diagnostics This table contains the diagnostic information regarding the operation of the Authenticator associated with each port An entry appears i
11. Authentication Policy Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the Authentication Policy on the Switch Response Timeout 0 This field will set the time the Switch will wait for a response of authentication from the 255 user The user may set a time between 0 and 255 seconds The default setting is 30 seconds User Attempts 1 255 This command will configure the maximum number of times the Switch will accept authentication attempts Users failing to be authenticated after the set amount of attempts will be denied access to the Switch and will be locked out of further authentication attempts Command line interface users will have to wait 60 seconds before another authentication attempt Telnet and web users will be disconnected from the Switch The user may set the number of attempts from 7 to 255 The default setting is 3 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Application Authentication Settings Users can configure Switch configuration applications console Telnet SSH web for login at the user level and at the administration level Enable Admin utilizing a previously configured method list To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Application Authentication Settings as shown below Application Enable Method List Console default defaul Telnet defaul defaul SSH defaul default HTTP defaul defaul Figure 8 58 Application Authentication Settings window The field
12. Click the Close button to close the property window Commander Switch Icon 43 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide default 35 26 a0 default 35 26 a0 Bi defaulti3a Collapse Figure 3 23 Right clicking a Commander Icon The following options may appear for the user to configure e Collapse To collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon e Expand To expand the SIM group in detail e Property To pop up a window to display the group information Member Switch Icon eel Collapse default4 default 4 Remove from group ARA 1 Remove from group Configure Configure Property dl F i Property Figure 3 24 Right clicking a Member icon The following options may appear for the user to configure e Collapse To collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon e Expand To expand the SIM group in detail e Remove from group Remove a member from a group e Configure Launch the web management to configure the Switch e Property To pop up a window to display the device information Candidate Switch Icon collapse default 4 j Add to group j Add to group Property Property Figure 3 25 Right clicking a Candidate icon The following options may appear for the user to configure e Collapse To collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon e Expand To expand the SIM group
13. Figure 8 25 RADIUS Account Client window The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Serverlndex The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Accounting server that the client shares a secret with InvalidServerAddr The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from unknown addresses Identifier The NAS Identifier of the RADIUS accounting client ServerAddr The IP address of the RADIUS authentication server referred to in this table entry ServerPortNumber The UDP port the client is using to send requests to this server RoundTripTime The time interval between the most recent Accounting Response and the Accounting 221 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide ee Request that matched it from this RADIUS accounting server Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent This does not include retransmissions Retransmissions The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS accounting server Retransmissions include retries where the Identifier and Acct Delay have been updated as well as those in which they remain the same The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server MalformedResponses The number o
14. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol STP standby port switch TCP IP telnet TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol UDP User Datagram Protocol VLAN Virtual LAN VLT Virtual LAN Trunk VT100 Single packets copied to a specific subset of network addresses These addresses are specified in the destination address field of the packet A set of rules for communication between devices on a network The rules dictate format timing sequencing and error control A pair of ports that can be configured so that one will take over data transmission should the other fail See also main port and standby port Standard 8 wire connectors for IEEE 802 3 10BASE T networks Remote Monitoring A subset of SNMP MIB II that allows monitoring and management capabilities by addressing up to ten different groups of information A device that provides a backup source of power when connected to the Switch A cluster of servers in a centralized location serving a large user population A protocol which allows IP to run over a serial line connection A protocol originally designed to be used in managing TCP IP internets SNMP is presently implemented on a wide range of computers and networking equipment and may be used to manage many aspects of network and end station operation A bridge based system for providing fault tolerance on networks STP works by allowing the user to implement parallel pat
15. The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description The VLAN ID of the VLAN the corresponding MAC address belongs to Multicast MAC Address The static destination MAC address of the multicast packets This must be a multicast MAC address Select the unit you want to configure Allows the selection of ports that will be members of the static multicast group and ports that are either forbidden from joining dynamically or that can join the multicast group dynamically using GMRP The options are None No restrictions on the port dynamically joining the multicast group When None is chosen the port will not be a member of the Static Multicast Group Click the All button to select all the ports Egress The port is a static member of the multicast group Click the All button to select all the ports Click the Clear All button to clear out all the information entered Click the Apply button to accept the changes made MAC Notification Settings MAC Notification is used to monitor MAC addresses learned and entered into the forwarding database This window allows you to globally set MAC notification on the Switch Users can set MAC notification for individual ports on the Switch To view the following window click L2 Features gt FDB gt MAC Notification Settings as show below 91 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide MAC Notification Global Settings
16. Users can display the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the port To view this window click Monitoring gt Utilization gt Port Utilization as shown below 282 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Unit on Apply Utilization Unit 3 Time Interval TE Record Number 200 Show Hide if Utilization Figure 11 3 Port Utilization window To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Unit Select the unit you want to configure Pot Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Show Hide Check whether or not to display Port Util Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Statistics Port Statistics Packets The Web manager allows various packet statistics to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Six windows are offered 283 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide R
17. DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP servers and clients When the relay agent receives the DHCP request it adds the option 82 information and the IP address of the relay agent if the relay agent is configured to the packet Once the option 82 information has been added to the packet it is sent on to the DHCP server When the DHCP server receives the packet if the server is capable of option 82 it can implement policies like restricting the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to a single remote ID or circuit ID Then the DHCP server echoes the option 82 field in the DHCP reply The DHCP server unicasts the reply back to the relay agent if the request was relayed to the server by the relay agent The switch verifies that it originally inserted the option 82 data Finally the relay agent removes the option 82 field and forwards the packet to the switch port that connects to the DHCP client that sent the DHCP request Disabled When the field is toggled to Disabled the relay agent will not insert and remove DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP servers and clients and the check and policy settings will have no effect DHCP Relay Agent This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It Information Option 82 is used to enable or disable the Switches ability to check the validity of the packet s Check option 82 field Enabled When the field is to
18. Delete All Total Entries 0 MAC Address Status Figure 4 13 MAC based VLAN Settings The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description MAC Address Specify the MAC address to be re authenticated by entering it into the MAC Address field VID Select this option and enter the VLAN ID VLAN Name Select this option and enter the VLAN name of a previously configured VLAN Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Private VLAN Settings A private VLAN is comprised of a primary VLAN up to one isolated VLAN and a number of community VLANs A private VLAN ID is presented by the VLAN ID of the primary VLAN The command used to associate or de associate a secondary VLAN with a primary VLAN A secondary VLAN cannot be associated with multiple primary VLANs The untagged member port of the primary VLAN is named as the promiscuous port The tagged member port of the primary VLAN is named as the trunk port A promiscuous port of a private VLAN cannot be promiscuous port of other private VLANs The primary VLAN member port cannot be a secondary VLAN member at the same time or vice versa A secondary VLAN can only have the un
19. Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist After clicking the Add Rule button the following page will appear 174 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile Information Profile ID Profile Type Ethernet OxFFF Rule Detail Keep the input field blank to specify that the corresponding option does not matter Access ID 1 100 C Auto Assign Rule Action Action Fermit x Time Range Name Fi Ports PJ fig 124 124 126 1 9 Figure 7 27 Add CPU Access Rule Ethernet ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Access ID 1 100 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 100 Select Permitto specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Ethernet Type 0 FFFF Enter the appropriate Ethernet Type information Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Pots is Ticking the All Ports check box will denote all ports on the Switch Click
20. OverSize Fragment Jabber Drop and SymbolErr errors Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Clear button to clear all statistics counters on this window Click the View Table link to display the information in a table rather than a line graph Click the View Graphic link to display the information in a line graph rather than a table Transmitted TX To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Statistics gt Port Statistics gt Errors gt Transmitted TX as shown below 290 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Unit on 0 View Table __ Apply TA Error Analysis Port 1 1000 ae ExDiefer a00 800 crcError MMMM 00 LateCall B00 Ext oll 500 a Sing Coll 400 Ba Collision 300 200 100 UnitiPackets Time Interval ES Record Mumber 200 ShowHide i ExDefer W CRCError i LateCall W ExColl W Sing Coll W Collision Figure 11 12 Transmitted TX window for errors Click the View Table link to display the information in a table rather than a line graph t i CRE Error LateColl ExCall SingCall Collision Figure 11 13 TX Error Analysis window table The fields that can be configur
21. State Disabled Report Suppression Enabled h Data Driven Learning State Enabled Data Driven Learning 4ged Cut Disabled Wersion 3 Querier Role Non Querier lt lt Back Apply Figure 4 41 IGMP Snooping Parameters Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VID Specify the name of the VLAN ID VLAN Name Specify the name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping querier is to be configured Rate Limit Here is displayed the rate of IGMP control packets that the switch can process ona specific port VLAN The rate is specified in packet per second The packets that exceed the limited rate will be dropped Querier IP Displays the querier IP address Querier Expiry Time Displays the querier expiry time Query Interval Specify the amount of time in seconds between general query transmissions The default setting is 125 seconds Max Response Time Specify the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members The default setting is 10 seconds Robustness Value Provides fine tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet The value of the robustness value is used in calculating the following IGMP message intervals By default the robustness variable is set to 2 Last Member Query Specify the maximum amount of time between group specific query messages Interval including those sent in response to leave group messages You might lower this interval to reduce the
22. Static System Location Mask 255 0 0 0 System Contact Gateway 0 0 0 0 Boot PROM Version Build 1 00 007 Management VLAN default Firmware Version Build 1 00 024 Login Timeout min 10 Hardware Version Ad System Time 22 03 2000 22 04 35 System Clock Serial Number D123456789 Device Status and Quick Configurations SNTP Disabled Settings Jumbo Frame Disabled Settings Spanning Tree Disabled Settings MLD Snooping Disabled Settings SNMP Disabled Settings ISMP Snooping Disabled Settings Safeguard Engine Disabled Settings MAC Notification Disabled Settings System Log isabled Settings 802 1 Disabled Settings SoL Disabled Settings SSH Disabled Settings GVRP Disabled Settings Port Mirror Disabled Settings Password Encryption Disabled Settings Single IF Management Disabled Settings Telnet Enabled TCP 23 Settings CLI Paging Enabled Settings Web Enabled TCP 80 Settings HOL Blocking Prevention Enabled Settings VLAN Trunk Disabled Settings Figure 2 1 Device Information window Click the Seitings link to navigate to the appropriate feature page for configuration System Information Settings The user can enter a System Name System Location and System Contact to aid in defining the Switch To view the following window click System Configuration gt System Information Settings as show below Unit ID MAC Address 00 01 02 03 04 00 Firmware Version Build 1 00 024 Hardware Version Ad System Name System Location System Conta
23. This trap is sent when a MAC based 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 35 11 1 0 1 access control host is successfully logged in MacBasedAuthLoggedFail This trap is sent when a MAC based 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 35 11 1 0 2 access control host login fails MacBasedAuthAgesOut This trap is sent when a MAC based 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 35 11 1 0 3 access control host ages out FilterDetectedTrap This trap is sent when an illegal DHCP 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 37 100 0 1 server is detected The same illegal DHCP server IP address detected is just sent once to the trap receivers within the log ceasing unauthorized duration SinglelPMSColdStart The commander switch will send 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 11 swSinglelPMSColdStart notification to the indicated SinglelPMSWarmsStart The commander switch will send 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 12 swSinglelPMSWarmStart notification to the indicated host when its member generates a warm start notification SinglelPMSLinkDown The commander switch will send 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 13 swSinglelPMSLinkDown notification to the indicated host when its member 322 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide generates a link down notification es SinglelPMSLinkUp SinglelPMSAuthFail SinglelPMSnewRoot SinglelPMSTopologyChange authenticationFailure The commander switch will send swSinglelPMSLinkUp notification to the indicated host when its member generates a link up notific
24. Thus the following are the typical values Class 0 16200mW Class 1 4200mW Class 2 7400mW Class 3 16200mW User Define 35000mW Click Apply to implement changes made The port status of all PoE configured ports is displayed in the table in the bottom half of the screen shown above Serial Port Settings This window allows the user to adjust the Baud Rate and the Auto Logout values To view the following window click System Configuration gt Serial Port Settings as show below xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Baud Rate 115200 Auto Logout 10 minutes Data Bits 8 Parity Bits None stop Bits 1 Figure 2 9 Serial Port Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Baud Rate Specify the baud rate for the serial port on the Switch There are four possible baud rates to choose from 9600 19200 38400 and 115200 For a connection to the Switch using the console port the baud rate must be set to 115200 which is the default setting Auto Logout Select the logout time used for the console interface This automatically logs the user out after an idle period of time as defined Choose from the following options 2 5 10 15 minutes or Never The default setting is 10 minutes Data Bits Display the data bits used for the serial port connection Parity Bits Display the parity bits used for the serial port connection S
25. Web based Access Control WAC Web based Authentication Login is a feature designed to authenticate a user when the user is trying to access the Internet via the Switch The authentication process uses the HTTP or HTTPS protocol The Switch enters the 230 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide authenticating stage when users attempt to browse Web pages e g http www dlink com through a Web browser When the Switch detects HTTP or HTTPS packets and this port is un authenticated the Switch will launch a pop up user name and password window to query users Users are not able to access the Internet until the authentication process Is passed The Switch can be the authentication server itself and do the authentication based on a local database or be a RADIUS client and perform the authentication process via the RADIUS protocol with a remote RADIUS server The client user initiates the authentication process of WAC by attempting to gain Web access D Link s implementation of WAC uses a virtual IP that is exclusively used by the WAC function and is not known by any other modules of the Switch In fact to avoid affecting a Switch s other features WAC will only use a virtual IP address to communicate with hosts Thus all authentication requests must be sent to a virtual IP address but not to the IP address of the Switch s physical interface Virtual IP works like this when a host PC communicates
26. as the ingress port If it does not the packet is dropped If it has the same VID the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it on its attached network segment This process is referred to as ingress filtering and is used to conserve bandwidth within the Switch by dropping packets that are not on the same VLAN as the ingress port at the point of reception This eliminates the subsequent processing of packets that will just be dropped by the destination port Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLANs are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default Packets cannot cross VLANs If a member of one VLAN wants to connect to another VLAN the link must be through an external router port Packets with unknown source addresses will be flooded to all ports Broadcast and multicast NOTE If no VLANs are configured on the Switch then all packets will be forwarded to any destination packets will also be flooded to all ports An example is presented below 63 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide VLAN Name Switch Ports System default Engineering Sales Port based VLANs Port based VLANSs limit traffic that flows into and out of switch ports Thus all devices connected to a port a
27. configuration Click the Select All button to select all the ports for configuration Click the Clear All button to unselect all the ports for configuration Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 97 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page IGMP Snooping Rate Limit Settings On this page the user can configure the IGMP snooping rate limit parameters To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Rate Limit Settings as show below 2 Port List e g 1 1 2 3 24 OVID List E e g 1 3 4 Rate Limit 1 1000 Po No Limit Port List Oooo O VID List Total Entries 1 VID Rate Limit 1 No Limit Figure 4 43 IGMP Snooping Rate Limit Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Here the user can enter the port list used for this configuration Here the user can enter the VID list used for this configuration Here the user can enter the IGMP snooping rate limit used By selecting the No Limit option the rate limit for the entered port s will be ignored Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Enter a pa
28. e Refresh Update the views with the latest status e Topology Display the Topology view Help e About Will display the SIM information including the current SIM version 45 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Single IP Management 1 61 Copyright c 2010 D Link Corporation Release Date 2005 07 14 Figure 3 29 About window Java Applet Window Firmware Upgrade This screen is used to upgrade firmware from the Commander Switch to the Member Switch Member Switches will be listed in the table and will be specified by Port port on the CS where the MS resides MAC Address Model Name and Version To specify a certain Switch for firmware download click its corresponding check box under the Port heading To update the firmware enter the Server IP Address where the firmware resides and enter the Path Filename of the firmware Click Download to initiate the file transfer To view the following window click Management gt Single IP Management gt Firmware Upgrade as show below Server IF Address Path Filename Total Entries 0 Select All j MAC Address Model Name Firmware Version Figure 3 30 Firmware Upgrade window Configuration File Backup Restore This screen is used to upgrade configuration files from the Commander Switch to the Member Switch using a TFTP server Member Switches will be listed in the table and will be specified by ID Port port on the CS
29. function and much of the terminology is the same as STP Most of the settings configured for STP are also used for RSTP This section introduces some new Spanning Tree concepts and illustrates the main differences between the two protocols 19 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Port Transition States An essential difference between the three protocols is in the way ports transition to a forwarding state and in the way this transition relates to the role of the port forwarding or not forwarding in the topology MSTP and RSTP combine the transition states disabled blocking and listening used in 802 1D 1998 and creates a single state Discarding In either case ports do not forward packets In the STP port transition states disabled blocking or listening or in the RSTP MSTP port state discarding there is no functional difference the port is not active in the network topology Table 7 3 below compares how the three protocols differ regarding the port state transition All three protocols calculate a stable topology in the same way Every segment will have a single path to the root bridge All bridges listen for BPDU packets However BPDU packets are sent more frequently with every Hello packet BPDU packets are sent even if a BPDU packet was not received Therefore each link between bridges is sensitive to the status of the link Ultimately this difference results in faster detection of failed lin
30. gt 5 3 l3 13 Enabled Ln vean ve E 17 Enabled 19 Enabled EH 20 21 C 21 F 22 C 16 Enabled 18 Enabled Enabled 10 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled isabled disabled isabled isabled n n ink nk C CCCI C IC Sp Sr Down Down Down Down Enab led led Enabled Enab led Enabled 22 F 23 C 23 F 24 C 24 F Disabled nk Down Disabled nk Down isabled ink Down Disabled ink Down Disabled ink Down peje E a Enabled Enabled E E E o Enabled Enabled Enabled T i E o 16 _ Enabled 14 Enabled C T Figure 2 3 Port Settings window To configure switch ports 1 Choose the port or sequential range of ports using the From Port and To Port pull down menus 2 Use the remaining pull down menus to configure the parameters described below The fields that can be configured are described below xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parameter Description Unit Select the unit you wish to configure From Port To Port Select the appropriate port range used for the configuration here State Toggle the State field to either enable or disable a given port or group of ports Speed Duplex Toggle the Speed Duplex field to select the speed and full duplex half duplex state of the port Auto denotes auto negotiation among 10 100 and 1000 Mbps de
31. new rule here Profile ID Enter the Profile ID for the new rule AccessID Enter the Access ID for the new rule Selecting the Auto Assign option will allow the switch 153 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide a to automatically assign an unused access ID to this rule From To This rule can be created to apply to four different categories Any Selecting this option will include any starting category to this rule MAC Address Selecting this option will allow the user to enter a range of MAC addresses for this rule IPv4 Address Selecting this option will allow the user to enter a range of IPv4 addresses for this rule IPv6 Selecting this option will allow the user to enter a range of IPv6 addresses for this rule Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the mirror port section Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set After selecting the Permit action the user can select one of the following options Change 1p Priority Here the user can enter the 1p priority value Replace DSCP Here the user can enter t
32. o lo oe Figure 7 46 ACL Flow meter Configuration window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Here the user can enter the Profile ID for the flow meter Profile Name Here the user can enter the Profile Name for the flow meter Here the user can enter the Access ID for the flow meter Remark DSCP Mark the packet with a specified DSCP The packet is set to drop for packets AccessiD Rate Specify the rate for single rate two color mode Rate Specify the committed bandwidth in Kbps for the flow Burst Size Specify the burst size for the single rate two color mode The unit is in kilobyte Rate Exceeded Specify the action for packets that exceed the committed rate in single rate two color mode The action can be specified as one of the following Drop Packet Drop the packet immediately AB xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide with a high precedence trTCM Specify the two rate three color mode CIR Specify the Committed information Rate The unit is Kbps CIR should always be equal or less than PIR PIR Specify the Peak information Rate The unit is Kops PIR should always be equal to or greater than CIR CBS Specify the Committed Burst Size The unit is in kilobyte PBS Specify the Peak Burst Size The unit is in kilobyte srTCM Specify the single rate three color mode
33. or deny reports Deny coming into the specified switch ports IPv6 Multicast Profile Settings Users can add delete and configure the IPv6 multicast profile on this page To view the following window click L2 Features gt Multicast Filtering gt IPv6 Multicast Filtering gt IPv6 Multicast Profile Settings as show below Profile ID 1 60 Profile Name tax 32 characters ad Find Delete All Profile ID Profile Name Group List Figure 4 76 IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings window 121 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Enter a Profile ID between 7 and 60 Profile Name Enter a name for the IP Multicast Profile Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Click the Group List link to configure the multicast address group list settings for the specific entry Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry After clicking the Group List link the following page will appear IU asl AUTES IfOUD LIST Seng Profile ID 2 Profile Name Name Multicast Address List Po e 9 FFO2 3 FFO2 FF03 Multicast Address Group List 1 Multic
34. 01 02 03 D4 5 5 2 3 5 7 a F n 99 73 74 E E E E Untagged Source Ports 01 02 03 014 lt i 6 08 2 3 5 6 8 20 21 22 O 6 Tagged Source Ports 2 3 5 8 2 23 34 23 M Clear All ry 3 r a A O Figure 4 70 MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings Edit window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name This option will display the VLAN name of the VLAN configured State Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the state Replace Source IP With the MLD snooping function the MLD report packet sent by the host will be forwarded to the source port Before forwarding of the packet the source IP address in the join packet needs to be replaced by this IP address If none is specified the source IP address will not be replaced Remap Priority 0 7 The remap priority value 0 to 7 to be associated with the data traffic to be forwarded on the multicast VLAN None If None is specified the packet s original priority is used The default setting is 117 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Replace Priority Tick the check box to specify that the packet s priority will be changed by the switch based on the remap priority This flag will only take effect when the remap priority is set Untagged Member Ports Specify the untagged member port of the multicast VLAN Click the Select All button to select all the ports or click
35. 1 1440 This parameter specifies the time period during which an authenticated host will remain in the authenticated state Enter a value between Jand 1440 minutes Tick the Infinite check box to indicate the authenticated host will never age out on the port The default value is 1440 minutes 24 hours State Use this drop down menu to enable the configured ports as WAC ports Idle Time 1 1440 If there is no traffic during the Idle Time parameter the host will be moved back to the unauthenticated state Enter a value between 7 and 1440 minutes Tick the Infinite check box to indicate the Idle state of the authenticated host on the port will never be checked The default value is infinite Block Time 0 300 This parameter is the period of time a host will be blocked if it fails to pass authentication 235 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide A Enter a value between 0 and 300 seconds The default value is 60 seconds Click the Apply button to accept the changes made WAC Authentication State Users can view and delete the hosts for Web authentication To view this window click Security gt Web based Access Control WAC gt WAC Authentication State as shown below AD i E 1 Ai lela Se i PortList e g 1 1 45 4 10 PortList e g 1 1 1 5 1 10 Authenticated 4 authenticating Blocked View All Hosts Clear All Hosts Total Authenticating Hosts 0 Total Authenticated Hosts 0
36. 1 65535 sec Probe 1 9 Figure 11 27 Trace Route window El Mode Only The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IPv4 Address IPv6 IP address of the destination station Address TTL The time to live value of the trace route request This is the maximum number of routers that a trace route packet can pass The trace route option will cross while seeking the network path between two devices The range for the TTL is 1 to 60 hops Pot ts The port number The value range is from 30000 to 64900 Timeout Defines the timeout period while waiting for a response from the remote device A value of 1 to 65535 seconds can be specified The default is 5 seconds Probe The number of probing The range is from 1 to 9 If unspecified the default value is 1 Click the Start button to initiate the Trace Route After clicking the Start button the following page will appear Results 203 207 47 49 30 ms 203 79 222 137 20 ms 203 79 255 233 20 ms 211 76 98 5 20 ms 72 14 196 13 50 ms 209 865 243 276 20 ms 209 865 243 223 20 ms 72 14 233 102 20 ms 74 125 153 147 Trace complete stop Resume Return to Trace Route Test screen Figure 11 28 Trace Route Result window 302 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Stop button to halt the Trace Route Click the Resume button to resume the Trace Route Peripheral Device Environment Th
37. 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Replace Priority Tick this check box to replace the Priority value in the adjacent field Replace DSCP 0 63 Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field When an ACL rule is added to change both the priority and DSCP of an IPv4 packet only one of them can be modified due to a chip limitation Currently the priority is changed when both the priority and DSCP are set to be modified Replace ToS Specify that the IP precedence of the outgoing packet is changed with the new value If Precedence 0 7 used without an action priority the packet is sent to the default TC Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Counter Here the user can select the counter By checking the counter the administrator can see how
38. 30 90 discovery packets Returning information to a Commander Switch will include information about other switches connected to it Ex MS CaS The user may set the Discovery Interval from 30 to 90 seconds The default value is 30 seconds Hold Time Count This parameter may be set for the time in seconds the Switch will hold information sent to it 100 255 from other switches utilizing the Discovery Interval The user may set the hold time from 100 to 255 seconds The default value is 100 seconds Click the Apply button to accept the changes made After enabling the Switch to be a Commander Switch CS the Single IP Management folder will then contain four added links to aid the user in configuring SIM through the web including Topology Firmware Upgrade Configuration Backup Restore and Upload Log File Topology This window will be used to configure and manage the Switch within the SIM group and requires Java script to function properly on your computer The Java Runtime Environment on your server should initiate and lead you to the Topology window as seen below 39 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide File Group Device View Help eo Data foe A defaulto3 o4 00 Data 7 Device name Local port Speed Remote port Mac Address Model name amp idefault 03 04 01 default 03 04 00 00 01 02 03 04 00 DG5 3120 24TC L2 Swit Figure 3 17 Single IP Management window
39. 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 802 1p Default Priority Settings The Switch allows the assignment of a default 802 1p priority to each port on the Switch This page allows the user to assign a default 802 1p priority to any given port on the switch that will insert the 802 1p priority tag to untagged packets received The priority and effective priority tags are numbered from 0 the lowest priority to 7 the highest priority The effective priority indicates the actual priority assigned by RADIUS If the RADIUS assigned value exceeds the specified limit the value will be set at the default priority For example if the RADIUS assigns a limit of 8 and the default priority is O the effective priority will be O To view the following window click QoS gt 802 1p Settings gt 802 1p Default Priority Settings as show below 802 1p Default Priority Settings Unit From Port To Port Priority 802 1p Default Priority Table Unit 1 Settings Pont k 2 3 4 5 6 7 B 9 Figure 6 2 Default Priority Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port Select the starting and ending ports to use Use the drop down menu to select a value from Oto 7 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 802 1p User Priority Settings The Switch allows the assignment of a class of service to each of
40. 4 Disabled led Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled led Disabled isabled led Disabled isabled led D D D D lisabled D Disabled isabled Di Disabled isabled led Disabled isabled ij led Disabled Disabled Disabled isabled Disabled Disabled isabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled led Disabled isabled Disabled Disabled isabled led isabled lisabled Disabled lisabled led lisabled Disabled lisabled Disabled Figure 4 84 LLDP Basic TLVs Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description nt Select the starting and ending ports to use From Port To Port Select the port range to use for this configuration System Name Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the System Name option System Description Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the System Description option System Capabilities Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the System Capabilities option Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Port Description Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the Port Description option LLDP Dotl1 TLVs Settings LLDP Dot1 TLVs are organizationally specific TLVs which are defined in IEEE 802 1 and used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of the IEEE 802 1 organizational port VLAN ID TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements To view the following window click L2 Featu
41. A 28 Gratuitous ARP Global Sens is 28 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide EE mete Ee a SO re SO See ae ee ee 29 IPv6 Neighbor Settings El Mode Only cccccccccccsseeeceeeceeeseeeeeeaeeseceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeesseaseeeeesseaeecesessaaeeesessaaeeeeeesaaaaass 29 EAternace naa iio 30 Sy siemiP Address SeN Seernes tte 30 ie A A eee ree ee en ee eee 32 Management oting esseri ne ret et ee te do 35 Session Tal mr eee PRO a PP OME ce nN eine ee 36 SINO ISP MaRa gemen oni aa hse ieclee ete lO 36 A eee et eae ec alates A ae li Sali iene 38 MS NOY nai on 39 Fimware Upgrade ereenn a a a i a aaa to tee a e seb aaaneeniesneddoentonsececeatanseets 46 Configuration File BaCkUp R StOVe ccccccccccceeeeceeceeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaaeeeceeesseaseeeeesseaeceeesseaseeeesssaaseseeessaageseees 46 de 47 SNMP SENINGS mess td ala ori S A A ia api 47 SNMP GOD aS SUNS pea cat ea os ae ates do 48 SONME MIPS UNOS ua nae ep mT E E eee 49 ONMP Linkehange Traps SetinGs ii a 49 SNMP View Table Sen ds oda heehee 50 SNMP COMMUNI Table Se TG nessieira a aie aad Sea he Sect ea heel aad ela ltt ak a Sa 51 SONME Grou Table Sein GS tasado toda 52 SNMP Engine ID Settings ccccccsessecccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeceecseeseceeecaeeeeeeesseuseeeeeseeaseceeesseaseeeeeseeaseceeeseeaeeeeesssaaeeeeessaageeeees 54 SNMP USEF Table SCN S sist tat cea ee sss o a led eo 54 SNMP HOST Table Seti oc a
42. Add Rule button the following page will appear AG O Q Tm i 5 i Profile ID Profile Name Profile Type Rule Detail Keep the input field blank to specify thatthe corresponding option does not matter Access ID 1 512 O Auto Assign DSCP Peg 08 Rule Action Action Priority 0 7 Pe Oo Replace DSCP 0 63 Jo Time Range Name Counter Disabled VLAN Name characters Figure 7 56 Add Egress Access Rule IPv4 ACL 196 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Access ID 1 512 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 572 Auto Assign Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID for the rule being created DSCP Specify the value of DSCP The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Priority 0 7 Tick the corresponding check box if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS q
43. Aggregation TLV This indicates the current link aggregation status of IEEE 802 3 MACs More precisely the information should include whether the port is capable of doing link aggregation whether the port is aggregated in an aggregated link and what is the aggregated port ID The default state is Disabled The Maximum Frame Size indicates that LLDP agent should transmit Maximum frame size TLV The default state is Disabled 130 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Apply button to accept the changes made LLDP Statistic System The LLDP Statistics System page allows you an overview of the neighbor detection activity LLDP Statistics and the settings for individual ports on the Switch Select a Port number from the drop down menu and click the Find button to view Statistics for a certain port To view the following window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Statistic System as show below Last Change Time 4128 Number of Table Insert 0 Number of Table Delete 0 Number of Table Drop 0 Number of Table Ageout Unit 1 w Port 01 w Find Total TX Frames Total Discarded RX Frames RX Errors Frames Total RX Frames Total Discarded RX TLVs Total Unrecognized RX TLVs Total Aged out Neighbor Information ooo e caa Figure 4 87 LLDP Statistics System window LLDP Local Port Information The LLDP Local Port Information page displays the information on a per port
44. Cleared Will send Storm Trap messages when a Traffic Storm has been cleared by the Switch only Both Will send Storm Trap messages when a Traffic Storm has been both detected and cleared by the Switch This function cannot be implemented in the hardware mode When Drop is chosen for the Action parameter Traffic Log Settings Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the function If enabled the traffic control states are logged when a storm occurs and when a storm is cleared If the log state is disabled the traffic control events are not logged Traffic Auto Recover Enter the time allowed for auto recovery from shutdown for a port The default value is Time 0 65535 0 which means there is no auto recovery and the port remains in shutdown forever mode This requires manual entry of the CLI command config ports lt portlist gt all state enable to return the port to a forwarding state Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section NOTE Traffic Control cannot be implemented on ports that are set for Link Aggregation Port Trunking NOTE Ports that are in the Shutdown Forever mode will be seen as Discarding in Spanning Tree windows and implementations though these ports will still be forwarding BPDUs to the Switch s CPU NOTE Ports that are in Shutdown Forever mode will be seen as link down in all windows and screens until the user recovers these ports NOTE The minimum granular
45. Disabled Disabled From Port To Port Disabled Disabled Link Aggregation Apply Power Via MDI Maximum Frame Size Power Via MDI Disabled Link Aggregation Disabled led Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 4 86 LLDP Dot3 TLVs Settings window Disable isable Disable isable Disabled Disabl Disabled Disabled Disab Disab Disabl Disable ss Disabled Disab Disabl Disabled Disabled Disab isable Disable isable isable isable The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description nt Select the starting and ending ports to use From Port To Port Use the drop down menu to select the port range to use for this configuration MAC PHY Configuration Status Link Aggregation Maximum Frame Size This TLV optional data type indicates that the LLDP agent should transmit the MAC PHY configuration status TLV This indicates it is possible for two ends of an IEEE 802 3 link to be configured with different duplex and or speed settings and still establish some limited network connectivity More precisely the information includes whether the port supports the auto negotiation function whether the function is enabled whether it has auto negotiated advertised capability and what is the operational MAU type The default state is Disabled The Link Aggregation option indicates that LLDP agents should transmit Link
46. Dropped By Max Group Limitation Dropped By Group Filter Dropped By Multicast VLAN oa cae amp oo 4 Transmit Statistics MLD v1 Query MLD v1 Report MLD v2 Report MLD vi Done Total Figure 4 61 Browse MLD Snooping Counter window Click the Clear Counter button to clear all the information displayed in the fields Click the Refresh button to refresh the display table so that new information will appear Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page Multicast VLAN In a switching environment multiple VLANs may exist Every time a multicast query passes through the Switch the switch must forward separate different copies of the data to each VLAN on the system which in turn increases data traffic and may clog up the traffic path To lighten the traffic load multicast VLANs may be incorporated These multicast VLANs will allow the Switch to forward this multicast traffic as one copy to recipients of the multicast VLAN instead of multiple copies Regardless of other normal VLANs that are incorporated on the Switch users may add any ports to the multicast VLAN where they wish multicast traffic to be sent Users are to set up a Source port where the multicast traffic is entering the switch and then set the ports where the incoming multicast traffic is to be sent The source port cannot be a recipient port and if configured to do so will cause error messages to be produced by the switch Once properly configured the s
47. Features gt VLAN gt Voice VLAN gt Voice VLAN Device as show below Last Active Time Voice Device Start Time Figure 4 20 Voice VLAN Device window 76 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide VLAN Trunk Settings Enable VLAN on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without a VLAN Trunk you must first configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunk enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Refer to the following figure for an illustrated example Switch C Switch D Switch E Switch A Switch B V1 V2 V1 V2 Figure 4 21 Example of VLAN Trunk Users can combine a number of VLAN ports together to create VLAN trunks To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt VLAN Trunk Settings as show below VLAN Trunk Global Settings VLAN Trunk State Enabled Disabled VLAN
48. IP address mask Click the Select button to select a CPU ACL type Click the Create button to create a profile Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button the following page will appear i A m i sii B E alle ma ile 5 Profile ID F Profile Type IPVb IPv6 Class Yes IPv6 Flow Label Figure 7 35 CPU Access Profile Detail Information IPv6 ACL Click the Show All Profiles button to navigate back to the CPU ACL Profile List Page After clicking the Add View Rules button the following page will appear i Na y Unused Rule Entries 99 Profile ID Profile Type Action TER E Figure 7 36 CPU Access Rule List IPv6 ACL Click the Add Rule button to create a new CPU ACL rule in this profile Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page Click the Show Details button to view more information about the specific rule created Click the Delete Rules button to remove the specific entry Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist After clicking the Add Rule button the following page will appear BB xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile Information Profile ID Profile Type IPv6 Class IPv6 Flow Label Rule Detail Keep the input field blank to specify that the corresponding option does not
49. IPv6 Edit button to edit the IPv6 settings for the specific entry El Mode Only Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry El Mode Only Y lt Q NOTE To create IPv6 interfaces the user has to create an IPv4 interface then edit it to IPv6 Click the Add button to see the following window 32 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Interface Name f Max 12 characters IPv4 Address _ Seg 172 18 211 10 Subnet Mask __ fe g 255 255 255 254 or 0 32 VLAN Name _ Max 32 characters Interface Admin State Enabled w Secondary Interface F Figure 3 10 IPv4 Interface Settings window El Mode Only The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Subnet Mask Enter the IPv4 subnet mask used S Secondary Interface Tick the check box to use this Interface as a Secondary Interface When the primary IP is not available the VLAN will switch to the secondary interface It will switch back when the primary IP was recovered Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page Click the IPv4 Edit button to see the following window Get IF From Static IF Interface Name IPv4 Address 10 733 60 112 e g 172 18 211 10 Subnet Mask 259 25909 290 1 e g 255 255 255 254 or 0 32 VLAN Name IPv4 State Enabled Interface Admin State Enabled l
50. If configuring the Combo ports this defines the type of transport medium to be used Click the Apply button to implement changes made Click the Refresh button to refresh the display section of this page xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Port Description Settings The Switch supports a port description feature where the user may name various ports To view the following window click System Configuration gt Port Configuration gt Port Description Settings as show below Unit From Port To Port Medium Type Description Figure 2 4 Port Description Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IT Select the unit you wish to configure From Port To Port Select the appropriate port range used for the configuration here Medium Type Specify the medium type for the selected ports If configuring the Combo ports the Medium Type defines the type of transport medium to be used whether Copper or Fiber Users may then enter a description for the chosen port s Click the Apply button to implement changes made Port Error Disabled The following window displays the information about ports that have been disconnected by the Switch when a packet storm occurs or a loop was detected To view the following window click System Configuration gt Port Configuration gt Port Error Disabled as show below xStack DGS 3120 Series Laye
51. Learning state to the Forwarding state or from the Forwarding state to the Blocking state The trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for the same transition Implementation of this trap is optional 324 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Appendix D Glossary 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX 100BASE FX 100BASE TX 10BASE T ageing ATM auto negotiation backbone port backbone bandwidth baud rate BOOTP bridge broadcast broadcast storm console port CSMA CD data center switching Ethernet Fast Ethernet Flow Control forwarding full duplex half duplex IP address IPX LAN Local Area Network latency line speed main port MDI Medium Dependent Interface MDI X Medium Dependent Interface Cross over MIB Management Information Base A short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 550 meters A long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 10 kilometers 100Mbps Ethernet implementation over fiber 100Mbps Ethernet implementation over Category 5 and Type 1 Twisted Pair cabling The IEEE 802 3 specification for Ethernet over Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP cabling The automatic removal of dynamic entries from the Switch Database which have timed out and are no longer valid Asynchronous Transfer Mode A connection oriented transmission protocol based o
52. Limit for the PoE system enter a value between 1W and 370W for the Switch in the Power Limit field When the total consumed power exceeds the power limit the PoE controller located in the PSE disconnects the power to prevent overloading the power supply PoE System Settings To view the following window click System Configuration gt PoE gt PoE System Settings as show below xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Units 1 3 5 Power Limit 1 370 Power Disconnect Method Legacy PD PoE System Information Unit Power Limit Watts Power Consumption Watts Power Remained Watts Power Disconnection Method Legacy PD Note If Power Disconnection Method is set to deny next port then the system can not utilize out of its maximum power capacity The maximum unused wattis 19W Figure 2 7 PoE System Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Unit Select the unit you wish to configure Tick the All check box to select all units Power Limit 1 370 Sets the limit of power to be used from the Switch s power source to PoE ports The user may configure a Power Limit between 1 and 370W for the DGS 3120 24PC and DGS 3120 48PC The default setting is 370W Power Disconnect The PoE controller uses either Deny Next Port or Deny Low Priority Port to offset the power Method limit being exceeded and keeps the Switch s power at a usable level Use the drop do
53. Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Web based User Interface The user interface provides access to various Switch configuration and management windows allows you to view performance statistics and permits you to graphically monitor the system status Areas of the User Interface The figure below shows the user interface Three distinct areas divide the user interface as described in the table AJ J E a D Link Sodom s UNK S Acta X D e xStack Power I i A HE AN E L e ce E as onsole Building Networks for RES Fan Master D ee SD Card s A i 15 gt Save Y Tools Stack ID Refresh Interval System Up Time 00 Days 00 06 31 Logged in as Administrator Anonymous 10 90 90 1 P Logout System Configuration Management L2 Features 9 L3 Features j aos H ACL E 3 Security E Network Application OAM E Monitoring STACKING STATUS Area Number Device Information Device Type DGS 3120 24TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch System Name System Location System Contact Boot PROM Version Firmware Version Hardware Version Al Serial Number Device Status and Quick Configurations SNTP Disabled Spanning Tree Disabled SNMP Disabled Safeguard Engine Disabled System Log Disabled SSL Disabled GVRP Disabled Password Encryption Disabled Telnet Enabled TCP 23 Settings Web Enabled TCP 80 Settings VLAN Trunk Disabled Build 1 00 007 Build 1 00 024 D1234567
54. OA Destination File Po Figure 12 6 Download Firmware TFTP window El Mode Only The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Use the drop down menu to select a unit for receiving the firmware Select All for all units TFTP Server IP Enter the TFTP server IP address used Source File Enter the location and name of the Source File Oo Click Download to initiate the download Download Firmware From HTTP This page allows the user to download firmware from a computer to the Switch and updates the switch 306 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Download Firmware From TFTP O Download Firmware From HTTP Unit Destination File Po source File fe Figure 12 7 Download Firmware HTTP window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description O Use the drop down menu to select a unit for receiving the firmware Select All for all units Destination File Enter the location of the Destination File Enter the location of the Source File or click the Browse button to navigate to the firmware file for the download Click Download to initiate the download Upload Firmware The following window is used to upload firmware from the Switch Upload Firmware To TFTP This page allows the user to upload firmware from the Switch to a TFTP Server Upload Firmware To TFTP Unit 7 TFTP S
55. Power over Ethernet PoE as defined by the IEEE 802 3af and 802 3at All ports can support PoE up to 30W Ports 1 24 can supply about 48 VDC power to Powered Devices PDs over Category 5 or Category 3 UTP Ethernet cables The Switch follows the standard PSE Power Sourcing Equipment pinout Alternative A whereby power is sent out over pins 1 2 3 and 6 The Switches work with all D Link 802 3af capable devices The Switch includes the following PoE features xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide e Auto discovery recognizes the connection of a PD Powered Device and automatically sends power to it e The Auto disable feature occurs under two conditions firstly if the total power consumption exceeds the system power limit and secondly if the per port power consumption exceeds the per port power limit e Active circuit protection automatically disables the port if there is a short Other ports will remain active Based on 802 3af at PDs receive power according to the following classification PSE provides power according to the following classification Class Maximum power available to PD Class Max power used by PSE 15 4W o 162w 3 few User define 31 2W 15 4W 15 4W To configure the PoE features on the Switch click System Configuration gt PoE The PoE System Settings window is used to assign a power limit and power disconnect method for the whole PoE system To configure the Power
56. SNMP community members using the community string created can read from and write to the contents of the MIBs on the Switch Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry SNMP Group Table Settings An SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users identified in the SNMP User Table to the views created in the previous window To view the following window click Management gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Group Table Settings as show below 92 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Add Group Group Name Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name User based Security Model SNMPv1 security Level NoAuthNoPriv Apply Total Entries 9 Read View Name Write View Name Notify view Name User based Security Model Security Level Community Community NoAuthNoPriv Delete public Community community MNoAuthWNoPriv Delete initial restricted restricted NoAuthNoPriv Delete private Community Community Community NoAuthNoPriv Delete private Community Community Community NoAuthNoPrv Delete ReadGroup Community Community NoAuthNoPriv Delete ReadGroup Community Community NoAuthNoPriv Delete WriteGroup Community Community Community NoAuthNoPriv Delete WriteGroup Community Community Community NoAuthNoPriv Delete Figure 3 38 SNMP Group Table
57. Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parameter Description Filter DHCP Server Trap Enable or disable this feature Log State Illegal Server Log Choose an illegal server log suppress duration of 1 minute 5 minutes or 30 minutes w ae Duration Unit Select the unit you want to Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Choose Enabled to enable the DHCP server screening or Disabled to disable it The default is Disabled Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section DHCP Offer Permit Entry Settings Users can add or delete permit entries on this page To view this window click Security gt DHCP Server Screening gt DHCP Offer Permit Entry Settings as shown below Server IP Address Clients MAC Address Ports e 9 1 1 1 3 1 5 7 CAPons Total Entries 0 Server IP Address Clients MAC Address Figure 8 54 DHCP Offer Permit Entry Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description aie IP Address The IP address of the DHCP server to be A ooo Clients MAC Address s MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client MAC address of the DHCP client The port numbers of the filter DHCP server Tick the All Ports check box to include all the ports on this switch for this configuration Click the Apply button to acce
58. Severity Emergency 0 Server IPv4 Address Facility UDP Port 514 or 6000 65535 Status Disabled System Log Server List Server IP Address Severity Facility UDP Port Figure 2 12 System Log Server Settings SI Mode Only Add System Log Server Server ID Severity Emergency 0 Server IPv4 Address O Server IPv6 Address Facility UDP Port 514 or 6000 65535 Status Disabled Apply Delete All System Log Server List Server IP Address Severity Facility UDP Port Figure 2 13 System Log Server Settings El Mode Only The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Server ID Syslog server settings index 1 to 4 Server IPv4 Address The IPv4 address of the Syslog server Server IPv6 Address The IPv6 address of the Syslog server El Mode Only UDP Port Type the UDP port number used for sending Syslog messages The default is 514 Severity Use the drop down menu to select the higher level of messages that will be sent All messages which level is higher than selecting level will be sent The options are Emergency Alert Critical Error Warning Notice Informational and Debug Facility Use the drop down menu to select Local 0 Local 1 Local 2 Local 3 Local 4 Local 5 Local 6 or Local 7 Choose Enabled or Disabled to activate or deactivate Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete All button to remove all servers configured System Log U
59. Specify to relay the packet to an IP address Client ID MAC Address The client s client ID which is the hardware address of client String The client s client ID which is specified by administrator Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry based on the information entered Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed DHCP Local Relay Settings The DHCP local relay settings allows the user to add option 82 into DHCP request packets when the DHCP client gets an IP address from the same VLAN If the DHCP local relay settings are not configured the Switch will flood the packets to the VLAN In order to add option 82 into the DHCP request packets the DHCP local relay settings and the state of the Global VLAN need to be enabled To view this window click Network Application gt DHCP gt DHCP Local Relay Settings as shown below 274 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide DHCP Local Relay State Enabled Disabled Configure DHCP Local Relay For VLAN VLAN Name O Disabled v DHCP BOOTP Local Relay VID List Figure 9 8 DHCP Local Relay Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description DHCP Local Relay Enable or disable the DHCP Local Relay Global State The default is Disab
60. Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide After clicking the Start button the following page will appear Results Reply tram 10 90 90 1 time 10ms Reply tram 10 90 90 1 time 10ms Reply tram 10 90 90 1 time 10ms 1 time 10ms 1 time 10ms 1 time 10ms 1 time 10ms 1 time 10ms 1 time 10ms Reply from 10 90 90 1 time 10ms w Resume Return to Ping Test screen Figure 11 25 Ping Test Result window Click the Stop button to halt the Ping Test Click the Resume button to resume the Ping Test Trace Route The trace route page allows the user to trace a route between the switch and a given host on the network To view this window click Monitoring gt Trace Route as shown below IPv4 Trace Route Enter the IP Address ofthe device or station that you want to trace the route to and click Start IPv4 Address 0 0 0 0 TTL 1 60 Port 30000 64900 33435 Timeout 1 65535 sec Probe 1 9 Figure 11 26 Trace Route window SI Mode Only 301 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IPv4 Trace Route Enter the IP Address ofthe device or station that you want to trace the route to and click Start IPv4 Address TTL 1 60 Port 30000 64900 Timeout 1 65535 sec Probe 1 9 IPv6 Trace Route Enter the IPv6 Address ofthe device or station that you want to trace the route to and click Start IPv6 Address OoOo TTL 1 60 Port 30000 64900 Timeout
61. State O Enabled Disabled Interval 1 2147483647 sec History Size 1 500 MAC Notification Port Settings Unit From Port To Port State Disabled Apply MAC Address Notification State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Y Figure 4 35 MAC Notification Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Enable or disable MAC notification globally on the Switch The time in seconds between notifications Value range to use is 1 to 2147483647 History Size The maximum number of entries listed in the history log used for notification Up to 500 entries can be specified Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port Select the starting and ending ports for MAC notification State Enable MAC Notification for the ports selected using the pull down menu Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section MAC Address Aging Time Settings Users can configure the MAC Address aging time on the Switch To view the following window click L2 Features gt FDB gt MAC Address Aging Time Settings as show below 92 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide MAC Address Aging Time 10 1000000 Apply Figure 4 36 MAC Address Aging Time Settings window The fields that can be co
62. Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parameter Description DST Repeating Settings Using repeating mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Repeating mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified using a formula For example specify to begin DST on Saturday during the second week of April and end DST on Sunday during the last week of October From Which Week Of Enter the week of the month that DST will start The Month From Day Of Week Enter the day of the week that DST will start on From Month Enter the month DST will start on From Time In HH MM Enter the time of day that DST will start on To Which Week Of The Enter the week of the month the DST will end Month To Day Of Week Enter the day of the week that DST will end To Month Enter the month that DST will end To Time In HH MM Enter the time DST will end Parameter Description DST Annual Settings Using annual mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Annual mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified concisely For example specify to begin DST on April 3 and end DST on October 14 From Month Enter the month DST will start on each year Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Flash File System Settings Why use flash file system In old switch system the firmware configuration and log information are saved in a flash with fixed addresses and size This means that the maximum configuration file c
63. Target rs aAa 00 20 5C 01 44 44 00 20 5C 01 22 22 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 2 In the process of ARP PC A will first issue an ARP request to query PC B s MAC address The network structure is shown in Figure 1 Figure 1 In the meantime PC A s MAC address will be written into the Sender H W Address and its IP address will be written into the Sender Protocol Address in the ARP payload As PC B s MAC address is unknown the Target H W Address will be D00 00 00 00 00 00 while PC B s IP address will be written into the Target Protocol Address shown in Table1 Protocol Sender Address Protocol ARP Request 00 20 5C 01 10 10 10 1 00 00 00 00 10 10 102 11 11 00 00 Table 1 ARP Payload The ARP request will be encapsulated into an Ethernet frame and sent out As can be seen in Table 2 the Source Address in the Ethernet frame will be PC A s MAC address Since an ARP request is sent via broadcast the Destination address is in a format of Ethernet broadcast FF FF FF FF FF FF dl e a Destination Address Source Address Ether Type ARP Oo FF FF FF FF FF F 00 20 5C 01 11 11 Table 2 Ethernet Frame Format 315 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide When the switch receives the frame it will check the Source Address in the Ethernet frame s header If the address is not in its Forwarding Table the switch will learn PC A
64. a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Click the Group List link to configure the multicast address group list settings for the specific entry Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry After clicking the Group List link the following page will appear Multicast Address Group List Seting Profile ID 1 Profile Name ProfileMame Multicast Address List fs e g 2352 9 1 935 2 29 Multicast Address Group List 1 i Multicast Address List Figure 4 73 Multicast Address Group List Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Display the profile ID 119 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile Name Display the profile name Multicast Address List Enter the multicast address list here Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry IPv4 Limited Multicast Range Settings Users can configure the ports and VLANs on the Switch that will be involved in the Limited IPv4 Multicast Range The user can configure the range of multicast ports that will be acce
65. access control for authentication for network devices TACACS is facilitated through Authentication commands via one or more centralized servers The TACACS protocol encrypts all traffic between the Switch and the TACACS daemon using the TCP protocol to ensure reliable delivery In order for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security function to work properly a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server must be configured on a device other than the Switch called an Authentication Server Host and it must include usernames and passwords for authentication When the user is prompted by the Switch to enter usernames and passwords for authentication the Switch contacts the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify and the server will respond with one of three messages The server verifies the username and password and the user is granted normal user privileges on the Switch The server will not accept the username and password and the user is denied access to the Switch The server doesn t respond to the verification query At this point the Switch receives the timeout from the server and then moves to the next method of verification configured in the method list The Switch has four built in Authentication Server Groups one for each of the TACACS XTACACS TACACS and RADIUS protocols These built in Authentication Server Groups are used to authenticate users trying to access the Switch The users will set Authentication Server H
66. amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of the last member of a group Data Drive Group Expiry Specify the data driven group lifetime in seconds Time Querier State Specify to enable or disable the querier state Fast Leave Enable or disable the IGMP snooping fast leave function If enabled the membership is immediately removed when the system receive the IGMP leave message If the state is enable it allows the switch to be selected as a IGMP Querier Sends IGMP query packets It the state is disabled then the switch can not play the role as a querier NOTE that if the Layer 3 router connected to the switch provides only the IGMP proxy function but does not provide the multicast routing function then this state must be configured as disabled Otherwise if the Layer 3 router is not selected as the querier it will not send the IGMP query packet Since it will not also 96 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide send the multicast routing protocol packet the port will be timed out as a router port Report Suppression When enabled multiple IGMP reports or leave for a specific S G will be integrated into one report only before sending to the router port Data Driven Learning Specify to enable or disable the data driven learning state State Data Drive Learning Specify to enable or disable the data drive learning aged out option Aged Out Version Specify the version
67. authentication Following the authentication result users achieve different levels of authorization Notes about MAC based Access Control There are certain limitations and regulations regarding MAC based access control 1 Once this feature is enabled for a port the Switch will clear the FDB of that port 2 Ifa port is granted clearance for a MAC address in a VLAN that is not a Guest VLAN other MAC addresses on that port must be authenticated for access and otherwise will be blocked by the Switch 3 Ports that have been enabled for Link Aggregation and Port Security cannot be enabled for MAC based Authentication 4 Ports that have been enabled for GVRP cannot be enabled for Guest VLAN MAC based Access Control Settings This window is used to set the parameters for the MAC based access control function on the Switch The user can set the running state method of authentication RADIUS password view the Guest VLAN configuration to be associated with the MAC based access control function of the Switch and configure ports to be enabled or disabled for the MAC based access control feature of the Switch Please remember ports enabled for certain other features listed previously and cannot be enabled for MAC based access control To view this window click Security gt MAC based Access Control MAC gt MAC based Access Control Settings as shown below 22 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Gu
68. automatically Auto or can be assigned statically The default is Auto Type Display the model name of the corresponding switch in a stack Exist Denote whether a switch does or does not exist in a stack Priority Display the priority ID of the Switch The lower the number the higher the priority The box switch with the lowest priority number in the stack denotes the Primary Master switch Display the MAC address of the corresponding switch in the switch stack Prom Version Show the PROM in use for the Switch This may be different from the values shown in the illustration Runtime Version Show the firmware version in use for the Switch This may be different from the values shown in the illustrations H W Version Show the hardware version in use for the Switch This may be different from the values shown in the illustration 305 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Download firmware The following window is used to download firmware for the Switch Download Firmware From TFTP This page allows the user to download firmware from a TFTP Server to the Switch and updates the switch a Download Firmware From TFTP O Download Firmware From HTTP Unit 1 we TFTP Sener Pi o Source File fo Destination File Po Figure 12 5 Download Firmware TFTP window SI Mode Only Download Firmware From TFTP O Download Firmware From HTTP Unit 4 TFTP Server ip O
69. aware Prior to the adoption of 802 1Q VLANs port based and MAC based VLANs were in common use These VLANs relied upon a Port VLAN ID PVID to forward packets A packet received on a given port would be assigned that port s PVID and then be forwarded to the port that corresponded to the packet s destination address found in the Switch s forwarding table If the PVID of the port that received the packet is different from the PVID of the port that is to transmit the packet the Switch will drop the packet Within the Switch different PVIDs mean different VLANs remember that two VLANs cannot communicate without an external router So VLAN identification based upon the PVIDs cannot create VLANs that extend outside a given switch or switch stack Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the Switch If no VLANs are defined on the Switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLANs are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVIDs within the Switch to VIDs on the network The Switch will compare the VID of a packet to
70. be associated with the data traffic to be forwarded on the multicast VLAN None lf None is specified the packet s original priority is used The default setting is None Replace Priority Specify that the packet s priority will be changed by the switch based on the remap priority This flag will only take effect when the remap priority is set Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Edit button to configure the IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings for the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Click the Profile List link to configure the IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings for the specific entry After clicking the Edit button the following page will appear 113 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide VLAN Name VLANname State Disabled Replace Source IF 0 0 0 0 e a 10 90 90 6 Remap Priority L_ Replace Priority Unit Untagged Member Ports 21 22 24 Oo oO OC 7 i j i E u oO II 24 Tagged Member Ports 01 02 03 04 5 5 T 8 i 2 E 5 F a i 7 d AL Untagged Source Ports 5 J 23 aa h E 7 LI or A E E 8 E E E E E E Tagged Source Ports E a T 8 f 2 3 lt j j 8 2 21 Za 24 i r Oo Oo E Figure 4 65 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings Edit window The fields that can be configured ar
71. below 30 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 5 Static Interface Name Management VLAN Name Interface Admin State IP Address subnet Mask Gateway DHCP BOOTP default Enabled Apply Figure 3 7 System IP Address Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter DHCP BOOTP Description Allow the entry of an IP address subnet mask and a default gateway for the Switch These fields should be of the form xxx xxx xxx xxx where each xxx is a number represented in decimal form between 0 and 255 This address should be a unique address on the network assigned for use by the network administrator The Switch will send out a DHCP broadcast request when it is powered up The DHCP protocol allows IP addresses network masks and default gateways to be assigned by a DHCP server If this option is set the Switch will first look for a DHCP server to provide it with this information before using the default or previously entered settings The Switch will send out a BOOTP broadcast request when it is powered up The BOOTP protocol allows IP addresses network masks and default gateways to be assigned by a central BOOTP server If this option is set the Switch will first look for a BOOTP server to provide it with this information before using the default or previously entered settings The following table will describe t
72. button Total Entries 1 MAC Address VLAN Name 00 11 22 33 44 55 default an 1 EZ Figure 8 34 MAC based Access Control Local Settings Edit by Name window To change the selected MAC address VID value the user can click the Edit by ID button Total Entries 1 MAC Address VLAN Name 00 11 22 33 44 55 Edit by Name Apply EL iso Figure 8 35 MAC based Access Control Local Settings Edit by ID window Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist MAC based Access Control Authentication State Users can display MAC based access control Authentication State information To view this window click Security gt MAC based Access Control MAC gt MAC based Access Control Authentication State as shown below PortList e g 1 5 10 si Clear by Port View All Hosts Clear All Hosts Total Authenticating Hosts 0 Total Authenticated Hosts 0 Total Blocked Hosts 0 Port MAC Address Priority Aging Time Block Time Figure 8 36 MAC based Access Control Authentication State window To display MAC based access control Authentication State information enter a port number in the space provided and then click the Find button Click the Clear by Port button to clear all the information linked to the port number entered Click the View All Hosts button to display all the existing hosts Click the Clear All hosts button to clear out all the existing hosts
73. button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page Click the Apply button to accept the changes made After clicking the View button the following page will appear Profile ID Access ID Rate Burst Size Kbps Rate Exceeded Remark DSCP Figure 7 47 ACL Flow meter Display window Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page 189 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Egress Access Profile List El Mode Only Egress ACL performs per flow processing of packets when they egress the Switch The Switch supports three Profile Types Ethernet ACL IPv4 ACL and IPv6 ACL To view this window click ACL gt Egress Access Profile List as shown below Add an Ethernet ACL Profile The window shown below is the Add Egress ACL Profile window for Ethernet To use specific filtering masks in this egress ACL profile click the packet filtering mask field to highlight it red This will add more filed to the mask After clicking the Add ACL Profile button the following page will appear Profile ID 1 256 Profile Name Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL Tagged w O IPv4 ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask MAC Address VLAN 802 1p Ethernet Type MAC Address C Source MAC Mask O Destination MAC Mask 802 10 VLAN O VLAN VLAN Mask 0 FFFJ sd 802 1p C 802 1p Ethernet Type L
74. conditions NOTE If a data driven group is created and MLD member ports are learned later the entry will become of an ordinary MLD snooping entry Data driven learning is useful on a network which has video cameras connected to a Layer 2 switch that is recording and sending IP multicast data The switch needs to forward IP data to a data centre without dropping or flooding any 103 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide packets Since video cameras do not have the capability to run MLD protocols the IP multicast data will be dropped with the original MLD snooping function MLD Snooping Settings Users can configure the settings for MLD snooping To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Settings as show below MLO Snooping Global Settings MLD Snooping State OEnabled Disabled MLD Data Driven Learning Settings Max Learned Entry Value 1 1024 Total Entries 1 VLAN Name default Disabled Modify Router Port mA e Figure 4 51 MLD Snooping Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description MLD Snooping State Click the radio buttons to enable or disable the MLD snooping state Max Learning Entry Value Enter the maximum learning entry value Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Edit button to configure the
75. for the destination port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff Select Protocol ID Enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask Specify the protocol ID mask in hex form hex 0x0 Oxff Protocol ID Mask Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID traffic User Define Specify the Layer 4 part mask Click the Select button to select an ACL type Click the Create button to create a profile Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button the following page will appear 195 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Show All Profiles Figure 7 54 Egress Access Profile Detail Information window IPv4 ACL Click the Show All Profiles button to navigate back to the Access Profile List Page After clicking the Add View Rules button the following page will appear Available HW Entries 383 Profile ID Profile Type Action EEN Je Figure 7 55 Egress Access Rule List window IPv4 ACL Click the Add Rule button to create a new ACL rule in this profile Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page Click the Show Details button to view more information about the specific rule created Click the Delete Rules button to remove the specific entry Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist After clicking the
76. forbidden router port will not propagate routing packets out Dynamic Router Port Displays router ports that have been dynamically configured Select the appropriate ports individually to include them in the Router Port configuration Click the Select All button to select all the ports for configuration Click the Clear All button to unselect all the ports for configuration Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page MLD Snooping Rate Limit Settings Users can configure the rate limit of the MLD control packet that the switch can process on a specific port or VLAN in this page To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Rate Limit Settings as show below 106 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Port List e g 1 1 23 24 VID List e g 1 34 Rate Limit 1 1000 No Limit PortList O VID List Total Entries 1 VID Rate Limit 1 No Limit Figure 4 54 MLD Snooping Rate Limit Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Port List Enter the Port List here VID List Enter the VID List value here Rate Limit Configure the rate limit of MLD control packet that the switch can process on a specific port VLAN The rate is specified in packet per seco
77. function The user needs to be very careful when setting filter functions for the target VLAN so that these HTTP packets are not denied by the Switch 3 Ifa RADIUS server is to be used for authentication the user must first establish a RADIUS Server with the appropriate parameters including the target VLAN before enabling Web Authentication on the Switch WAC Global Settings Users can configure the Switch for the Web based access control function To view this window click Security gt Web based Access Control WAC gt WAC Global Settings as shown below WAC Global Settings WAC Global State OEnabled O Disabled WAC Settings Virtual IP Method Redirection Path f f Clear Redirection Path O Yes O No RADIUS Authorization Local Authorization HTTP S Port 1 65535 HTTP OHTIPS Figure 8 37 WAC Global Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description WAC Global State Use this selection menu to either enable or disable the Web Authentication on the Switch Virtual IP Enter a virtual IP address This address is only used by WAC and is not known by any other modules of the Switch Use this drop down menu to choose the authenticator for Web based Access Control The user may choose Local Choose this parameter to use the local authentication method of the Switch as the authenticating method for users trying to access the network via the switch This is in fact the usernam
78. in bytes of IP packets IP packet bytes are measured by taking the size of the IP header but not the link specific headers If the packet flow exceeds the PIR that packet flow is marked red The PIR must be configured to be equal or more than that of the CIR PBS Peak Burst Size Measured in bytes the PBS is associated with the PIR and is used to identify packets that exceed the normal boundaries of packet size The PBS should be configured to accept the biggest IP packet that is expected in the IP flow srTCM Single Rate Three Color Marker This along with the tr TCM are two methods available on the switch for metering and marking packet flow The srT CM marks its IP packet flow based on the configured CBS and EBS A packet flow that does not reach the CBS is marked green if it exceeds the CBS but not the EBS its marked yellow and if it exceeds the EBS its marked red CBS Committed Burst Size Measured in bytes the CBS is associated with the CIR and Is used to identify packets that exceed the normal boundaries of packet size The CBS should be configured to accept the biggest IP packet that is expected in the IP flow EBS Excess Burst Size Measured in bytes the EBS is associated with the CIR and is used to identify packets that exceed the boundaries of the CBS packet size The EBS is to be configured for an equal or larger rate than the CBS DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point The part of the packet header where the c
79. in detail e Add to group Add a candidate to a group Clicking this option will reveal the following dialog box for the user to enter a password for authentication from the Candidate Switch before being added to the SIM group Click OK to enter the password or Cancel to exit the dialog box 44 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide xi Password on ae Java Applet Winda Figure 3 26 Input password window e Property To pop up a window to display the device information Menu Bar The Single IP Management window contains a menu bar for device configurations as seen below File Group Device View Help Figure 3 27 Menu Bar of the Topology View File e Print Setup Will view the image to be printed e Print Topology Will print the topology map e Preference Will set display properties such as polling interval and the views to open at SIM startup Group e Add to group Add a candidate to a group Clicking this option will reveal the following dialog box for the user to enter a password for authentication from the Candidate Switch before being added to the SIM group Click OK to enter the password or Cancel to exit the dialog box Input password wy xj Password a Java Applet Winda Figure 3 28 Input password window e Remove from Group Remove an MS from the group Device e Configure Will open the Web manager for the specific device View
80. in the stack will clear the configurations of the unit removed and dynamically learned databases such as ARP will be cleared as well Then the Backup Master will begin backing up the Primary Master when the database synchronization has been completed by the stack If the Primary Master is removed the Backup Master will assume the Primary Master s role and a new Backup Master will be chosen using the election process Switches in the stack will clear the configurations of the unit removed and dynamically learned databases such as ARP will be cleared as well The new Primary Master will inherit the MAC and IP address of the previous Primary Master to avoid conflict within the stack and the network itself If both the Primary Master and the Backup Master are removed the election process is immediately processed and a new Primary Master and Backup Master is determined Switches in the stack will clear the configurations of the units removed and dynamically learned databases such as ARP will be cleared as well Static switch configurations still remain in the database of the remaining switches in the stack and those functions will not be affected NOTE If there is a Box ID conflict when the stack is in the discovery phase the device will enter ry a special standalone topology mode Users can only get device information configure lt Q Box IDs save and reboot All stacking ports will be disabled and an error message will be produced on the loca
81. is 60 IT Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port Select a range of ports to use for this configuration Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the protection mode for a specific port State Specify the BPDU protection mode The default mode is shutdown Drop Drop all received BPDU packets when the port enters under attack state Block Drop all packets include BPDU and normal packets when the port enters under attack state Shutdown Shut down the port when the port enters under attack state Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section 244 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Loopback Detection Settings The Loopback Detection LBD function is used to detect the loop created by a specific port This feature is used to temporarily shut down a port on the Switch when a CTP Configuration Testing Protocol packet has been looped back to the Switch When the Switch detects CTP packets received from a port or a VLAN this signifies a loop on the network The Switch will automatically block the port or the VLAN and send an alert to the administrator The Loopback Detection port will restart change to normal state when the Loopback Detection Recover Time times out The Loopback Detection function can be implemented on a range of ports at a time The user may enable or disable this function using the pull down menu To view thi
82. is only possible in one direction and if there is a break in the chain then data transfer will obviously be affected Duplex Ring As shown in Figure 2 24 the Duplex Ring stacks switches in a ring or circle format where data can be transferred in two directions This topology is very resilient due to the fact that if there is a break in the ring data can still be transferred through the stacking cables between switches in the stack 22 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide joo w pom Gio TE eo DGS 3120 24TC DGS 3120 24TC Switches Switches Ghio a o Gupo m Ghio a Gigabit Stacking Cables Gigabit Stacking Cables hipo er du Po w _ EHe cas aE Figure 2 23 Switches stacked in a Duplex Chain Figure 2 24 Switches stacked in
83. is used to enable or disable the command logging settings To view this window click System Configuration gt Command Logging Settings as shown below Command Logging Settings Command Logging State O Enabled Disabled Figure 2 22 Command Logging Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Command Logging State Use the radio buttons to enable or disable the function Click the Apply button to accept the changes made NOTE When the switch is under the booting procedure all configuration commands will not be logged When the user uses AAA authentication to logged in the user name should not be changed if the user has used the Enable Admin function to replace its privilege Stacking From firmware release v1 00 of this Switch the Switch now supports switch stacking where a set of six switches can be combined to be managed by one IP address through Telnet the GUI interface web the console port or through SNMP Each switch of this series has two stacking ports located at the rear of the device which can be used to connect other devices and make them stack together After adding these stacking ports the user may connect these ports together using copper cables also sold separately in one of two possible topologies Duplex Chain As shown in Figure 2 23 The Duplex Chain topology stacks switches together in a chain link format Using this method data transfer
84. locked MAC address table for the selected ports Lock Address Mode This pull down menu allows the option of how the MAC address table locking will be implemented on the Switch for the selected group of ports The options are Permanent The locked addresses will only age out after the Switch has been reset DeleteOnTimeout The locked addresses will age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOnReset The locked addresses will not age out until the Switch has been reset or rebooted Max Learning Address Specify the maximum value of port security entries that can be learned on this port Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the View Detail button to display the information of the specific entry 240 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide After clicking the View Detail button the following page will appear 2 VLAN Name VID List e g 1 4 6 Max Learning Address 0 3072 P No Limit Port Security Port WLAN Table VLAN Name Max Learning Address Figure 8 45 Port Security Port VLAN Settings window Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page Port Security VLAN Settings Users can configure the maximum number of port security entries that can be learned on a speci
85. lower half of the table displays any previously created groups To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt 802 1v protocol VLAN gt 802 1v Protocol Group Settings as show below Add Protocol VLAN Group Note Name should be less than 33 characters Add Protocol for Protocol VLAN Group GroupID Group Name Protocol Protocol Value 0 FFFF Total Entries 0 Group ID Group Name Frame Type Protocol Value Figure 4 8 802 1v Protocol Group Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Group ID Select an ID number for the group between 7 and 16 Group Name This is used to identify the new Protocol VLAN group Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters Protocol This function maps packets to protocol defined VLANs by examining the type octet within the packet header to discover the type of protocol associated with it Use the drop down menu to toggle between Ethernet Il IEEE802 3 SNAP and IEEE802 3 LLC Protocol Value Enter a value for the Group The protocol value is used to identify a protocol of the frame type specified The form of the input is 0x0 to Oxffff Depending on the frame type the octet string will have one of the following values For Ethernet Il this is a 16 bit 2 octet hex value For example IPv4 is 800 IPv6 is 86dd ARP is 806 etc For IEEE802 3 SNAP this is a 16 bit 2 67 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Ma
86. many times that the rule was hit When a range of ports is to be configured the Auto Assign check box MUST be ticked in the Access ID field of this window If not the user will be presented with an error message and the access rule will not be configured Ticking the All Ports check box will denote all ports on the Switch VLAN Name Specify the VLAN name to apply to the access rule VLAN ID Specify the VLAN ID to apply to the access rule Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button in the Access Rule List the following page will appear Access Rule Deta Tormation ACL Rule Details Profile ID Access ID Profile Type Action Ports 15 Source IP 192 168 1 0 Figure 7 12 Access Rule Detail Information IPv4 ACL Click the Show All Rules button to navigate back to the Access Rule List 163 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Adding an IPv6 ACL Profile The window shown below is the Add ACL Profile window for IPv6 To use specific filtering masks in this ACL profile click the packet filtering mask field to highlight it red This will add more filed to the mask After clicking the Add ACL Profile button the following page will appear Profile ID 1 768 Profile Name IPVBACL Select ACL Type O Ethernet ACL O IPv4 ACL
87. matter Access ID 1 100 CI Auto Assign Class e g 0 255 Flow Label e 9 0 FFFFF Rule Action Action Permit Time Range Name F Ports PJ fig 124 124 16 1 9 Figure 7 37 Add CPU Access Rule IPv6 ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Access ID 1 100 Enter a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 100 select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Flow Label Configuring this field in hex form will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non default quality of service or real time service packets Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Ports Ticking the All Ports check box will denote all ports on the Switch Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button in the C
88. menu to choose the port that will display statistics 293 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 1024 1518 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Show Hide Check whether or not to display 64 65 127 128 255 256 511 512 1023 and 1024 1518 packets received Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Clear
89. network into different broadcast domains so that packets 99 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLANs can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated Notes about VLANs on the Switch e No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLANs without a network device performing a routing function between the VLANs e The Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLANs The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1Q tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware e The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named default e The default VLAN has a VID 1 e The member ports of Port based VLANs may overlap if desired IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Some relevant terms e Tagging The act of pu
90. of IGMP packet that will be sent by this port If an IGMP packet received by the interface has a version higher than the specified version this packet will be dropped Displays the querier role Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Modify Router Port link the following page will appear VIF Snooping Router Porn setings VID 1 VLAN Name default Unit Static Router Port 05 06 j 8 iE i 2 3 5 j 8 g 2 21 22 23 24 2Q CQOa a 8 4 amp Forbidden Router Port E E E E Dynamic Router Port Router IP Figure 4 42 IGMP Snooping Router Port Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description FUnit Select the unit you want to configure Static Router Port This section is used to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicast enabled routers This will ensure that all packets with such a router as its destination will reach the multicast enabled router regardless of the protocol Forbidden Router Port This section is used to designate a range of ports as being not connected to multicast enabled routers This ensures that the forbidden router port will not propagate routing packets out Dynamic Router Port Displays router ports that have been dynamically configured Select the appropriate ports individually to include them in the Router Port
91. pice eam aes na ae aso aetia amet at acide mance nch Ramin maanee Heaanice 118 IPv4 Multicast Filtering cccccseccccsssseecceseecceesececsaeeecseseecssueeecsauseeceeasceeseaeeessaueeeeseaeceeseseceessageeessageeeenaneeesseaes 118 IPVA Multicast Prone Settine sn coil 119 IPVA Limited Multicast Range Setune sima 120 IPVa Max Multicast Group SetUNES siriaca an idas 120 PS Multicast RIMENO ri IN A IA ASA A a 121 PY6 Multicast Profile Setunes si ariecs since Ad iavocee a se bdacucba Gaeta vid voices fase oe bavic ba Tacke iaanonieiae 121 IPv6 Limited Multicast Range Settings iii Weaiancusankduslagsdvanudeadeeseedeveaeaediuedies backs 122 IPv6 Max Multicast Group Settings cccsccsssssccsssssssvecsecsssssecsscssssscenscesssseesscssssssenscssesssensessesssensessssssensesssssss 123 Multicast Elena Mode is 124 A O A A sen ae Atel ate Noose 125 ESTE GO All SUTIN S ee a cca a ng e Mr o leas eas 125 ELDP ca 8 pve Come emenee erat re armen ern ee rene a ee eee 126 LLDP Management Address Listessi oaan a e O e E O lander ty suandet ca ddasendctins 127 LLDP Basic TEV SSG S riesenia a e E a a a Ea Aaaa ea aTa EEA ER Ra 127 LEDP DOtT TEVS SEUNS caei a dl EAS 128 LLDP DO TEV S SEHN Soeren E 130 LEDR eS UIC OVS O A E tan eeect nacuaetes 131 EDP OCA ONE Mi OMIA UO an a E E 131 EEDE REMO Eo Into matones dea io a 133 NEB FDB SUN Sian 133 Alli A 135 IPv4 Default Route Settings Sl Mode Only ooooccncccccocccnncccconccnnccnnn
92. re configure the specific entry After clicking the Edit button the following page will appear MED snoobl g sla Group Settings VIB 1 VLAN Name default IPv6 Address FF56 123 0d 05 06 OF 08 09 10 11 Figure 4 56 MLD Snooping Static Group Settings Edit window Click the Select All button to select all the ports for configuration Click the Clear All button to unselect all the ports for configuration Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page MLD Router Port Users can display which of the Switch s ports are currently configured as router ports in IPv6 A router port configured by a user using the console or Web based management interfaces is displayed as a static router port designated by S A router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch is designated by D while a Forbidden port is designated by F To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Router Port as show below vo C VID 1 VLAN Name default Total Entries 2 1 Ma 2 gt gt 1 Note S Static Router Port D Dynamic Router Port Forbidden Router Port Figure 4 57 MLD Router Port window Enter a VID VLAN ID in the field at the top of the window Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Enter a page number and click the Go button t
93. router decides there are no more listeners of a group on a network Other Querier present interval Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that is the Querier Last listener query count Number of group specific queries sent before the router assumes there are no local listeners of a group The default number is the value of the robustness variable By default the robustness variable is set to 2 You might want to increase this value if you expect a subnet to be loosely Last Listener Query The maximum amount of time between group specific query messages including Interval those sent in response to done group messages You might lower this interval to reduce the amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of the last listener of a group Data Driven Group Here the user can enter the data driven group expiry time value Expiry Time Querier State This allows the switch to be specified as an MLD Querier Sends MLD query packets or a Non Querier A not send MLD query packets nh to enable or disable Here the user can enable or disable the fast done feature the user can enable or disable the fast done feature Used to enable or disable MLD snooping for the specified VLAN This field is Disabled by default Report Suppression Here the user can enable or disable the report suppression features Data Driven Learning Enable or disable data dri
94. sent to the Trap Receiver Once in Shutdown Forever mode the method of recovering the port is to manually recoup it using the System Configuration gt Port configuration gt Port Settings window or automatic recovering after the time period that is configured in the Traffic Auto Recover Time field Select the disabled port and return its State to Enabled status To utilize this method of Storm Control choose the Shutdown option of the Action parameter in the window below Use this window to enable or disable storm control and adjust the threshold for multicast and broadcast storms To view the following window click QoS gt Traffic Control Settings as show below 145 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Traffic Control Settings Unit From Port 0 To Port 01 wt Action Dro Countdown 0 or 3 30 min Time Interval 5 600 sec Threshold 0 255000 pkt s Trafic Control Type Traffic Trap Settings Traffic Log Settings Apply J Traffic Auto Recover Time 0 65535 Apply Traffic Control Type Action Threshold Interval Shutdown Forever Drop 5 Drop Drop None Drop None Drop 131072 Note For unicast storm traffic the violated action is always drop Drop 131072 o Drop 131072 o Drop 131072 Figure 6 6 Traffic Control Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Umit Select the unit you want to configure From
95. server Up to four server IPs can be configured per IP Interface Click the Apply button to accept the changes made DHCP Relay Option 60 Server Settings On this page the user can configure the DHCP relay option 60 server parameters To view this window click Network Application gt DHCP gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Option 60 Server Settings as shown below Relay IP Address Mode Drop l Apply Server Server Server Servera o 192 168 69 123 Delete 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Delete All Figure 9 5 DHCP Relay Option 60 Server Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Relay IP Address Enter the DHCP Relay Option 60 Server Relay IP Address Mode t Use the drop down menu to select the DHCP Relay Option 60 Server mode Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 2 2 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed A DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings This option decides whether the DHCP Relay will process the DHCP option 60 or not To view this window click Network Application gt DHCP gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings as shown below NOTE When there is no matching server found for the packet based on opt
96. set a O address the entry will be inactive Collector Port The destination UDP port for sending the sFlow datagrams If not specified the default value is 6343 Max Datagram Size The maximum number of data bytes that can be packed in a single sample datagram If not specified the default value is 1400 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry sFlow Flow Sampler Settings On this page the user can configure the sFlow flow sampler parameters By configuring the sampling function for a port a sample packet received by this port will be encapsulated and forwarded to the analyzer server at the specified interval e NOTE If the user wants the change the analyze server ID he needs to delete the flow sampler and creates a new one From Port To Part Analyzer Server ID 1 4 Rate 0 65535 MAX Header Size 18 256 3 a 3 a 3 6 3 656 3 Cm Total Entries O Analyzer Server ID Configuration Rate Active Rate MAX Header Size Figure 11 21 sFlow Flow Sampler Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Select a unit to configure From Port To Port Use the drop down menus to specify the list of ports to be configured Analyzer Server ID The analyzer server ID specifies the ID of a server analyzer where the packet will be forwarded The sampling rate for pack
97. state The default is 75 seconds Tx Hold Count 1 10 Used to set the maximum number of Hello packets transmitted per interval The count can be specified from 7 to 10 The default is 6 Max Hops 6 40 Used to set the number of hops between devices in a spanning tree region before the BPDU bridge protocol data unit packet sent by the Switch will be discarded Each 81 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide switch on the hop count will reduce the hop count by one until the value reaches zero The Switch will then discard the BDPU packet and the information held for the port will age out The user may set a hop count from 6 to 40 The default is 20 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section lt Q STP Port Settings STP can be set up on a port per port basis To view the following window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Port Settings as show below NOTE The Bridge Hello Time cannot be longer than the Bridge Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Bridge Max Age lt 2 x Bridge Forward Delay 1 second Bridge Max Age gt 2 x Bridge Hello Time 1 second Unit From Fart To Port External Cost 0 Auto Migrate es Edge P2P Port STP Enabled Restricted Role Restricted TCN Forward BPDU Enabled External Cost Restricted Role Restricted TCN Forward
98. that flow into and out of those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Ingress Filtering A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made is referred to as an ingress port If ingress filtering is enabled for a port the Switch will examine the VLAN information in the packet header if present and decide whether or not to forward the packet lf the packet is tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will first determine if the ingress port itself is a member of the tagged VLAN If it is not the packet will be dropped If the ingress port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN the Switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN If it is not the packet is dropped If the destination port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it to its attached network segment lf the packet is not tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will tag the packet with its own PVID as a VID if the port is a tagging port The switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the same VLAN has the same VID
99. the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button in the CPU Access Rule List the following page will appear 175 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide CPU ACL Rule Details Profile ID 1 Access ID 1 Ethernet 1 11 Source MAC Show All Rules Figure 7 28 CPU Access Rule Detail Information Ethernet ACL Click the Show All Rules button to navigate back to the CPU Access Rule List Adding a CPU IPv4 ACL Profile The window shown below is the Add CPU ACL Profile window for IP IPv4 To use specific filtering masks in this ACL profile click the packet filtering mask field to highlight it red This will add more filed to the mask After clicking the Add CPU ACL Profile button the following page will appear y TTI AGO a k y OT Profile 1D 1 5 Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL IPv4 ACL IPv6 ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask IPv4 DSCP IPv4 Address ICMP IPv4 DSCP CI DSCFP IPv4 Address _ Source IF Mask 522 Destination IP Mask ICMP C ICMP ICMP Type ICMP Code Figure 7 29 Add CPU ACL Profile IPv4 ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID 1 5 Enter a unique identifier number for t
100. the Clear All button to unselect all the ports Tagged Member Ports Specify the tagged member port of the multicast VLAN Click the Select All button to select all the ports or click the Clear All button to unselect all the ports Untagged Source Ports Specify the source port or range of source ports as untagged members of the multicast VLAN The PVID of the untagged source port is automatically changed to the multicast VLAN Source ports must be either tagged or untagged for any single multicast VLAN e both types cannot be members of the same multicast VLAN Click the Select All button to select all the ports for configuration Click the Clear All button to unselect all the ports for configuration Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Profile List link the following page will appear MLO Snooping MUTICaST VLAN Group LIST Setting VID 2 VLAN Name new Profile Name PHame MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Group List Multicast Group Profiles show MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Entries Figure 4 71 MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Group List Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Display the VLAN ID VLAN Name Display the VLAN name Profile Name Use the drop down menu to select the IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Group Profile name Click the Add button to a
101. the Dot1 TLV Protocol VLAN option After enabling this option to the user can select to use either VLAN Name VID List or All in the next drop down menu After selecting this the user can enter either the VLAN Name or VID List value in the space provided Dot1 TLV VLAN Use the drop down menu to enable or disable and configure the Dot TLV VLAN option After enabling this option to the user can select to use either VLAN Name VID List or All in the next drop down menu After selecting this the user can enter either the VLAN Name or VID List value in the space provided Dot1 TLV Protocol Identity Use the drop down menu to enable or disable and configure the Dot1 TLV Protocol Identity option After enabling this option the user can select to either use EAPOL LACP GVRP STP or All Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 129 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide LLDP Dot3 TLVs Settings This window is used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more IEEE 802 3 organizational specific TLV data type from outbound LLDP advertisements To view the following window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Dot3 TLVs Settings as show below Unit MAC PHY Configuration Status Maximum Frame Size Unit 1 Settings 4 Di 2 3 4 5 7 6 g Disable isabled isable isabled Disabled Disabled w MAC PHY Configuration Status
102. the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header Select Packet Content to instruct the Switch to examine the packet content in each frame s header Packet Content Allows users to examine up to 4 specified offset_chunks within a packet at one time and specifies the frame content offset and mask There are 4 chunk offsets and masks that can be configured A chunk mask presents 4 bytes 4 offset_chunks can be selected from a possible 32 predefined offset_chunks as described below offset_chunk_1 offset_chunk_2 offset_chunk_3 offset_chunk_4 168 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide uno ou ne asno una Example offset_chunk_1 O Oxffffffff will match packet byte offset 126 127 0 1 offset_chunk_10 OxOOOOffff will match packet byte offset 0 1 NOTE Only one packet_content_mask profile can be created With this advanced unique Packet Content Mask also known as Packet Content Access Control List ACL the D Link xStack switch family can effectively mitigate some network attacks like the common ARP Spoofing attack that is wide spread today This is why the Packet Content ACL is able to inspect any specified content of a packet in different protocol layers Click the Select button to sel
103. the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Edit button to configure the secondary VLAN Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Click the Edit button to see the following window Private VLAN Settings Private VID Private VLAN Name secondary VLAN Type Isolated Secondary VLAN Name Max 32 characters Secondary VLAN List e g 1 4 8 View Private VLAN List Private VLAN Isolated and Community Detail Table Isolated VLAN Isolated Ports Total Entries 0 Community VLAN Community Ports Figure 4 15 Private VLAN Settings Edit window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Secondary VLAN Type Use the drop down menu to select secondary VLAN type between solated or Community Secondary VLAN Name Enter a secondary VLAN name Secondary VLAN List Enter a list of secondary VLAN ID Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the View Private VLAN List link to view all the private VLAN 13 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide PVID Auto Assign Settings Users can enable or disable PVID Auto Assign Status The default setting is enabled To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt PVID Auto Assign Settings as show below PVID Auto Assign State Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 16 PVID Auto Assign Settings window Click the Apply but
104. the packet filtering mask field to highlight it red This will add more filed to the mask After clicking the Add ACL Profile button the following page will appear 155 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile ID 1 768 Profile Name Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL Tagged O IPv4 ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask MAC Address Ethernet Type MAC Address C Source MAC Mask O O Destination MAC Mask 802 10 VLAN DT VLAN VLANMask O FFF sd 802 1p 802 4p Ethernet Type C Ethernet Type Figure 7 3 Add ACL Profile window Ethernet ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Enter a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 7 to 768 Profile Name Enter a profile name for the profile created Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 address or packet content This will change the window according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header Select Packet Content to instruct the Switch
105. the port Unicast Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address Multicast Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Clear button to clear all statistics counters on this window Click the View Table link to display the information in a table rather than a line graph Click the View Graphic link to display the information in a line graph rather than a table UMB_Cast RX To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Statistics gt Port Statistics gt Packets gt UMB_Cast RX as shown below 285 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide RX Packets Analysis Port 1 1000 pie Unicast YUL ena Multicast rod Broadcast 600 500 400 300 200 100 WnittPackets sec Time Interval fice ke ee Record Number 200 ShowHide lf Unicast lf Multicast W Broadcast Figure 11 6 UMB_ cast RX window for Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Packets Click the link to display the information in a table rather than a line graph Pi iin Unit Packets Unicast Multicast Broadcast TX Packets
106. this rule The user can select Drop to initiate the drop action or the user can select Replace to initiate the replace action Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist Multicast Filtering Mode Users can configure the multicast filtering mode To view the following window click L2 Features gt Multicast Filtering gt Multicast Filtering Mode as show below VLAN Name VID List Multicast Filter Mode ano Forward All Groups v VLAN Name VID List O Total Entries 3 VLAN Name Multicast Filter Mode default Forward Unregistered Groups VLANname Forward Unregistered Groups Name Forward Unregistered Groups EEE se Figure 4 80 Multicast Filtering Mode window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name VID List The VLAN to which the specified filtering action applies Tick the All check box to apply this feature to all the VLANs Multicast Filtering Mode This drop down menu allows you to select the action the Switch will take when it receives a multicast packet that requires forwarding to a port in the specified VLAN Forward All Groups This will instruct the Switch to forward all multicast packets to the specified VLAN Forward Unregistered Groups T
107. this web management to admin level lf the password is incorrect web management will stay at the login page and wait for user to login again Enable Admin Figure 8 55 Enable Admin window When this window appears click the Enable Admin button revealing a window for the user to enter authentication password username as shown below A successful entry will promote the user to Administrator level privileges on the Switch Connect to 10 90 90 90 The server 10 90 90 90 at Welcome requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name e Y _ Remember my password Figure 8 56 Log in Page Authentication Policy Settings Users can enable an administrator defined authentication policy for users trying to access the Switch When enabled the device will check the Login Method List and choose a technique for user authentication upon login To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Policy Settings as shown below Authentication Policy Disabled Response Timeout 0 255 SEC User Attempts 1 255 times Apply Figure 8 57 Authentication Policy Settings window 251 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description
108. to a specific page when multiple pages exist After clicking the Edit button the following page will appear VIF SNOOpIng static OUP setting VID 1 VLAN Name default IPv4 Address 224 1 1 1 Unit Apply Figure 4 45 IGMP Snooping Static Group Settings window Click the Select All button to select all the ports for configuration Click the Clear All button to unselect all the ports for configuration Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page 99 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IGMP Router Port Users can display which of the Switch s ports are currently configured as router ports A router port configured by a user using the console or Web based management interfaces is displayed as a static router port designated by S A router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch is designated by D while a Forbidden port is designated by F To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Router Port as show below VID VLAN Name default Total Entries 2 1 Mam 2 gt gt Ie Note S Static Router Port D Dynamic Router Port F Forbidden Router Port Figure 4 46 IGMP Router Port window Enter a VID VLAN ID in the field at the top of the window Click the Find button to locate a specific entry
109. to examine the packet content in each frame s header Source MAC Mask Enter a MAC address mask for the source MAC address e g FF FF FF FF FF FF Destination MAC Mask Enter a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address e g FF FF FF FF FF FF 802 1Q VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the 802 1Q VLAN identifier of each packet header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding 802 1p Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the 802 1p priority value of each 156 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide a packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding Ethernet Type Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s header Click the Select button to select an ACL type Click the Create button to create a profile Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button the following page will appear 255 Frote Del ACL Profile Details Profile 1D 300 e Profile Name EtherACL Profile Type Ethernet source MAC EFE SERA Show All Profiles Figure 7 4 Access Profile Detail Information window Ethernet ACL Click the Show All Profiles button to navigate back to the Access Profile List Page After clicking the Add View Rules button the following page will appear Availab
110. traps on SNMP when the notification is disabled This function controls the local LLDP agent and allows it to send and receive LLDP frames on the ports This option contains TX RX TX And RX or Disabled TX the local LLDP agent can only transmit LLDP frames RX the local LLDP agent can only receive LLDP frames TX And RX the local LLDP agent can both transmit and receive LLDP frames Disabled the local LLDP agent can neither transmit nor receive LLDP frames The default value is TX And RX Subtype Use the drop down menu to select the type of the IP address information will be sent A xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Action Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the action field Enter the IP address that will be sent Click the Apply button to accept the changes made g lt Q NOTE The IPv4 or IPv6 address entered here should be an existing LLDP management IP address LLDP Management Address List On this page the user can view the LLDP management address list To view the following window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP management Address List as show below IF Type Advertising Ports Ifindex 136141171101 Figure 4 83 LLDP Management Address List window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IPv4 IPv6 Use the drop down menu to select either IPv4 or IPv6 Address Enter the management IP address or the IP
111. value should be greater than twice the Join Time value The Leave All Time value should be greater than the Leave Time value lt GVRP Port Settings On this page the user can configure the GVRP port parameters To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt GVRP gt GVRP Port Settings as show below 70 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Unit From Port To Port PVID 1 4094 GVRP Ingress Checking Acceptable Frame Type Acceptable Frame Type Figure 4 12 GVRP Port Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description a Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port Select the starting and ending ports to use This field is used to manually assign a PVID to a VLAN The Switch s default is to assign all ports to the default VLAN with a VID of 1 The PVID is used by the port to tag outgoing untagged packets and to make filtering decisions about incoming packets If the port is specified to accept only tagged frames as tagging and an untagged packet is forwarded to the port for transmission the port will add an 802 1Q tag using the PVID to write the VID in the tag When the packet arrives at its destination the receiving device will use the PVID to make VLAN forwarding decisions If the port receives a packet and Ingress filtering is Enabled the port will compare the VID of the incoming packe
112. view the MAC Address used Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Show Static button to display only the static entries in the display table Click the Clear All button to remove all the entries listed in the table Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist Gratuitous ARP Gratuitous ARP Global Settings The user can enable or disable the gratuitous ARP global settings here To view the following window click Management gt Gratuitous ARP gt Gratuitous ARP Global Settings as show below send On IP Interface Status Up Enabled 8 Disabled send On Duplicate IP Detected Enabled Disabled Gratuitous ARP Learning Enabled Disabled Figure 3 4 Gratuitous ARP Global Settings Window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Send On IP Interface The command is used to enable disable sending of gratuitous ARP request packet while Status Up the IPIF interface become up This is used to automatically announce the interface s IP address to other nodes By default the state is disabled and only one gratuitous ARP packet will be broadcast Send On Duplicate IP The command is used to enable disable the sending of gratuitous ARP request packet Detected while a duplicate IP is detected By default the state is disabled For this command the duplicate IP detected means that the s
113. was added to the Switch s software The Safeguard Engine can help the overall operability of the Switch by minimizing the workload of the Switch while the attack is ongoing thus making it capable to forward essential packets over its network in a limited bandwidth The Safeguard Engine has two operating modes that can be configured by the user Strict and Fuzzy In Strict mode when the Switch either a receives too many packets to process or b exerts too much memory it will enter the Exhausted mode When in this mode the Switch will drop all ARP and IP broadcast packets and packets from un trusted IP addresses for a calculated time interval Every five seconds the Safeguard Engine will check to see if there are too 266 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide many packets flooding the Switch If the threshold has been crossed the Switch will initially stop all ingress ARP and IP broadcast packets and packets from un trusted IP addresses for five seconds After another five second checking interval arrives the Switch will again check the ingress flow of packets If the flooding has stopped the Switch will again begin accepting all packets Yet if the checking shows that there continues to be too many packets flooding the Switch it will stop accepting all ARP and IP broadcast packets and packets from un trusted IP addresses for double the time of the previous stop period This doubling of time for sto
114. where the MS resides MAC Address Model Name and Firmware Version To update the configuration file enter the Server IP Address where the file resides and enter the Path Filename of the configuration file Click Restore to initiate the file transfer from a TFTP server to the Switch Click Backup to backup the configuration file to a TFTP server To view the following window click Management gt Single IP Management gt Configuration File Backup Restore as show below Server IF Address Path Filename Total Entries 0 Select All i MAC Address Model Name Firmware Version Figure 3 31 Configuration File Backup Restore window 46 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Upload Log File The following window is used to upload log files from SIM member switches to a specified PC To upload a log file enter the Server IP address of the SIM member switch and then enter a Path Filename on your PC where you wish to save this file Click Upload to initiate the file transfer To view the following window click Management gt Single IP Management gt Upload Log File as show below Server IF Address Fath Filename Upload pload Total Entries 0 MAC Address Model Name Firmware Version Figure 3 32 Upload Log File window SNMP Settings Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an OSI Layer 7 Application Layer designed specifically for managing and monitoring network devices SNM
115. will be granted access to the network lf the port authorization fails the specified port s will continue authenticating In Host based mode each user can individually authenticate and access the network To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt Authenticator State as shown below 212 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Total Authenticating Hosts 0 Total Authenticated Hosts 0 MAC Address PAE State Backend State Status Y Priority Figure 8 14 Authenticator State window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Unit Select the unit to be displayed Select a port to be displayed Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Refresh button to refresh the display table so that new entries will appear Authenticator Statistics This table contains the statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view the Authenticator Statistics click Security gt 802 1X gt Authenticator Statistics as shown below NOTE The Authenticator State cannot be viewed on the Switch unless 802 1X is enabled by port or by MAC address To enable 802 1X go to Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Global Settings and select Port based or Mac based from the Authentication Mode drop down menu 213
116. with RC4_128_MD5 This cipher suite combines the RSA key exchange stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128 bit keys and the MD5 Hash Algorithm Use the radio buttons to enable or disable this cipher suite This field is Enabled by default RSA with 3DES EDE This cipher suite combines the RSA key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE CBC SHA encryption and the SHA Hash Algorithm Use the radio buttons to enable or disable this cipher suite This field is Enabled by default DHS DSS with 3DES This cipher suite combines the DSA Diffie Hellman key exchange CBC Block Cipher EDE CBC SHA 3DES_EDE encryption and SHA Hash Algorithm Use the radio buttons to enable or disable this cipher suite This field is Enabled by default RSA EXPORT with RC4 This cipher suite combines the RSA Export key exchange and stream cipher RC4 40 MD5 encryption with 40 bit keys Use the radio buttons to enable or disable this cipher suite 260 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide AN This field is Enabled by default Click the Apply button to accept the changes made To download SSL certificates configure the parameters in the SSL Certificate Download section described below Parameter Description Server IP Address Enter the IPv4 address of the TFTP server where the certificate files are located Certificate File Name Enter the path and the filename of the certificate file to download This file must have a der ex
117. with the WAC Switch through a virtual IP the virtual IP is transformed into the physical IPIF IP interface address of the Switch to make the communication possible The host PC and other servers IP configurations do not depend on the virtual IP of WAC The virtual IP does not respond to any ICMP packets or ARP requests which means it is not allowed to configure a virtual IP on the same subnet as the Switch s IPIF IP interface or the same subnet as the host PCs subnet As all packets to a virtual IP from authenticated and authenticating hosts will be trapped to the Switch s CPU if the virtual IP is the same as other servers or PCs the hosts on the WAC enabled ports cannot communicate with the server or PC which really own the IP address If the hosts need to access the server or PC the virtual IP cannot be the same as the one of the server or PC If a host PC uses a proxy to access the Web to make the authentication work properly the user of the PC should add the virtual IP to the exception of the proxy configuration Whether or not a virtual IP is specified users can access the WAC pages through the Switch s system IP When a virtual IP is not specified the authenticating Web request will be redirected to the Switch s system IP The Switch s implementation of WAC features a user defined port number that allows the configuration of the TCP port for either the HTTP or HTTPS protocols This TCP port for HTTP or HT TPs is used to iden
118. you want to configure Pot Display all ports of the Switch for the configuration option Tagged specify the port as 802 1Q tagging Clicking the radio button will designate the port as tagged Click the All button to select all ports Untagged Specify the port as 802 1Q untagged Clicking the radio button will designate the port as untagged Click the All button to select all ports Forbidden Click the radio button to specify the port as not being a member of the VLAN and that the port is forbidden from becoming a member of the VLAN dynamically Click the All button to select all ports Not Member Click the radio button to allow an individual port to be specified as a non VLAN member Click the All button to select all ports Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 65 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide To search for a VLAN click the Find VLAN tab A new tab will appear as shown below BULL VLAN setings VLAN List Add Edit VLAN Find VLAN VLAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 Figure 4 6 802 1Q VLAN Settings Find VLAN Tab window Enter the VLAN ID number in the field offered and then click the Find button You will be redirected to the VLAN List tab Add Edit VLAN Find VLAN VLAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 VID List e 9 25 ss aia Delete Configure Advertisement Disabled PortList e g 1 1 15 Figure 4 7 802 1Q VLAN Se
119. 120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IP Address Interface Name Part Interface Name Learned Dynamic Figure 5 6 IP Forwarding Table Click the IP Address Interface Name or Port radio button enter the information and click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist 138 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Chapter6 QoS 802 1p Settings Bandwidth Control Traffic Control Settings DSCP HOL Blocking Prevention Scheduling Settings The Switch supports 802 1p priority queuing Quality of Service The following section discusses the implementation of QoS Quality of Service and benefits of using 802 1p priority queuing Advantages of QoS QoS is an implementation of the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows network administrators a method of reserving bandwidth for important functions that require a large bandwidth or have a high priority such as VoIP voice over Internet Protocol web browsing applications file server applications or video conferencing Not only can a larger bandwidth be created but other less critical traffic can be limited so excessive bandwidth can be saved The Switch has separate hardware queues on every physical port to which packets from various applications can be mapped to and in turn pri
120. 124 428 1 9 Figure 7 42 Add CPU Access Rule Packet Content ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Access ID 1 100 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 100 Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified Offset 0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to the 15th byte Offset 16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 37 Offset 32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 Offset 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 Offset 64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Ports Ticking the All Ports check box will denote all ports on the Switch Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Clic
121. 1X RADIUS IP MAC Port Binding IMPB El Mode Only MAC based Access Control MAC Web based Access Control WAC Compound Authentication Port Security ARP Spoofing Prevention Settings BPDU Attack Protection Loopback Detection Settings Traffic Segmentation Settings NetBIOS filtering Settings DHCP Server Screening Access Authentication Control SSL Settings SSH Trusted Host Settings Safeguard Engine Settings 802 1X 802 1X Port Based and Host Based Access Control The IEEE 802 1X standard is a security measure for authorizing and authenticating users to gain access to various wired or wireless devices on a specified Local Destination ps Type Area Network by using a Client and E based access aiii so control model This is accomplished by using a RADIUS a server to authenticate users trying to access a network by relaying Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL packets between the Client and the Server The pe following figure represents a basic EAPOL packet Protocol Version Packet body packet Body 1 length Ethernet Frame EAPOL packet Figure 8 1 The EAPOL Packet Utilizing this method unauthorized devices are restricted Authentication from connecting to a LAN through a port to which the user Client ima Server is connected EAPOL packets are the only traffic that can Se CNP AAR Server be transmitted through the specific port until authorization E E S E alee KATENE is granted The 80
122. 2 1X Access Control method has three EAP Over LAN Encapsulated EAP roles each of which are vital to creating and up keeping a e RADIOS stable and working Access Control security method Figure 8 2 The three roles of 802 1X The following section will explain the three roles of Client Authenticator and Authentication Server in greater detail 205 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Authentication Server The Authentication Server is a remote device that is connected to the same network as the Client and Authenticator must be running a RADIUS Server program and must be configured properly on the Authenticator Switch Clients connected to a port on the Switch must be authenticated by the Authentication Server RADIUS before attaining any services offered by the Switch on the LAN The role of the Authentication Server is to certify the identity of the Client attempting to access the network by exchanging secure information between the RADIUS server and the Client through EAPOL packets and in turn informs the Switch whether or not the Client is granted access to the LAN and or switches services Authenticator The Authenticator the Switch is an intermediary between the Authentication Server and the Client The Authenticator serves two purposes when utilizing the 802 1X function The first purpose is to request certification information from the Client through EAPOL packets which is
123. 22 23 24 Apply Extensive NetBlOS Filtering Filter NetBlOS over 302 2 o 05 05 OF 08 3 5 3 E E EE E EE E E E E E E E E M ee ee ee Figure 8 52 NetBIOS Filtering Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description NetBIOS Filtering Ports Select the appropriate port to include in the NetBIOS filtering configuration Pots Tick the appropriate ports that will be included in the NetBIOS filtering configuration Extensive NetBIOS Select the appropriate port to include in the Extensive NetBIOS filtering configuration Filtering Ports Extensive NetBIOS is NetBIOS over 802 3 The Switch will deny the NetBIOS over 802 3 frame on these enabled ports Tick the appropriate ports that will be included in the Extensive NetBIOS filtering configuration Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section 247 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide DHCP Server Screening This function allows the user to not only to restrict all DHCP Server packets but also to receive any specified DHCP server packet by any specified DHCP client it is useful when one or more DHCP servers are present on the network and both provide DHCP services to different distinct groups of clients The first time the DHCP filter is enabled it will create both an access profile entry and an access rule per port entry it will also create other access r
124. 35 E E Total Entries 1 Interface Name Gratuitous ARF Trap Gratuitous ARF Log Gratuitous ARP Periodical Send Interval Disabled Enabled Figure 3 5 Gratuitous ARP Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Trap Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the trap option By default the trap is disabled Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the logging option By default the event log is enabled Interface Name Enter the interface name of the Layer 3 interface Select All to enable or disable gratuitous ARP trap or log on all interfaces Interval Time Enter the periodically send gratuitous ARP interval time in seconds 0 means that gratuitous ARP request will not be sent periodically By default the interval time is O Click the Apply button located in the Gratuitous ARP Trap Log section to accept the changes made in this section Click the Apply button located in the Gratuitous ARP Periodical Send Interval section to accept the changes made in this section IPv6 Neighbor Settings El Mode Only The user can configure the Switch s IPv6 neighbor settings The Switch s current IPv6 neighbor settings will be displayed in the table at the bottom of this window To view the following window click Management gt IPv6 Neighbor Settings as show below 29 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Interface Name Ne
125. 89 Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings MAC Address IP Address Mask Gateway Management VLAN Login Timeout min System Time Jumbo Frame MLD Snooping IGMP Snooping MAC Notification 802 1X SSH Port Mirror Single IP Management CLI Paging HOL Blocking Prevention Figure 1 2 Main Web Manager page Function 00 01 02 03 04 00 10 90 90 90 Static 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 default 10 22 03 2000 22 04 35 System Clock Disabled Settings Disabled Settings Disabled Settings Disable Disable Disable Disabled Settings Disabled Settings Enabled Settings Enabled Settings Select the menu or window to display Open folders and click the hyperlinked menu buttons and subfolders contained within them to display menus Click the D Link logo to go to the D Link website Presents a graphical near real time image of the front panel of the Switch This area displays the Switch s ports console and management port showing port activity some management functions including save reboot download and upload are accessible here Presents switch information based on user selection and the entry of configuration data xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Web Pages When connecting to the management mode of the Switch with a web browser a login screen is displayed Enter a user name and password to access the Sw
126. BPDU Hello Time False No False No Enabled False Disabled False No False No False No False No False No to 200000 False ls sabl JF Enabled 12 13 duta NNNNA Falea kin duta aoc Falea Falea Micshlar Port field M Trunk Master T Trunk Member External Cost Edge P2P and Hello Time fields Value1 Value Value1 Configured value Value Actual value Figure 4 26 STP Port Settings window lt is advisable to define an STP Group to correspond to a VLAN group of ports The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Unit Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port Select the starting and ending ports to be configured External Cost 0 Auto This defines a metric that indicates the relative cost of forwarding packets to the specified port list Port cost can be set automatically or as a metric value The default value is O auto Setting O for the external cost will automatically set the speed for forwarding packets to the specified port s in the list for optimal efficiency The default port cost for a 100Mbps port is 200000 and the default port cost for a Gigabit port is 82 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 20000 Enter a value between 7 and 200000000 to determine the External Cost The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets Choosing the True parameter indicates a poi
127. Click the Select All button to select all the ports for the configuration Ports Here the ports that have been selected to be included in the traffic segmentation setup will 246 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide bedisplayed Click the Apply button to accept the changes made NetBIOS Filtering Settings NetBIOS is an application programming interface providing a set of functions that applications use to communicate across networks NetBEUI the NetBIOS Enhanced User Interface was created as a data link layer frame structure for NetBIOS A simple mechanism to carry NetBIOS traffic NetBEUI has been the protocol of choice for small MS DOS and Windows based workgroups NetBIOS no longer lives strictly inside of the NetBEUI protocol Microsoft worked to create the international standards described in RFC 1001 and RFC 1002 NetBIOS over TCP IP NBT If the network administrator wants to block the network communication on more than two computers which use NETBUEI protocol it can use NETBIOS filtering to filter these kinds of packets If the user enables the NETBIOS filter the switch will create one access profile and three access rules automatically If the user enables the extensive NETBIOS filter the switch will create one more access profile and one more access rule To view this window click Security gt NetBIOS Filtering Settings as shown below Select All Clear All 20 21
128. Click the radio buttons to enable of disable the Authorization Network State Authentication Server Click the radio buttons to configure the authentication server failover function Failover Local The switch will resort to using the local database to authenticate the client If the client fails on local authentication the client is regarded as un authenticated otherwise it authenticated Permit The client is always regarded as authenticated If guest VLAN is enabled clients will stay on the guest VLAN otherwise they will stay on the original VLAN Block default setting The client is always regarded as un authenticated Umit Select the unit you want to configure Use this drop down menu to select the beginning port of a range of ports to be enabled as compound authentication ports To Port Use this drop down menu to select the ending port of a range of ports to be enabled as compound authentication ports Security Mode El Mode Only The compound authentication method options include None Any MAC 802 1X or WAC 802 1X IMPB IMPB WAC and MAC IMPB None all compound authentication methods are disabled Any MAC 802 1X or WAC if any of the authentication methods pass then access will be granted In this mode MAC 802 1X and WAC can be enabled on a port at the same time In Any MAC 802 1X or WAC mode whether an individual security module is active on a port depends on its system state 802 1X IMPB 802 1X will be ve
129. Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP type value or specify Code to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP code value Select GMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an IGMP type value Select TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting TCP requires a source port mask and or a destination port mask is to be specified The user may also identify which flag bits to filter Flag bits are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may filter packets by filtering certain flag bits within the packets by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field The user may choose between urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn Synchronize fin finish src port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff which you wish to filter dst port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff which you wish to filter Select UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting UDP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask src po
130. D Enter a Port or a Port List in the field at the top of the window and click the Find button To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt Show VLAN Ports as show below Total Entries 24 V Untagged Tagged Dynamic Forbidden E SS EE OS BAER 2 3 gt gt ce Figure 4 24 Show VLAN Ports window Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist 78 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Spanning Tree This Switch supports three versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol 802 1D 1998 STP 802 1D 2004 Rapid STP and 802 1Q 2005 MSTP 802 1D 1998 STP will be familiar to most networking professionals However since 802 1D 2004 RSTP and 802 1Q 2005 MSTP have been recently introduced to D Link managed Ethernet switches a brief introduction to the technology is provided below followed by a description of how to set up 802 1D 1998 STP 802 1D 2004 RSTP and 802 1Q 2005 MSTP 802 1Q 2005 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol or MSTP is a standard defined by the IEEE community that allows multiple VLANs to be mapped to a single spanning tree instance which will provide multiple pathways across the network Therefore these MSTP configurations will balance the traffic load preventing wide scale disruptions when a single spanning tree instance fails This will al
131. D Link Building Networks for People Release 1 0 August 2010 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Information in this document is subject to change without notice 2010 D Link Corporation All rights reserved Reproduction of this document in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of D Link Corporation is strictly forbidden Trademarks used in this text D Link and the D LINK logo are trademarks of D Link Corporation Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products D Link Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own August 2010 P N 651GS3120005G xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Table of Contents intended Readers ie las 1 Typographical Conventions do dos 1 Notes Noticessand Gallos tit iia 1 Chapter 1 Web based Switch Configuration cccssccsssseccssseeseseeeenseeeesseesenseesenseesensessoaes 2 o O eee eee Ea eee eee eee ee 2 Login to the Web ManaGel cscccccccssseccecceeeeeceeccaeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeesseaeeeeeessaueeeeesseaeeeeseseueeeeessaaseeeeessseaseceesssaageseessaaseeees 2 Web based User Interface ccccccccccccsesseceeecaeseeceecsaeeeceeesaeeseeeeessesse
132. Enabled Disabled Authentication Server Failover Block Local Permit Unit From Part To Port Authorized Mode VID List e g 1 6 9 State Compound Authentication Port Table Authentication VLAN e A E O O o A Hostbasea o o y A A E A O o O O A Hostbased O o O Host based ee oo Hostbased o o O O Host based O O A Hostbasea o o O A Hostbased o O S O A A A A o O o Oo Hostbasea o o O O A Hostbased O A Hostbased o A Hostbased o o O O Oooo Hostbased O A Hostbbasea o o O A Hostbased O O O o O SA i o O O Figure 8 41 Compound Authentication Settings window SI Mode Only Z le ow in F to mf PO a me OMPOUNG AUTNENICAION SEUINGs Authorization Attributes State Enabled O Disabled Authentication Server Failover Block Local Permit Unit From Port To Port Security Mode Authorized Mode VID List e g 1 6 9 State Hostbased vw Disabled w Authorized Mode 1 Host based Host based Host based Hostbased Host based Host based Hostbased Host based Host based Hostbased Host based Host based Host based Host based Hostbased Host based Host based Hostbased Host based Host based gt Figure 8 42 Compound Authentication Settings window El Mode Only 237 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Authorization Network State
133. Interface Figure 8 69 Trusted Host window SI Mode Only 265 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IPv4 Address fF O O Net Mask fe g 255 255 255 254 or 1 32 Access Interface Lisnmp Teinet LISSH LJHTTP LJ HTTPS Fin lan Delete All Total Entries 0 Access Interface Note Create a list of Pvt IPv6G addresses that can access the switch Your local host IPv4 IPv6 address must be one of the IPv4 IPv6 addresses to avoid disconnection Figure 8 70 Trusted Host window El Mode Only When the user clicks the Edit button one will be able to edit the service allowed to the selected host The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IPv4 Address Enter an IPv4 address to add to the trusted host list IPv6 Address El Mode Enter an IPv6 address to add to the trusted host list Only Enter a Net Mask address to add to the trusted host list Access Interface Tick the check boxes to select services that will be allowed to the trusted host Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Safeguard Engine Settings Periodically malicious hosts on the network will attack the Switch by utilizing packet flooding ARP Storm or other methods These attacks may increase the switch load beyond its capability To alleviate this problem the Safeguard Engine function
134. L State Enabled Disabled Cache Timeout 60 86400 sec Note Web will be disabled if SSL is enabled SSL Ciphersuite Settings RSA with RC4 128 MD5 Enabled Disable RSA with 3DES EDE CBC SHA Enabled Disable DHE DSS with 3DES EDE CBC SHA Enabled Disable RSA EXPORT with RC4 40 MDS Enabled Disable SSL Certificate Download server IP Address Certificate File Name Key File Name fo Download Current Certificate Loaded with RSA Certificate Figure 8 65 SSL Settings window To set up the SSL function on the Switch configure the parameters in the SSL Settings section described The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description SSL Status Use the radio buttons to enable or disable the SSL status on the Switch The default is Disabled Cache Timeout 60 This field will set the time between a new key exchange between a client and a host 86400 using the SSL function A new SSL session is established every time the client and host go through a key exchange Specifying a longer timeout will allow the SSL session to reuse the master key on future connections with that particular host therefore speeding up the negotiation process The default setting is 600 seconds Click the Apply button to accept the changes made To set up the SSL cipher suite function on the Switch configure the parameters in the SSL Cipher suite Settings section described below Parameter Description RSA
135. Likewise the attacker can either choose to forward the traffic to the A 3 2 User B uses this Attacker MAC address Se actual default gateway passive ss d sniffing or modify the data before 00 20 5C 01 11 11 00 20 5C 01 22 22 forwarding it man in the middle BEREA 10 10 10 2 attack Figure 5 The hacker cheats the victim PC that it is a router and cheats the router that it is the victim As can be seen in Figure 5 all traffic will be then sniffed by the hacker but the users will not discover Prevent ARP Spoofing via Packet Content ACL D Link managed switches can effectively Router Internet mitigate common DoS attacks caused by ARP spoofing via a unique Package Content ACL For the reason that basic ACL can only filter 00 00 00 00 CD EF 01 02 03 04 05 06 ARP packets based on packet type VLAN ID om 10 90 90 90 Source and Destination MAC information there is a need for further inspections of ARP packets To prevent ARP spoofing attack we will demonstrate here via using Packet Content ACL mmm yp pene on the Switch to block the invalid ARP packets which contain faked gateway s MAC and IP A binding CD EF lt 0C 0C 0C 0D 0D 0D AN 10 90 90 90 is at NA 0C 0C 0C 0D 0D 0D OC DC OC OD 00 0D 00 12 34 56 78 90 10 90 90 110 10 90 90 120 Configuration The configuration logic is as follows 1 Only if the ARP matches Source MAC address in Ethernet Sender MAC address and Sender IP address in ARP protocol
136. MLD Snooping Parameters Settings for a specific entry Click the Modify Router Port link to configure the MLD Snooping Router Port Settings for a specific entry After clicking the Edit button the following page will appear T La TOU a ra al lelei at VID 1 VLAN Name default Rate Limit Mo Limitation Querier IF Querier Expiry Time O secs Query Interval 1 65535 Max Response Time 1 25 1 sec Robustness Value 1 7 Last Listener Query Interval 1 25 1 sec Data Driven Group Expiry Time 1 65535 260 sec Querier State Disabled Fast Done Disabled State Disabled w Report Suppression Enabled vw Data Driven Learning State Data Driven Learning Aged Out Disabled w Version Querier Role Non Quener Apply Figure 4 52 MLD Snooping Parameters Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Query Interval Specify the amount of time in seconds between general query transmissions The default setting is 125 seconds 104 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Max Response Time The maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from listeners The default setting is 10 seconds Robustness Value Provides fine tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet The value of the robustness variable is used in calculating the following MLD message intervals Group listener interval Amount of time that must pass before a multicast
137. MP v3 Query IGMP v3 Report Total IGMP v2 Leave Total Figure 4 50 Browse IGMP Snooping Counter window Click the Clear Counter button to clear all the information displayed in the fields Click the Refresh button to refresh the display table so that new information will appear Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page 102 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery MLD Snooping is an IPv6 function used similarly to IGMP snooping in IPv4 It is used to discover ports on a VLAN that are requesting multicast data Instead of flooding all ports on a selected VLAN with multicast traffic MLD snooping will only forward multicast data to ports that wish to receive this data through the use of queries and reports produced by the requesting ports and the source of the multicast traffic MLD snooping is accomplished through the examination of the layer 3 part of an MLD control packet transferred between end nodes and a MLD router When the Switch discovers that this route is requesting multicast traffic it adds the port directly attached to it into the correct IPv6 multicast table and begins the process of forwarding multicast traffic to that port This entry in the multicast routing table records the port the VLAN ID and the associated multicast IPv6 multicast group address and then considers this port to be an active listening port The active l
138. N where it has limited rights and access The adjacent figure should give the user a better understanding of the Guest VLAN process Limitations Using the Guest VLAN 1 Ports supporting Guest VLANs cannot be GVRP enabled and vice versa 2 A port cannot be a member of a Guest VLAN and a static VLAN simultaneously 3 Once aclient has been accepted into the target VLAN it can no longer access the Guest VLAN Remember to set an 802 1X guest VLAN the user must first configure a normal VLAN which can be enabled here for guest VLAN status Only one VLAN may be assigned as the 802 1X guest VLAN To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt Guest VLAN Settings as shown below Apply Current Guest VLAN Ports Figure 8 13 Guest VLAN Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name Enter the pre configured VLAN name to create as an 802 1X guest VLAN Port Set the ports to be enabled for the 802 1X guest VLAN Click the All button to select all the ports Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry based on the information entered Authentic ator State The following section describes the 802 1X Authenticator State on the Switch This window displays the Authenticator State for individual ports on a selected device In Port based mode if one of the attached hosts is successfully authorized all hosts on the same port
139. NMPv3 Specifies that SNMP version 3 will be used security Level NoAuthNoPriv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with a NoAuth NoPriv security level AuthNoPriv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with an Auth NoPriv security level AuthPriv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with an Auth Priv security level Community String Type in the community string or SNMP V3 user name as appropriate SNMP V3 User Name Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry RMON Settings On this page the user can enable or disable remote monitoring RMON for the rising and falling alarm trap feature for the SNMP function on the Switch To view the following window click Management gt SNMP Settings gt RMON Settings as show below 56 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide RMON Rising Alarm Trap Enabled Disabled RMON Falling Alarm Trap Enabled Disabled Figure 3 43 RMON Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description RMON Rising Alarm Trap Enable this option to use the RMON Rising Alarm Trap Feature RMON Falling Alarm Trap Enable this option to use the RMON Falling Alarm Trap Feature Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Telnet Settings Users can configure Telnet Settings on the Switch To view the fo
140. Only Set the RADIUS server IP address 218 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IPv6 Address El Mode Only Set the RADIUS server IPv6 address Authentication Port Set the RADIUS authentic server s UDP port which is used to transmit RADIUS data between the Switch and the RADIUS server The default port is 1872 Accounting Port Set the RADIUS account server s UDP port which is used to transmit RADIUS accounting statistics between the Switch and the RADIUS server The default port is 1813 Retransmit Set the RADIUS server retransmit time in times Click the Apply button to accept the changes made RADIUS Accounting Settings Users can configure the state of the specified RADIUS accounting service To view this window click Security gt RADIUS gt RADIUS Accounting Settings as shown below Network Enabled Disabled shell Enabled Disabled System Enabled Disabled Apply Network When enabled the switch will send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when 802 1 WAC and JWAC port access control events occur on the switch Shelk When enabled the switch will send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when a user either logs in logs out or times out on the switch using the console Telnet or SSH System When enabled the switch will send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when system events occur on the switch such as a syst
141. P address Represents the metric value of the IP interface entered into the table This field may read a number between 1 and 65535 Backup State Each IP address can only have one primary route while other routes should be assigned to the backup state When the primary route failed switch will try the backup routes according to the order learnt by the routing table until route success The field represents the Backup state that the Static and Default Route is configured for Click the Apply button to accept the changes made IPv4 Route Table The IP routing table stores all the external routes information of the switch On this page the user can view all the external route information on the switch To view the following window click L3 Features gt IPv4 Route Table as show below Metmask Gateway Interface Name Protocol Figure 5 3 IPv4 Route Table window SI Mode Only Network Address O leg 172 18 208 11 24 O IP Address si e g 172 18 208 11 Total Entries 1 Neimask Gateway Interface Name Figure 5 4 IPv4 Route Table window El Mode Only 136 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IPv6 Static Default Route Settings El Mode Only A static entry of an IPv6 address can be entered into the Switch s routing table for IPv6 formatted addresses To view the following window click L3 Features gt IPv6 Static Default Route Settings as show below IPv6 Static Defau
142. P enables network management stations to read and modify the settings of gateways routers switches and other network devices Use SNMP to configure system features for proper operation monitor performance and detect potential problems in the Switch switch group or network Managed devices that support SNMP include software referred to as an agent which runs locally on the device A defined set of variables managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Management Information Base MIB which provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the on board SNMP agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network The Switch supports the SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device In SNMP v 1 and v 2 user authentication is accomplished using community strings which function like passwords The remote user SNMP application and the Switch SNMP must use the same community string SNMP packets from any station that has not been authenticated are ignored dropped The default community strings for the Switch used for SNMP v 1 and v 2 management access are e public Allows authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects e private Allows authorized management stations to re
143. PU Access Rule List the following page will appear 182 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide CPU ACL Rule Details Profile ID Access ID Profile Type Action Ports IPv6 Flow Label Show All Rules Figure 7 38 CPU Access Rule Detail Information IPv6 ACL Click the Show All Rules button to navigate back to the CPU Access Rule List Adding a CPU Packet Content ACL Profile The window shown below is the Add CPU ACL Profile window for Packet Content To use specific filtering masks in this ACL profile click the packet filtering mask field to highlight it red This will add more filed to the mask After clicking the Add CPU ACL Profile button the following page will appear Profile ID 1 6 Select ACL Type O Ethernet ACL IPv4 ACL IPv6 ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask Packet Content Flofset0 15 mask 00000000 60000900 00059000 pooonoool Offset 16 31 mask 00000000 00000000 00090000 6000000 Flofset32 47 mask 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Offset 48 63 mask 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Flofset64 79 mask 00000000 00000000 69005900 69005900 Figure 7 39 Add CPU ACL Profile Packet Content ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID 1 5 Here the
144. Parameter Description Configuration Name This name uniquely identifies the MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance If a Configuration Name is not set this field will show the MAC address to the device running MSTP Revision Level 0 65535 This value along with the Configuration Name identifies the MSTP region configured on the Switch MSTI ID Enter a number between 7 and 15to set a new MSTI on the Switch Type This field allows the user to choose a desired method for altering the MSTI settings The user has two choices Add VID Select this parameter to add VIDs to the MSTI ID in conjunction with the VID List parameter Remove VID Select this parameter to remove VIDs from the MSTI ID in conjunction with the VID List parameter VID List 1 4094 This field is used to specify the VID range from configured VLANSs set on the Switch Supported VIDs on the Switch range from ID number 7 to 4094 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry STP Instance Settings This window displays MSTIs currently set on the Switch and allows users to change the Priority of the MSTIs To view the following window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Instance Settings as show below 84 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide STP Priority Settings
145. Port To Port Use the drop down menu to select the port range to use for this configuration Select the method of traffic control from the pull down menu The choices are Drop Utilizes the hardware Traffic Control mechanism which means the Switch s hardware will determine the Packet Storm based on the Threshold value stated and drop packets until the issue is resolved Shutdown Utilizes the Switch s software Traffic Control mechanism to determine the Packet Storm occurring Once detected the port will deny all incoming traffic to the port except STP BPDU packets which are essential in keeping the Spanning Tree operational on the Switch If the Count Down timer has expired and yet the Packet Storm continues the port will be placed in Shutdown Forever mode and is no longer operational until the port recovers after 5 minutes automatically or the user manually resets the port using the Port Settings window Configuration gt Port Configuration gt Port Settings Choosing this option obligates the user to configure the Time Interval setting as well which will provide packet count samplings from the Switch s chip to determine if a Packet Storm is occurring Countdown 0 or 3 30 The Count Down timer is set to determine the amount of time in minutes that the Switch will wait before shutting down the port that is experiencing a traffic storm This parameter is only useful for ports configured as Shutdown in their Action field and theref
146. Port Group Name Figure 2 19 Port Group Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Action Use the drop down menu to select Create Port Group Add Ports or Delete Ports Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Time Settings Users can configure the time settings for the Switch To view the following window click System Configuration gt Time Settings as show below Set Current Time Date DD MM YYYY 06 02 2000 Time HH MM 35 02 47 07 Apply Figure 2 20 Time Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below 20 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parameter Description Date DD MM YYYY Enter the current day month and year to update the system clock Time HH MM SS Enter the current time in hours minutes and seconds Click the Apply button to accept the changes made User Accounts Settings The Switch allows the control of user privileges To view the following window click System Configuration gt User Accounts Settings as show below Add User Accounts Access Right Admin w Confirm Password fe Note Password User Name should be less than 16 characters Total Entries 0 UserName Access Right Old Password Mew Password Confirm Password Encryption Figure 2 21 User Accounts Settings window To add a
147. Q standard restricts the forwarding of untagged packets to the VLAN the receiving port is a member of 60 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide The main characteristics of IEEE 802 1Q are as follows e Assigns packets to VLANs by filtering e Assumes the presence of a single global spanning tree e Uses an explicit tagging scheme with one level tagging e 802 1Q VLAN Packet Forwarding e Packet forwarding decisions are made based upon the following three types of rules o Ingress rules rules relevant to the classification of received frames belonging to a VLAN o Forwarding rules between ports decides whether to filter or forward the packet o Egress rules determines if the packet must be sent tagged or untagged 802 1Q VLAN Tags Port State Tagging or Untigging Apelied Figure 4 1 IEEE 802 10 Packet Forwarding The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the EtherType field When a packet s EtherType field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID Th
148. STP can interoperate with legacy equipment and is capable of automatically adjusting BPDU packets to 802 1D 1998 format when necessary However any segment using 802 1D 1998 STP will not benefit from the rapid transition and rapid topology change detection of MSTP or RSTP The protocol also provides for a variable used for migration in the event that legacy equipment on a segment is updated to use RSTP or MSTP The Spanning Tree Protocol STP operates on two levels 1 On the switch level the settings are globally implemented 2 On the port level the settings are implemented on a per user defined group of ports basis 80 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide STP Bridge Global Settings On this page the user can configure the STP bridge global parameters To view the following window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Bridge Global Settings as show below STP Global Settings STP State O Enabled Disabled STP Version Forwarding BPDU Bridge Max Age 6 40 Bridge Hello Time 1 2 Bridge Forward Delay 4 30 TX Hold Count 1 10 Max Hops 6 40 Apply Figure 4 25 STP Bridge Global Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description STP Status Use the radio button to globally enable or disable STP STP Version Use the pull down menu to choose the desired version of STP STP Select this parameter to set the Span
149. Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Group Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the new SNMP group of SNMP users Read View Name This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages Write View Name Specify a SNMP group name for users that are allowed SNMP write privileges to the an Switch s SNMP agent Notify View Name Specify a SNMP group name for users that can receive SNMP trap messages generated by the Switch s SNMP agent User based Security SNMPv1 Specify that SNMP version 1 will be used Model SNMPv2 Specify that SNMP version 2c will be used The SNMPv2 supports both centralized and distributed network management strategies It includes improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI and adds some security features SNMPv3 Specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used SNMPv3 provides secure access to devices through a combination of authentication and encrypting packets over the network Security Level The Security Level settings only apply to SNMPv3 NoAuthNoPriv Specify that there will be no authorization and no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager AuthNoPriv Specify that authorization will be required but there will be no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager AuthPriv Specify that authoriza
150. Switch administrator may enter up to 128 MAC addresses to be authenticated using the local method configured here To view this window click Security gt MAC based Access Control MAC gt MAC based Access Control Local Settings as shown below Y A a a MACAddress MANName O itty O Total Entries 1 MAC Address VLAN Name 00 11 22 33 44 55 Edit by Name Edit by ID EEE ico Figure 8 33 MAC based Access Control Local Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description MAC address Enter the MAC address that will be added to the local authentication list here VLAN Name Enter the VLAN name of the corresponding MAC address here VID 1 4094 Enter the VLAN ID of the corresponding MAC address here Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Delete by MAC button to remove the specific entry based on the MAC address entered Click the Delete by VLAN button to remove the specific entry based on the VLAN name or ID entered 229 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Find by MAC button to locate a specific entry based on the MAC address entered Click the Find by VLAN button to locate a specific entry based on the VLAN name or ID entered Click the View All button to display all the existing entries To change the selected MAC address VLAN Name the user can click the Edit by Name
151. Switch allows you to further tailor how priority tagged data packets are handled on your network Using queues to manage priority tagged data allows you to specify its relative priority to suit the needs of your network There may be circumstances where it would be advantageous to group two or more differently tagged packets into the same queue Generally however it is recommended that the highest priority queue Queue 7 be reserved for data packets with a priority value of 7 Packets that have not been given any priority value are placed in Queue O and thus given the lowest priority for delivery Strict mode and weighted round robin system are employed on the Switch to determine the rate at which the queues are emptied of packets The ratio used for clearing the queues Is 4 1 This means that the highest priority queue Queue 7 will clear 4 packets for every 1 packet cleared from Queue 0 Remember the priority queue settings on the Switch are for all ports and all devices connected to the Switch will be affected This priority queuing system will be especially beneficial if your network employs switches with the capability of assigning priority tags VLAN Description A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLANs can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLANs also logically segment the
152. Switch can be restricted with the Management Station IP Address menu SNMP Global Settings SNMP global state settings can be enabled or disabled To view the following window click Management gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Global Settings as show below SNMP Global Settings SNMP State Enabled Disabled Figure 3 33 SNMP Global Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description SNMP State Enable this option to use the SNMP feature Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 48 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide SNMP Traps Settings Users can enable and disable the SNMP trap support function of the switch and SNMP authentication failure trap support respectively To view the following window click Management gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Traps Settings as show below SNMP Traps a Enabled Disabled SNMP Authentication Trap Enabled Disabled Linkchange Traps Enabled Disabled Coldstart Traps Enabled Disabled Warmstart Traps Enabled Disabled Figure 3 34 SNMP Traps Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description SNMP Traps Enable this option to use the SNMP Traps feature SNMP Authentication Trap Enable this option to use the SNMP Authentication Traps feature Linkchange Traps Enable this option to use the SNMP Link Change Traps feature Coldsta
153. Switch is set as a Candidate CaS as the factory default configuration and Single IP Management is disabled To view the following window click Management gt Single IP Management gt Single IP Settings as show below SIM State Disabled Role State Candidate Group Name po Discovery Interval 30 90 sec Hold Time Count 100 255 sec Figure 3 16 Single IP Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Use the pull down menu to either enable or disable the SIM state on the Switch Disabled will render all SIM functions on the Switch inoperable 38 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Role State Use the pull down menu to change the SIM role of the Switch The two choices are Candidate A Candidate Switch CaS is not the member of a SIM group but is connected to a Commander Switch This is the default setting for the SIM role of the Switch Commander Choosing this parameter will make the Switch a Commander Switch CS The user may join other switches to this Switch over Ethernet to be part of its SIM group Choosing this option will also enable the Switch to be configured for SIM Group Name Enter a Group Name in this textbox This is optional This name is used to segment switches into different SIM groups Discovery Interval The user may set the discovery protocol interval in seconds that the Switch will send out
154. Total Blocked Hosts 0 MAC Address Original RX VID State VID Assigned Priority Aging Time Block Time ldle Time Figure 8 40 WAC Authentication State window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Port List Enter the desired range of ports and tick the appropriate check box s Authenticated Authenticating and Blocked Authenticated Tick this check box to clear all authenticated users for a port Authenticating Tick this check box to clear all authenticating users for a port Blocked Tick this check box to clear all blocked users for a port Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Clear by Port button to remove entry based on the port list entered Click the View All Hosts button to display all the existing entries Click the Clear All Hosts button to remove all the entries listed Compound Authentication Compound Authentication settings allows for multiple authentication to be supported on the Switch Compound Authentication Settings Users can configure Authorization Network State Settings and compound authentication methods for a port or ports on the Switch To view this window click Security gt Compound Authentication gt Compound Authentication Settings as shown below 236 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Compound AUTHENTICATION setings ROO Authorization Attributes State
155. Tree View The Topology window holds the following information on the Data tab Parameter Description Device Name This field will display the Device Name of the switches in the SIM group configured by the user If no device is configured by the name it will be given the name default and tagged with the last six digits of the MAC Address to identify it Local Port Displays the number of the physical port on the CS that the MS or CaS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Displays the connection speed between the CS and the MS or CaS Remote Port Displays the number of the physical port on the MS or Cas to which the CS is connected The CS will have no entry in this field MAC Address Displays the MAC Address of the corresponding Switch Model Name Displays the full Model Name of the corresponding Switch To view the Topology View window open the View drop down menu in the toolbar and then click Topology which will open the following Topology Map This window will refresh itself periodically 20 seconds by default 40 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide ii Topology Cluster 1 gt a5 fh LF fe i Y T Intra net G G gt SY default 01 01 00 default 33 13 00 default 0 24 04 3625 151 fdefault58 83 01 p default 0 24 05 Java Applet Window Figure 3 18 Topology view This window will display how the devices within the Single IP Manageme
156. Trunk Settings Figure 4 22 VLAN Trunk Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Trunk State Enable or disable the VLAN trunking global state Select the unit you want to configure By clicking the Clear All button all the ports will not be included The ports to be configured By clicking the Select All button all the ports will be included Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Browse VLAN Users can display the VLAN status for each of the Switch s ports viewed by VLAN Enter a VID VLAN ID in the field at the top of the window and click the Find button 17 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt Browse VLAN as show below VLAN Name default VLAN Type Static Advertisement Enabled Total Entries Fa Port u u Uu uU U z T T T T M a x Y E AE gt co 128 Note T Tagged Port U Untagged Port F Forbidden Port Figure 4 23 Browse VLAN window Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist Q NOTE The abbreviations used on this page are Tagged Port T Untagged Port U and Forbidden Port F Show VLAN Ports Users can display the VLAN ports of the Switch s viewed by VI
157. UP Froe MUMICast AQQreESS Seng Profile Name Mame Multicast Address List leg FFIE1 FF1E 3 Multicast Address Group List 1 Multicast Address List Figure 4 68 Multicast Group Profile Multicast Address Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Multicast Address List Enter the multicast address list Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings Users can add delete or configure the MLD snooping multicast VLAN on this page To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt Multicast VLAN gt MLD Snooping Multicast Group VLAN Settings as show below MLD Multicast VLAN State Enabled 9 Disabled Apply MLD Multicast VLAN Forward Unmatched Enabled Disabled Apply VLANName VID 2409 Remap Priority None Replace Priority Add Total Entries 1 VID VLAN Name Remap Priority Profile List Edit Delete Figure 4 69 MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description MLD Multicast VLAN Click the radio buttons to enable or disable the MLD multicast VLAN state State a EV xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch We
158. X global parameter To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Global Settings as shown below Authentication Mode Disabled w Authentication Protocol RADIUS EAP e Forward EAPOLPDU Disabled v Max User 1 448 CI No Limit RADIUS Authorization Disabled w Apply Figure 8 9 802 1X Global Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Authentication Mode Choose the 802 1X authenticator mode Disabled Port based or MAC based Authentication Protocol Choose the authenticator protocol Local or RADIUS EAP Forward EAPOL PDU This is a global setting to control the forwarding of EAPOL PDU When 802 1X functionality is disabled globally or for a port and if 802 1X forward PDU is enabled both globally and for the port a received EAPOL packet on the port will be flooded in the same VLAN to those ports for which 802 1X forward PDU is enabled and 802 1X is disabled globally or just for the port The default state is disabled Specifies the maximum number of users The limit on the maximum users is 448 users This the No Limit check box to have unlimited users RADIUS Authorization This option is used to enable or disable acceptation of authorized configuration When the authorization is enabled for 802 1X s RADIUS the authorized data assigned by the RADIUS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled Click the Apply button to accept the changes
159. a Duplex Ring Within each of these topologies each switch plays a role in the Switch stack These roles can be set by the user per individual Switch or if desired can be automatically determined by the Switch stack Three possible roles exist when stacking with the Switch Primary Master The Primary Master is the leader of the stack It will maintain normal operations monitor operations and the running topology of the Stack This switch will also assign Stack Unit IDs synchronize configurations and transmit commands to remaining switches in the switch stack The Primary Master can be manually set by assigning this Switch the highest priority a lower number denotes a higher priority before physically assembling the stack or it can be determined automatically by the stack through an election process which determines the lowest MAC address and then will assign that switch as the Primary Master if all priorities are the same The Primary master are physically displayed by the seven segment LED to the far right on the front panel of the switch where this LED will flash between its given Box ID and H Backup Master The Backup Master is the backup to the Primary Master and will take over the functions of the Primary Master if the Primary Master fails or is removed from the Stack It also monitors the status of neighboring switches in the stack will perform commands assigned to it by the Primary Master and will monitor the running status
160. able Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Twofish128 Use the check box to enable or disable the twofish128 encryption algorithm The default is enabled Twofish192 Use the check box to enable or disable the twofish192 encryption algorithm The default is enabled Twofish256 Use the check box to enable or disable the twofish256 encryption algorithm The default is enabled Click the Apply button to accept the changes made The fields that can be configured for the Data Integrity Algorithm are described below Parameter Description HMAC SHA1 Use the check box to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the Secure Hash algorithm The default is enabled HMAC MD5 Use the check box to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the MD5 Message Digest encryption algorithm The default is enabled Click the Apply button to accept the changes made The fields that can be configured for the Public Key Algorithm are described below Parameter Description HMAC RSA Use the check box to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the RSA encryption algorithm The default is enabled HMAC DSA Use the check box to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the Digital Signature Algorithm DSA encryption The default is enabled Click the Apply button to accept the c
161. access control Remember the MAC list must be previously set on the RADIUS server Enter the password for the RADIUS server which is to be used for packets being sent requesting authentication The default password is default 228 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Max User Enter the maximum amount of users of the Switch o From Pot The beginning port of a range of ports to be configured for MAC based access control Use this drop down menu to enable or disable MAC based access control on the port or range of ports selected in the Port Settings section of this window Mode st Toggle between Port based and Host based Aging Time 1 1440 Enter a value between 7 and 1440 minutes The default is 1440 Block Time 0 300 Enter a value between 7 and 300 seconds The default is 300 Max User 1 1000 Enter the maximum user used for this configuration When No Limit is selected there will be no user limit applied to this rule To Port The ending port of a range of ports to be configured for MAC based access control Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section MAC based Access Control Local Settings Users can set a list of MAC addresses along with their corresponding target VLAN which will be authenticated for the Switch Once a queried MAC address is matched in this window it will be placed in the VLAN associated with it here The
162. ack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Chapter2 System Configuration Device Information System Information Settings Port Configuration PoE Serial Port Settings Warning Temperature Settings System Log configuration Time Range Settings Port Group Settings El Mode Only Time Settings User Accounts Settings Command Logging Settings Stacking Device Information This window contains the main settings for all the major functions for the Switch It appears automatically when you log on to the Switch To return to the Device Information window after viewing other windows click the DGS 3120 Series link The Device Information window shows the Switch s MAC Address assigned by the factory and unchangeable the Boot PROM Version Firmware Version Hardware Version and many other important types of information This is helpful to keep track of PROM and firmware updates and to obtain the Switch s MAC address for entry into another network device s address table if necessary In addition this window displays the status of functions on the Switch to quickly assess their current global status Many functions are hyper linked for easy access to enable quick configuration from this window xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Device Information Device Type DGS 3120 24TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch MAC Address 00 01 02 03 04 00 System Name IP Address 10 90 90 90
163. acket flooding into the switcH s CPU This feature will keep D Link Switches better protected from being too frequently interrupted by malicious viruses or worm attacks Figure 8 72 Safeguard Engine Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Safeguard Engine State Use the radio button to globally enable or disable Safeguard Engine settings for the Switch Rising Threshold 20 Used to configure the acceptable level of CPU utilization before the Safeguard Engine 100 mechanism is enabled Once the CPU utilization reaches this percentage level the Switch will move into Exhausted mode based on the parameters provided in this window Falling Threshold 20 Used to configure the acceptable level of CPU utilization as a percentage where the 100 Switch leaves the Safeguard Engine state and returns to normal mode Trap Log Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the sending of messages to the device s SNMP agent and switch log once the Safeguard Engine has been activated by a high CPU utilization rate Used to select the type of Safeguard Engine to be activated by the Switch when the CPU utilization reaches a high rate The user may select Fuzzy f selected this function will instruct the Switch to minimize the IP and ARP traffic flow to the CPU by dynamically allotting an even bandwidth to all traffic flows Strict If selected this function will stop acc
164. address of the entity you wish to advertise to The IPv4 address is a management IP address so the IP information will be sent with the frame Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered LLDP Basic TLVs Settings TLV stands for Type length value which allows the specific sending information as a TLV element within LLDP packets This window is used to enable the settings for the Basic TLVs Settings An active LLDP port on the Switch always included mandatory data in its outbound advertisements There are four optional data types that can be configured for an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of these data types from outbound LLDP advertisements The mandatory data type includes four basic types of information end of LLDPDU TLV chassis ID TLV port ID TLV and Time to Live TLV The mandatory data types cannot be disabled There are also four data types which can be optionally selected These include Port Description System Name System Description and System Capability To view the following window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Basic TLVs Settings as show below 127 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Unit From Port To Port Port Description Disabled System Name Disabled System Description Disabled System Capabilities Disabled w Unit 1 Settings Port Description System Name System Description System Capabilities
165. aged Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IPv4 El Mode Only Click the radio button to enter the TFTP server IP address used IPv6 El Mode Only Click the radio button to enter the TFTP server IPv6 address used Destination File Enter the location and name of the Destination File Log Type Select the type of log to be transferred Selecting the Common Log option here will upload the common log entries Selecting the Attack Log option here will upload the log concerning attacks Click Upload to initiate the upload Upload Log To HTTP This page allows the user to upload the log file from the Switch to a computer S sjie sees Upload Log To TFTP Upload Log To HTTP Log Type CommonLog Attack Log Figure 12 18 Upload Log HTTP window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Log Type Here the user can select the type of log to be transferred Selecting the Common Log option here will upload the common log entries Selecting the Attack Log option here will upload the log concerning attacks Click Upload to initiate the upload Reset The Reset function has several options when resetting the Switch Some of the current configuration parameters can be retained while resetting all other configuration parameters to their factory defaults NOTE Only the Reset System option will enter the factory default parameters into the Switch s non volatile RAM and then restar
166. ame way STP will block a single port that has a redundant link Port Trunking Settings On this page the user can configure the port trunk settings for the switch To view the following window click L2 Features gt Link Aggregation gt Port Trunking Settings as show below NOTE If any ports within the trunk group become disconnected packets intended for the disconnected port will be load shared among the other linked ports of the link aggregation group 87 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Apply Total Entries 0 Group ID Type Master Port Member Ports Active Ports Flooding Port Edit Trunking Information Unit Group ID 1 32 Type Master Port State 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 9 10 11 12 3 15 16 17 18 Note Maximum 6 ports in a static trunk or LACP group Figure 4 31 Port Trunking Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below This is the traffic hash algorithm among the ports of the link aggregation group Options to choose from are MAC Source Dest IP Source Dest and Lay4 Source Dest Unit Select the unit you want to configure Group ID 1 32 Select an ID number for the group between 7 and 32 Type This pull down menu allows users to select between Static and LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP allows for the automatic detection of links in a Port Trunking Group Parameter Description Master Port Choose the Master Por
167. an be modified due to a chip limitation Currently the priority is changed when both the 158 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide a priority and DSCP are set to be modified Replace ToS Specify that the IP precedence of the outgoing packet is changed with the new value If Precedence 0 7 used without an action priority the packet is sent to the default traffic class Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Counter Here the user can select the counter By checking the counter the administrator can see how many times that the rule was hit When a range of ports is to be configured the Auto Assign check box MUST be ticked in the Access ID field of this window If not the user will be presented with an error message and the access rule will not be configured VLAN Name Specify the VLAN name to apply to the access rule VLAN ID Specify the VLAN ID to apply to the access rule Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button in the Access Rule List the following page will appear ACL Rule Details Profile ID 300 Access ID Source MAC Show All Rules Fig
168. an only be 2Mb and even if the current configuration is only 40Kb it will still take up 2Mb of flash storage space The configuration file number and firmware numbers are also fixed A compatible issue will occur in the event that the configuration file or firmware size exceeds the originally designed size Flash File System in our system The Flash File System is used to provide the user with flexible file operation on the Flash All the firmware configuration information and system log information are stored in the Flash as files This means that the Flash space taken up by all the files are not fixed it is the real file size If the Flash space is enough the user could download more configuration files or firmware files and use commands to display Flash file information rename file names and delete it Furthermore the user can also configure the boot up runtime image or the running configuration file if needed In case the file system gets corrupted Z modem can be used to download the backup files directly to the system 2 1 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide To view this window click Network Application gt Flash File System Settings as shown below Size MB File System Type Figure 9 11Flash File System Settings window Enter the Current Path string and click the Go button to navigate to the path entered Click the C link to navigate the C drive After clicking the C link bu
169. an view and set local database user accounts for Web authentication To view this window click Security gt Web based Access Control WAC gt WAC User Settings as shown below NOTE A successful authentication should direct the client to the stated web page If the client does not reach this web page yet does not receive a Fail Message the client will already be authenticated and therefore should refresh the current browser window or attempt to open a different web page Create User User Name VLAN Name VID 1 4094 Fassword Confirmation Total Entries 2 VLAN Name Figure 8 38 WAC User Settings window VID Old Password New Password Confirmation The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Enter the user name of up to 15 alphanumeric characters of the guest wishing to access the Web through this process This field is for administrators who have selected Local as their Web based authenticator VLAN Name Click the button and enter a VLAN Name in this field VID 1 4094 Click the button and enter a VID in this field Password Enter the password the administrator has chosen for the selected user This field is case sensitive and must be a complete alphanumeric string This field is for administrators who have selected Local as their Web based authenticator Retype the password entered in the previous field Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete All bu
170. anagers that are permitted to use the community string to gain access to the Switch s SNMP agent e Any MIB view that defines the subset of all MIB objects will be accessible to the SNMP community e Read write or read only level permission for the MIB objects accessible to the SNMP community To view the following window click Management gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Community Table Settings as show below 91 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Add Community Access Right Read Only Apply Total Entries 2 Community Name View Name Access Right private CommunityWiew read write Delete CommunityView read_only Delete Figure 3 37 SNMP community Table Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Community Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch s SNMP agent View Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch The view name must exist in the SNMP View Table Access Right Read Only Specify that SNMP community members using the community string created can only read the contents of the MIBs on the Switch Read Write Specify that
171. arget IP Address 0000 Repeat Pinging for kee ence OL 288times i 1 99 sec IPv6 Ping Test Enter the IP address ofthe device or station you want to ping then click Start Target IP Address PO Interface Name fe Repeat Pinging for 2 Infinite times O 1 255 times Size 1 6000 Timeout 1 99 sec Figure 11 24 Ping Test window El Mode Only The user may click the Infinite times radio button in the Repeat Pinging for field which will tell the ping program to keep sending ICMP Echo packets to the specified IP address until the program is stopped The user may opt to choose a specific number of times to ping the Target IP Address by clicking its radio button and entering a number between 7 and 255 The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Target IP Address Enter an IP address to be pinged Repeat Pinging for Enter the number of times desired to attempt to Ping either the IPv4 address or the IPv6 address configured in this wndow Users may enter a number of times between 1 and 255 Size El Mode Only For IPv6 only enter a value between 7 and 6000 The default is 100 Timeout Select a timeout period between 7 and 99 seconds for this Ping message to reach its destination If the packet fails to find the IP address in this specified time the Ping packet will be dropped Click the Start button to initiate the Ping Test 300 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2
172. as a simple average by time interval To view this window click Monitoring gt Utilization gt CPU Utilization as shown below One Min Five Mins Unit Time Interval 4s r Record Number 200 Show Hide le Five Secs W One Min W Five Mins Figure 11 1 CPU Utilization window To view the CPU utilization by port use the real time graphic of the Switch and or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port Click Apply to implement the configured settings The window will automatically refresh with new updated statistics The fields that can be configured are described below 281 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Show Hide Check whether or not to display Five Seconds One Minute and Five Minutes Click the Apply button to accept the changes made DRAM amp Flash Utilization On this page the user can view information regarding the DRAM and Flash utilization To view this window click Monitoring gt Utilization gt DRAM amp Flash Utilization as shown below DRAM Total DRAM 131072 KB Used DRAM 129422 KB Utilization 93 Figure 11 2 DRAM amp Flash Utilization window Port Utilization
173. ash Algorithm This part of the cipher suite allows the user to choose a message digest function which will determine a Message Authentication Code This Message Authentication Code will be encrypted with a sent message to provide integrity and prevent against replay attacks The Switch supports two hash algorithms MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm These three parameters are uniquely assembled in four choices on the Switch to create a three layered encryption code for secure communication between the server and the host The user may implement any one or combination of the cipher suites available yet different cipher suites will affect the security level and the performance of the secured connection The information included in the cipher suites is not included with the Switch and requires downloading from a third source in a file form called a certificate This function of the Switch cannot be executed without the presence and implementation of the certificate file and can be downloaded to the Switch by utilizing a TFTP server The Switch supports SSLv3 Other versions of SSL may not be compatible with this Switch and may cause problems upon authentication and transfer of messages from client to host The SSL Settings window located on the next page will allow the user to enable SSL on the Switch and implement any one or combination of listed cipher suites on the Switch A cipher suite is a security string that determines the exact c
174. ask in hex form hex 0x0 Oxff Protocol ID Mask Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID traffic User Define Specify the Layer 4 part mask Click the Select button to select an ACL type Click the Create button to create a profile Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button the following page will appear MIL Leta UG elas ACL Profile Details Profile IO 301 Profile Mame IPv4ACL Profile Type IP Source IF 255 255 255 255 Show All Profiles Figure 7 9 Access Profile Detail Information window IPv4 ACL 161 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Show All Profiles button to navigate back to the Access Profile List Page After clicking the Add View Rules button the following page will appear Available HW Entries 1279 Profile Type Action EEN E Figure 7 10 Access Rule List window IPv4 ACL Click the Add Rule button to create a new ACL rule in this profile Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page Click the Show Details button to view more information about the specific rule created Click the Delete Rules button to remove the specific entry Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist After clicking the Add Rule button the following page will appear Profile Inform
175. ast Address List edit Delete Figure 4 77 Multicast Address Group List Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Display the profile ID Profile Name Display the profile name Multicast Address List Enter the multicast address list here Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry IPv6 Limited Multicast Range Settings Users can configure the ports and VLANs on the Switch that will be involved in the Limited IPv6 Multicast Range To view the following window click L2 Features gt Multicast Filtering gt IPv6 Multicast Filtering gt IPv6 Limited Multicast Range Settings as show below 122 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parts Po e g 1 4 5 Access Permit Apply VIDList eg 1 6 7 Profile ID Access Permit Add Il Delete Pos deg a Find Total Entries 1 VID Access State Profile ID Figure 4 78 IPv6 Limited Multicast Range Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Ports VID List Select the appropriate port s or VLAN IDs used for the configuration here Access t Assign acces
176. ates a potential for a loop An edge port normally should not receive BPDU packets If a BPDU packet is received it automatically loses edge port status Choosing the False parameter indicates that the port does not have edge port status Alternatively the Auto option is available Restricted Role Use the drop down menu to toggle Restricted Role between True and False If set to True the port will never be selected to be the Root port The default is False Click the Apply button to accept the changes made MST Configuration Identification This window allows the user to configure a MSTI instance on the Switch These settings will uniquely identify a multiple spanning tree instance set on the Switch The Switch initially possesses one CIST or Common Internal Spanning Tree of which the user may modify the parameters for but cannot change the MSTI ID for and cannot be deleted To view the following window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt MST Configuration Identification as show below 83 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide MST Configuration Identification Settings Configuration Name 00 01 02 03 04 00 Revision Level 0 65535 apy Instance ID Settings MSTI ID 1 15 Type Add VID VID List 1 4094 sd Apply Total Entries 1 MSTI ID VID List Figure 4 27 MST Configuration Identification window The fields that can be configured are described below
177. ation The commander switch will send swSinglelPMSAuthFail notification to the indicated host when its member generates an authentation failure notification The commander switch will send swSinglelPMSnewRoot notification to the indicated host when its member generates a new root notification The commander switch will send swSinglelPMSTopologyChange notification to the indicated host when its member generates a topology change notification A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself and that its configuration may have been altered A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself such that its configuration is unaltered A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links is about to enter the down state from some other state but not from the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links left the down state and transitioned into some other state but not into the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus An authenticationFailure trap signifies that the SNMP entity has received a pr
178. ation Profile ID 301 Profile Name IPv4 ACL Profile Type l Source IF 255 255 255 0 Rule Detail Keep the input field blank to specify that the corresponding option does not matter Access ID 1 1536 C Auto Assign Source IP Address Po Seg 192 168 1 10 Source IP Address Mask Rule Action Action Priority 0 7 Replace Priority Replace DSCP 0 63 Replace ToS Precedence 0 7 Time Range Name y Counter Disabled leg 124 128 1 9 Figure 7 11 Add Access Rule IPv4 ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Access ID 1 1536 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 1536 Auto Assign Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an 162 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide a Access ID for the rule being created Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set Priority 0 7 Tick the corresponding check box if you want to re write the 802
179. ation Profile ID Profile Name IPV6ACL Profile Type IPv6 Class Rule Detail Keep the input field blank to specify that the corresponding option does not matter Access ID 1 512 O Auto Assign Class eg 0 255 Rule Action Action Priority 0 7 Replace DSCP 0 63 Time Range Name d Counter Disabled VLAN Name DO OE Max 32 characters Figure 7 61 Add Egress Access Rule IPv6 ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Access ID 1 512 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 572 Auto Assign Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID for the rule being created Specify the value of IPv6 class select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered 200 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Priority 0 7 Tick the corresponding check box to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original valu
180. authorized devices that have been blocked by IP MAC binding restrictions To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding IMPB gt MAC Block List as shown below VLAN Name MAC Address A View All Delete All Total Entries 0 VID VLAN Name MAC Address Figure 8 29 MAC Block List The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name Enter a VLAN Name MAC Address Enter a MAC address Click the Find button to find an unauthorized device that has been blocked by the IP MAC binding restrictions Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping Maximum Entry Settings Users can configure the maximum DHCP snooping entry for ports on this page To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding IMPB gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Snooping Maximum Entry Settings as shown below 225 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Unit From Port To Port Maximum Entry 1 50 Maximum Entry No Limit No Limit imit imit imit imit No Limit No Limi t t MoL No Limit Figure 8 30 DHCP Snooping Max Entry Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description From Port To Port Use the drop down menus to select a range of ports to use Maximum Entry Enter the ma
181. b Ul Reference Guide MLD Multicast VLAN Click the radio buttons to can enable or disable the MLD multicast VLAN Forward Forward Unmatched Unmatched state VLAN Name Enter the VLAN name used Enter the VID value used Remap Priority The user can select this option to enable the Remap Priority feature Specify the remap priority 0 to 7 to be associated with the data traffic to be forwarded on the multicast VLAN If None is specified the packet s original priority will be used The default setting is None Replace Priority Tick the check box to specify that the packet s priority will be changed by the switch based on the remap priority This flag will only take effect when the remap priority is set Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Edit button to configure the MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings for the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Click the Profile List link to configure the MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings for the specific entry After clicking the Edit button the following page will appear VILL SACOPIAO MUUN Vv LAIN SINE VLAN Name state Disabled bal Replace Source IP E o e g FE80 201 Remap Priority L Replace Priority Unit Untagged Member Ports 01 02 03 014 oi 6 t 2 a lt i E 8 2 ER JA O 8 G amp O ee ee Tagged Member Ports
182. based on the information entered Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist S NOTE The abbreviations used on this page are Static Router Port S Dynamic Router Port D and Forbidden Router Port F IGMP Snooping Group Users can view the Switch s IGMP Snooping Group Table IGMP Snooping allows the Switch to read the Multicast Group IP address and the corresponding MAC address from IGMP packets that pass through the Switch To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Group as show below VLAN Name VID List e g 1 4 6 Port List e g 1 1 1 3 1 5 Group IPv4 Address Data Driven View All Clear All Data Driven VID VLAN Name Source Member Port Router Port Group Type Up Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Figure 4 47 IGMP Snooping Group window The user may search the IGMP Snooping Group Table by either VLAN Name or VID List by entering it in the top left hand corner and clicking Find The fields that can be configured are described below 100 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parameter Description VLAN Name The VLAN Name of the multicast group VID List The VLAN ID list of the multicast group Port List Specify the port number s used to find a multicast group Group IPv4 Address Enter the IPv4 address If Data Drive is selected only da
183. basis currently available for populating outbound LLDP advertisements in the local port brief table shown below To view the following window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Local Port Information as show below 131 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide LLDP Local Port Brief Table Unit 1 ba Show Normal KEK AA ee eee a 113 D Link DGS 3120 1 4 D Link DGS 3120 1 6 D Link DGS 3120 117 D Link DGS 3120 1 8 D Link DGS 3120 1 9 D Link DGS 3120 1 10 D Link DGS 3120 1 11 D Link DGS 3120 A O A A ETA 1 15 DGS 3120 a A 6 ptes 120 o aras as DDGS 4 19 D Link DGS 3120 D Link DGS 3120 112 D Link DGS 3120 Figure 4 88 LLDP Local Port Information window To view the normal LLDP Local Port information page per port click the Show Normal button To view the brief LLDP Local Port information page per port click the Show Brief button LLDP Local Port Normal Table LLDP Normal Ports Port ID Subtype PortID Port Description D Link DGS 3120 24TC R1 008011 Port 1 on Unit 1 Port PVID 1 Management Address Count show Detail PPVID Entries Show Detail VLAN Entries Show Detail Protocol Identity Entries Count Show Detail MAC PHY Configuration Status Show Detail Link Aggregation Show Detail Maximum Frame Size 1536 Figure 4 89 LLDP Local Port Information Show Normal window Select a Port number and click the Find button to locate a specific e
184. be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VIDs are different the Switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VIDs as the Switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is 62 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged Tagging and Untagging Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagging or untagging Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into and out of it If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact Other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions can then use the VLAN information in the tag Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets
185. bit sec Queue Bandwidth Control Table On Port 2 Min Rate Kbit sec Queue Queue Bandwidth Control Table On Port 3 Min Rate Kbit sec Queue No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit Ho Limit No Limit Ho Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit Mo Limit Max Rate Kbit sec No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit Max Rate Kbit sec No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit Queue Bandwidth Control Table On Port 4 Queue Min Rate Kbit sec Max Rate Kbit sec Figure 6 5 Queue Bandwidth Control Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Unit Select the unit you want to configure _ Specify the packet limit in Kops that the ports are allowed to receive Tick the No limit check box to have unlimited rate of packets received by the specified queue Click the Apply button to accept the changes made a NOTE The minimum granularity of queue bandwidth control is 64Kbit sec The system will adjust the number to the multiple of 64 automatically 144 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Traffic Control Settings On a computer network packets such as Multicas
186. button to clear all statistics counters on this window Click the View Table link to display the information in a table rather than a line graph Click the View Graphic link to display the information in a line graph rather than a table Mirror The Switch allows you to copy frames transmitted and received on a port and redirect the copies to another port You can attach a monitoring device to the mirrored port such as a sniffer or an RMON probe to view details about the packets passing through the first port This is useful for network monitoring and troubleshooting purposes Port Mirror Settings To view this window click Monitoring gt Mirror gt Port Mirror Settings as shown below Target Port Settings State O Enabled Disabled Target Port Source Port Source Port Settings Sniffer Mode 01 Apply Figure 11 16 Port Mirror Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below 294 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide State Click the radio buttons to enable or disable the Port Mirroring feature Unit Select the unit you want to configure S Click the radio buttons to select whether the port should include both incoming and outgoing traffic None Click the radio buttons to select whether the port should not include any traffic Click the Apply button to accept the changes made lt Q RSPAN Settings This page controls the RSPAN functi
187. can be configured are described below 289 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parameter Description Select the unit you want to configure Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 CRCError Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte octet boundary The number of packets detected that are less than the minimum permitted packets size of 64 bytes and have a good CRC Undersize packets usually indicate collision fragments a normal network occurrence OverSize Counts valid packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and less than the MAX_PKT_LEN Internally MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1536 The number of packets less than 64 bytes with either bad framing or an invalid CRC These are normally the result of collisions Jabber Counts invalid packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and less than the MAX_PKT_LEN Internally MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1536 The number of packets that are dropped by this port since the last Switch reboot Symbol Counts the number of packets received that have errors received in the symbol on the physical labor Show Hide Check whether or not to display CRCError UnderSize
188. can pass through the switch In this example it is the gateway s ARP 318 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 2 The switch will deny all other ARP packets which claim they are from the gateway s IP The design of Packet Content ACL on the Switch enables users to inspect any offset chunk An offset chunk is a 4 byte block in a HEX format which is utilized to match the individual field in an Ethernet frame Each profile is allowed to contain up to a maximum of four offset chunks Furthermore only one single profile of Packet Content ACL can be supported per switch In other words up to 16 bytes of total offset chunks can be applied to each profile and a switch Therefore a careful consideration is needed for planning and configuration of the valuable offset chunks In Table 6 you will notice that the Offset_Chunk0 starts from the 127th byte and ends at the 128th byte It also can be found that the offset chunk is scratched from 1 but not zero Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Chunk ChunkO Chunki Chunk2 Chunk3 Chunk4 Chunk5 Chunk6 Chunk7 Chunk8 Chunk9 Chunk10 Chunk11 Chunk12 Chunk13 Chunk14 Chunk15 PRSE gt gt o o e se se oo e Ee Se Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Chunk Chunk16 Chunk17 Chunk18 C
189. ccconncnncnonancnnnnnnnancnnnnnnnancnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnonanarnnnnnnnns 230 Web based Access Control WAC ccccccccccsseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeeesseeaseeeeesseeseeeesssaaeeeeesssaaaeeeeeesaaneeeeeesas 230 WAC GIOD al S CUI e 233 WAC USEF SCI roo ro 234 WAC POnoenNg earna a e Ree oe oe eee eae 234 WAG AUINGAUCATION Slate ici turer el Seon oes le a 236 SONMO OUI Autentica Osa o ld a 236 Compound Authentication Setlnas eiii ia ia 236 Compound Authentication Guest VLAN Settings El Mode OnNly ooocccnccccocccnncccnconcnnccononccnncnononncnnononannnnnononanonns 238 en nn a 239 POR Sec rity Settings ll debiles O Ea 239 RO Security LAN SAS e E 241 POR SCCUIITY EMME Scs dea a a a a N a A a dee o cod 241 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide ARP Spoofing Prevention Settings di 242 BPDU Attack FFOLECION A A aaaeei eiaa 243 oopback D t cioMmSEtiNGS ansionsa a A N a O a a A R 245 Trate Segmentation Sengo iia 246 NeIBIOS FIONN SEUNG e ico a AA 247 DHCP SEVEN a E T eae a sin Olean ter ieee iat 248 DACP Server screening POO CUNG S xox seriou eae ee aa ee eee ee 248 DACP OferPermil BAY SWINGS aina a hak cote teeta dace cbc oases nce id 249 ACCESS Authentication COMO sind OS ues e ut 249 A O ere re eee eee Poe 250 Authentication Policy Settings ccccccssssecccccsesseceeeceeeseceeecaeseceeessaaseeeeseeeaeceeesseaeeeessaaaeeeeesseaeeessssagseeeeessaanseees
190. ccept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button in the CPU Access Rule List the following page will appear PU Access Rule Det ormation PU ACL Rule Details Profile ID Access ID Profile Type Show All Rules Figure 7 33 CPU Access Rule Detail Information IPv4 ACL 179 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Show All Rules button to navigate back to the CPU Access Rule List Adding a CPU IPv6 ACL Profile The window shown below is the Add CPU ACL Profile window for IPv6 To use specific filtering masks in this ACL profile click the packet filtering mask field to highlight it red This will add more filed to the mask After clicking the Add CPU ACL Profile button the following page will appear a0 Fu ALL FrOone Profile 1D 1 5 Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL IPv4 ACL IPvb ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask IPv6 Class IPv6 Flow Label IPv6 Address IPvb6 Class JiPv6 Class IPv6 Flow Label C IP v6 Flow Label IPv6 Address Clipv6 Source Mask _ C iPv6 Destination Mask Figure 7 34 Add CPU ACL Profile IPv6 ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID 1 5 Enter a unique identifier number for thi
191. ck to be configured New Box ID The new box ID of the selected switch in the stack that was selected in the Current Box ID field The user may choose any number between 1 and 6 to identify the switch in the switch stack Auto will automatically assign a box number to the switch in the switch stack Priority 1 63 Displays the priority ID of the Switch The lower the number the higher the priority The box switch with the lowest priority number in the stack is the Primary Master switch The Primary Master switch will be used to configure applications of the switch stack Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 25 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Chapter3 Management ARP Gratuitous ARP IPv6 Neighbor Settings El Mode Only IP Interface Management Settings Session Table Single IP Management SNMP Settings Telnet Settings Web Settings ARP Static ARP Settings The Address Resolution Protocol is a TCP IP protocol that converts IP addresses into physical addresses This table allows network managers to view define modify and delete ARP information for specific devices Static entries can be defined in the ARP table When static entries are defined a permanent entry is entered and is used to translate IP addresses to MAC addresses To view the following window click Management gt ARP gt Static ARP Settings as show below Global Settings ARP Aging Tim
192. configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name Click the radio button and enter the VLAN name of the VLAN on which the associated unicast MAC address resides VLAN List Click the radio button and enter a list of VLAN on which the associated unicast MAC address resides MAC Address The MAC address to which packets will be statically forwarded This must be a unicast MAC address Port Drop Allows the selection of the port number on which the MAC address entered above resides This option could also drop the MAC address from the unicast static FDB When selecting Port enter the port number in the field The format can be unit ID port number e g 1 5 or port number e g 5 When only entering port number the default unit ID is 1 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Multicast Static FDB Settings Users can set up static multicast forwarding on the Switch To view the following window click L2 Features gt FDB gt Static FDB Settings gt Multicast Static FDB Settings as show below 90 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Multicast Forwarding Settings VIB Multicast MAC Address Unit Clear All Apply Select All 2 03 i F 6 08 i i 2 3 5 19 20 2 22 Za 24 None Egress Egress Ports Total Entries 0 MAC Address Mode Egress Ports Figure 4 34 Multicast Static FDB Settings window
193. ct Apply Figure 2 2 System Information Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parameter Description Enter a system name for the Switch if so desired This name will identify it in the Switch network System Location Enter the location of the Switch if so desired System Contact Enter a contact name for the Switch if so desired Click the Apply button to implement changes made System Name Port Configuration Port Settings This page used to configure the details of the switch ports To view the following window click System Configuration gt Port Configuration gt Port Settings as show below Unit From Port To Port State Speed Duplex Flow Control Address Learning MDIX Medium Type Disabled Unit 1 Settings 01 Enabled 05 MDIX Auto Auto Enabled Auto Enabled Auto Enabled Speed Duplex Auto Address Learning lisabled Link Down disabled Link Down isabled Link Down Disabled 100M Ful None Disabled Disabled Link Down Auto Disabled Auto isabled ink Down Auto disabled nk Down Auto lisabled nk Down Auto disabled Link Down u isabled nk Down L nk Down isabled Link Down isabled isabled Link Down isabled nk Down lisabled Link Down 06 Enabled 07 Enabled CICI og Enabled 09 Enabled Enabled Enabled 11 Enabled 12 led i T E ad a gt
194. d Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address or IPv6 address This will change the window according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header 802 1Q VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the 802 1Q VLAN identifier of each packet header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding IPv4 DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding IPv4 Source IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the source IP address IPv4 Destination IP Enter an IP address mask for the destination IP address 194 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Protocol Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the protocol type value in each frame s header Then the user must specify what protocol s to include according to the following guidelines Select CMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP type value o
195. d VLAN VLAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 Advertisement Tagged Ports Untagged Ports Forbidden Ports 1 1 1 24 1 ES Figure 4 4 802 1Q VLAN Settings VLAN List Tab window Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry 64 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist To create a new 802 1Q VLAN or modify an existing 802 1Q VLAN click the Add Edit VLAN tab A new tab will appear as shown below to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name and number to the new VLAN Find VLAN VLAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 Advertisement Disabled Tagged Untagged Forbidden Not Member Tagged Ports Untagged Ports Forbidden Ports Figure 4 5 802 1Q VLAN Settings Add Edit VLAN Tab window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VID Allow the entry of a VLAN ID or displays the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN in the Add Edit VLAN tab VLANs can be identified by either the VID or the VLAN name VLAN Name Allow the entry of a name for the new VLAN or for editing the VLAN name in the Add Edit VLAN tab Advertisement Enable this function to allow the Switch sending out GVRP packets to outside sources notifying that they may join the existing VLAN Umit Select the unit
196. d a new entry based on the information entered Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Click the Show IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Entries link to view the IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings MLD Multicast Group Profile Settings Users can add delete or configure the MLD multicast group profile on this page To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt Multicast VLAN gt MLD Multicast Group Profile Settings as show below Huo Prode se lek ia Profile Name Mae 32 characters Add J _ Find Delete all view All Total Entries 1 Profile Name Name Group List Figure 4 67 MLD Multicast Group Profile Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile Name Enter the MLD Multicast Group Profile name Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed 115 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Group Lisi link to configure the Multicast Group Profile Multicast Address Settings for the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry After clicking the Group List link the following page will appear NUMICAST O
197. d as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Signature attributes received from this server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access 220 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject or Access Challenge a timeout or retransmission Timeouts The number of authentication timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the authentication port The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason Click the Clear button to clear the current statistics shown RADIUS Account Client Users can display managed objects used for managing RADIUS accounting clients and the current statistics associated with them To view this window click Security gt RADIUS gt RADIUS Account Client as shown below Serverindex InvalidServerAddr Identifier
198. d entry point for access to the MS The CS s IP address will become the path to all MS s of the group and the CS s Administrators password and or authentication will control access to all MS s of the SIM group With SIM enabled the applications in the CS will redirect the packet instead of executing the packets The applications will decode the packet from the administrator modify some data and then send it to the MS After execution the CS may receive a response packet from the MS which it will encode and send it back to the administrator When a CaS becomes a MS it automatically becomes a member of the first SNMP community includes read write and read only to which the CS belongs However if a MS has its own IP address it can belong to SNMP communities to which other switches in the group including the CS do not belong Upgrade to v1 61 To better improve SIM management the DGS 3120 Series switches have been upgraded to version 1 61 in this release Many improvements have been made including 3 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 1 The Commander Switch CS now has the capability to automatically rediscover member switches that have left the SIM group either through a reboot or S web malfunction This feature is accomplished through the use of Discover packets and Maintenance packets that previously set SIM members will emit after a reboot Once a MS has had its MAC addre
199. dd a new entry based on the information entered Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Click the Show MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Entries link to view the MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings Multicast Filtering IPv4 Multicast Filtering 118 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings Users can add a profile to which multicast address s reports are to be received on specified ports on the Switch This function will therefore limit the number of reports received and the number of multicast groups configured on the Switch The user may set an IPv4 Multicast address or range of IPv4 Multicast addresses to accept reports Permit or deny reports Deny coming into the specified switch ports To view the following window click L2 Features gt Multicast Filtering gt IPv4 Multicast Filtering gt IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings as show below Profile ID 1 60 Profile Mame po fs Max 32 characters Sa a Delete All Total Entries 1 Profile ID Profile Name 1 ProfileName Group List Delete Figure 4 72 IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Enter a Profile ID between 7 and 60 Profile Name Enter a name for the IP Multicast Profile Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Find button to locate
200. ddress that determines where packets with a destination address outside the current 31 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide subnet should be sent This is usually the address of a router or a host acting as an IP gateway If your network is not part of an intranet or you do not want the Switch to be accessible outside your local network you can leave this field unchanged Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Interface Settings Users can display the Switch s current IP interface settings To view the following window click Management gt IP Interface gt Interface Settings as show below Interface Name i Total Entries 1 Interface Name VLAN Name Admin State IPw4 Edit Figure 3 8 Interface Settings window Sl Mode Only Interface Name Delete All Total Entries 1 Interface Name VLAN Name Admin State Secondary Link State Figure 3 9 Interface Settings window El Mode Only The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Interface Name Enter the name of the IP interface to search for Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the IPv4 Edit button to edit the IPv4 settings for the specific entry Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered El Mode Only Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed El Mode Only Click the
201. e No Cable may be displayed under Test Result when the length of cable is less than 5 meters 4 It also measures cable fault and identifies the fault in length according to the distance from this switch Figure 10 1 Cable Diagnostics window To view the cable diagnostics for a particular port use the drop down menu to choose the port and click Test The information will be displayed in this window NOTE Cable diagnostics function limitations Cable length detection is only supported on GE ports Ports must be linked up and running at 1000M speed Cross talk errors detection is not supported on FE ports NOTE The available cable diagnosis length is from 5 to 120 meters NOTE The deviation of cable length detection is 5M for GE ports Fault messages e Open This pair is left open e Short Two lines of this pair is shorted e CrossTalk Lines of this pair is short with lines in other pairs e Unknown The diagnosis does not obtain the cable status please try again e NA No cable was found maybe it s because cable is out of diagnosis specification or the quality is too bad 280 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Chapter 11 Monitoring Utilization Statistics Mirror sFlow El Mode Only Ping Test Trace Route Peripheral Utilization CPU Utilization Users can display the percentage of the CPU being used expressed as an integer percentage and calculated
202. e 0 65535 min Add Static ARP Entry Delete All Total Entries 3 Interface Name IP Address MAC Address 10 0 0 0 10 90 90 90 10 255 255 255 Local Broadcast Figure 3 1 Static ARP Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description ARP Aging Time 0 65535 The ARP entry age out time in minutes The default is 20 minutes IP Address The IP address of the ARP entry MAC Address The MAC address of the ARP entry Click the Apply button located in the Global Settings section to accept the changes made in this section Click the Apply button located in the Add Static ARP Entry section to accept the changes made in this section 26 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Proxy ARP Settings El Mode Only The Proxy ARP Address Resolution Protocol feature of the Switch will allow the Switch to reply to ARP requests destined for another device by faking its identity IP and MAC Address as the original ARP responder Therefore the Switch can then route packets to the intended destination without configuring static routing or a default gateway The host usually a layer 3 switch will respond to packets destined for another device For example if hosts A and B are on d
203. e 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLANSs can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained IEEE 802 1Q Tag Octets o 1 2 3 4 Destination Address 6 octets Source Address 6 octets EtherType Gxe100 Tag Control Information Begining of ata usaron eFt VLAN To VID G2 3 bits 1 bit 12 bits Figure 4 2 IEEE 802 1Q Tag 61 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide The EtherType and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original EtherT ype Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE 602 103 Tag Figure 4 3 Adding an IEEE 802 1Q Tag Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLANs to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Unfortunately not all network devices are 802 1Q compliant These devices are referred to as tag unaware 802 1Q devices are referred to as tag
204. e Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Chapter 4 L2 Features VLAN Spanning Tree Link Aggregation FDB L2 Multicast Control Multicast Filtering LLDP NLB FDB Settings VLAN Understanding IEEE 802 1p Priority Priority tagging is a function defined by the IEEE 802 1p standard designed to provide a means of managing traffic on a network where many different types of data may be transmitted simultaneously It is intended to alleviate problems associated with the delivery of time critical data over congested networks The quality of applications that are dependent on such time critical data such as video conferencing can be severely and adversely affected by even very small delays in transmission Network devices that are in compliance with the IEEE 802 1p standard have the ability to recognize the priority level of data packets These devices can also assign a priority label or tag to packets Compliant devices can also strip priority tags from packets This priority tag determines the packet s degree of expeditiousness and determines the queue to which it will be assigned Priority tags are given values from 0 to 7 with O being assigned to the lowest priority data and 7 assigned to the highest The highest priority tag 7 is generally only used for data associated with video or audio applications which are sensitive to even slight delays or for data from specified end users whose data transmissions warrant special consideration The
205. e and password to access the Switch configured using the WAC User Settings window Security gt Web based Access Control gt WAC User Settings seen below RADIUS Choose this parameter to use a remote RADIUS server as the authenticating method for users trying to access the network via the switch This RADIUS server must have already been pre assigned by the administrator using the Authentication RADIUS Server Settings window Security gt RADIUS gt Authentication RADIUS Server Settings Redirection Path Enter the URL of the website that authenticated users placed in the VLAN are directed to once authenticated Clear Redirection Path The user can enable or disable this option to clear the redirection path RADIUS Authorization The user can enable or disable this option to enable RADIUS Authorization or not Local Authorization The user can enable or disable this option to enable Local Authorization or not HTTP S Port 1 65535 Enter a HTTP port number Port 80 is the default HTTP Specifies that the TCP port will run the WAC HTTP protocol The default value is 80 HTTP port cannot run at TCP port 443 233 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide HTTPS Specifies that the TCP port will run the WAC HTTPS protocol The default value is 443 HTTPS cannot run at TCP port 80 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section lt Q WAC User Settings Users c
206. e before being forwarded by the Switch For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Replace DSCP 0 63 Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field When an ACL rule is added to change both the priority and DSCP of an IPv6 packet only one of them can be modified due to a chip limitation Currently the priority is changed when both the priority and DSCP are set to be modified Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Counter Here the user can select the counter By checking the counter the administrator can see how many times that the rule was hit When a range of ports is to be configured the Auto Assign check box MUST be ticked in the Access ID field of this window If not the user will be presented with an error message and the access rule will not be configured Ticking the All Ports check box will denote all ports on the Switch Port Group ID Specify the port group ID to apply to the access rule Port Group Name Specify the port group name to apply to the access rule VLAN Name Specify the VLAN name to apply to the access rule VLAN ID Specify the VLAN ID to ap
207. e burst size for the single rate two color mode The unit is in kilobyte Rate Exceeded Specify the action for packets that exceed the committed rate in single rate two color mode The action can be specified as one of the following Drop Packet Drop the packet immediately Remark DSCP Mark the packet with a specified DSCP The packet is set to drop for packets with a high precedence trTCM Specify the two rate three color mode CIR Specify the Committed information Rate The unit is Kbps CIR should always be equal or less than PIR PIR Specify the Peak information Rate The unit is Kops PIR should always be equal to or greater than CIR CBS Specify the Committed Burst Size The unit is in kilobyte PBS Specify the Peak Burst Size The unit is in kilobyte srTCM Specify the single rate three color mode CIR Specify the Committed Information Rate The unit is in kilobyte CBS Specify the Committed Burst Size The unit is in kilobyte EBS Specify the Excess Burst Size The unit is in kilobyte Conform This field denotes the green packet flow Green packet flows may have their DSCP field rewritten to a value stated in this field Users may also choose to count green packets by using counter parameter Replace DSCP Packets that are in the green flow may have their DSCP field rewritten using this parameter and entering the DSCP value to replace Counter Use this pa
208. e described below Parameter Description VLAN Name This option will display the VLAN name of the VLAN configured State Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the state Replace Source IP With the IGMP snooping function the IGMP report packet sent by the host will be forwarded to the source port Before forwarding of the packet the source IP address in the join packet needs to be replaced by this IP address If none is specified the source IP address will not be replaced Remap Priority 0 7 The remap priority value 0 to 7 to be associated with the data traffic to be forwarded on the multicast VLAN None lf None is specified the packet s original priority is used The default setting is None Replace Priority Specify that the packet s priority will be changed by the switch based on the remap priority This flag will only take effect when the remap priority is set Untagged Member Ports Specify the untagged member port of the multicast VLAN Click the Select All button to select all the ports or click the Clear All button to unselect all the ports Tagged Member Ports Specify the tagged member port of the multicast VLAN Click the Select All button to select all the ports or click the Clear All button to unselect all the ports Untagged Source Ports Specify the source port or range of source ports as untagged members of the multicast VLAN The PVID of the untagged source port is automatically changed to the m
209. e described below 242 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parameter Description Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address to help prevent ARP Spoofing Gateway MAC Address Enter the gateway MAC address to help prevent ARP Spoofing Enter the port numbers that this feature applies to Alternatively the user can select All Ports to apply this feature to all the ports of the switch Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry BPDU Attack Protection This page is used to configure the BPDU protection function for the ports on the switch In generally there are two states in BPDU protection function One is normal state and another is under attack state The under attack state have three modes drop block and shutdown A BPDU protection enabled port will enter an under attack state when it receives one STP BPDU packet And it will take action based on the configuration Thus BPDU protection can only be enabled on the STP disabled port BPDU protection has a higher priority than the FBPDU setting configured by configure STP command in the determination of BPDU handling That is when FBPDU is configured to forward STP BPDU but BPDU protection is enabled then the port will not forward STP BPDU BPDU prot
210. e device environment feature displays the Switch internal temperature status To view this window click Monitoring gt Peripheral gt Device Environment as shown below High Warning Temperature Threshold celsius Low Warning Temperature Threshold celsius Unit Internal Power External Power Right Fan 1 Speed Low 3000 RPM Right Fan 2 Speed Low 3000 RPM Current Temperature celsius 35 Fan High Temperature Threshold celsius 40 Fan Low Temperature Threshold celsius 35 Figure 11 29 Device Environment window Click the Refresh button to refresh the display table so that new entries will appear 303 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Chapter 12 Save and Tools Save Configuration Log To view this window click Save gt Save Configuration Log as shown below Save Configuration allows the user to backup the configuration of the switch to a folder on the computer Select Configuration from the Type drop down menu and enter the File Path in the space provided and click Apply Save Configuration Log Type Configuration FilePath Figure 12 1 Save Configuration window Save Log allows the user to backup the log file of the switch Select Log from the Type drop down menu and click Apply Save Configuration Log Type Log Apply Figure 12 2 Save Log window Save All allows the user to permanently save changes made to the configuration This op
211. e information entered Click the Clear Data Driven button to delete the specific MLD snooping group which is learned by the Data Driven feature of the specified VLAN Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Clear All Data Driven button to delete all MLD snooping groups which is learned by the Data Driven feature of specified VLANs MLD Snooping Forwarding Table This page displays the switch s current MLD snooping forwarding table It provides an easy way for user to check the list of ports that the multicast group comes from and specific sources that it will be forwarded to The packet comes from the source VLAN They will be forwarded to the forwarding VLAN The MLD snooping further restricts the forwarding ports To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Forwarding Table as show below 109 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 9 VANName JO WDList eg 146 Find View All Total Entries 0 VLAN Name source P Multicast Group Port Member Figure 4 59 MLD Snooping Forwarding Table window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name The name of the VLAN for which you want to view MLD snooping forwarding table information VID List The ID of the VLAN for which you want to view MLD snooping forwarding table information Click t
212. e port transitions from down to up or when an EAPOL start frame is received The Switch then requests the identity of the client and begins relaying authentication messages between the client and the authentication server The default setting is Auto Capability This allows the 802 1X Authenticator settings to be applied on a per port basis Select Authenticator to apply the settings to the port When the setting is activated a user must pass the authentication process to gain access to the network Select None disable 802 1X functions on the port Sets the administrative controlled direction to Both or In lf Both is selected control is exerted over both incoming and outgoing traffic through the controlled port selected in the first field If n is selected the control is only exerted over incoming traffic through the port the user selected in the first field Forward EAPOL PDU This is a global setting to control the forwarding of EAPOL PDU When 802 1X functionality is disabled globally or for a port and if 802 1X forward PDU is enabled both globally and for the port a received EAPOL packet on the port will be flooded in the same VLAN to those ports for which 802 1X forward PDU is enabled and 802 1X is disabled globally or just for the port The default state is disabled Specifies the maximum number of users The maximum user limit is 448 users The default is 16 Click the Refresh button to refresh the display table so
213. e stored in its base directory when the request is received from the Switch For more information about loading a configuration file for use by a client see the DHCP server and or TF TP server software instructions The user may also consult the Upload Log File window description located in the Tools section of this manual If the Switch is unable to complete the DHCP auto configuration the previously saved configuration file present in the Switch s memory will be used This window also allows the user to implement the Switch s built in power saving feature When power saving is enabled a port which has a link down status will be turned off to save power to the Switch This will not affect the port s capabilities when the port status is link up Users can also configure Password Encryption on the Switch To view the following window click Management gt Management Settings as show below CLI Paging Settings CLI Paging State e Enabled Disabled DHCP Auto Configuration Settings DHCP Auto Configuration State Enabled Disabled Power Saving Settings Power Saving State Enabled Disabled Length Detection State Enabled Disabled Password Encryption Settings Password Encryption State Enabled Disabled Figure 3 14 Management Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description CLI Paging State Command Line Interface paging stops each page at the end of the console This allows y
214. e the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header Select Packet Content to instruct the Switch to examine the packet content in each frame s header 802 1Q VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the 802 1Q VLAN identifier of each packet header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding IPv4 DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding IPv4 Source IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the source IP address e g 255 255 255 255 160 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IPv4 Destination IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the destination IP address e g 255 255 255 255 Protocol Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the protocol type value in each frame s header Then the user must specify what protocol s to include according to the following guidelines Select CMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP type value or specify Code to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP code value Select GMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protoco
215. e the LLDP feature LLDP Forward When LLDP is disabled this function controls the LLDP packet forwarding message based Message on individual ports If LLDP is enabled on a port it will flood the LLDP packet to all ports that have the same port VLAN and will advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN Message TX Interval This interval controls how often active ports retransmit advertisements to their neighbors To change the packet transmission interval enter a value in seconds 5 to 32768 Message TX Hold This function calculates the Time to Live for creating and transmitting the LLDP Multiplier advertisements to LLDP neighbors by changing the multiplier used by an LLDP Switch When the Time to Live for an advertisement expires the advertised data is then deleted from the neighbor Switch s MIB LLDP Relnit Delay The LLDP re initialization delay interval is the minimum time that an LLDP port will wait before reinitializing after receiving an LLDP disable command To change the LLDP re init delay enter a value in seconds 1 to 10 LLDP TX Delay LLDP TX Delay allows the user to change the minimum time delay interval for any LLDP port which will delay advertising any successive LLDP advertisements due to change in the LLDP MIB content To change the LLDP TX Delay enter a value in seconds 1 to 8192 LLDP Notification LLDP Notification Interval is used to send notifications to configured SNMP trap interval receiver s wh
216. e the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server local Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch none Adding this parameter will require no authentication needed to access the Switch Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Enable Method Lists Settings Users can set up Method Lists to promote users with user level privileges to Administrator Admin level privileges using authentication methods on the Switch Once a user acquires normal user level privileges on the Switch he or she must be authenticated by a method on the Switch to gain administrator privileges on the Switch which is defined 256 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide by the Administrator A maximum of eight Enable Method Lists can be implemented on the Switch one of which is a default Enable Method List This default Enable Method List cannot be deleted but can be configured The sequence of methods implemented in this command will a
217. e value in each frame s header Click the Select button to select an ACL type Click the Create button to create a profile Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button the following page will appear Egress ACL Profile Details Profile ID Profile Name EthernetACGL Profile Type Ethernet Ethernet Type Yes Show All Profiles Figure 7 49 Egress Access Profile Detail Information window Ethernet ACL Click the Show All Profiles button to navigate back to the Access Profile List Page After clicking the Add View Rules button the following page will appear 4 h Available HW Entries 511 Profile Type Action A E Figure 7 50 Egress Access Rule List window Ethernet ACL Click the Add Rule button to create a new ACL rule in this profile Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page Click the Show Details button to view more information about the specific rule created Click the Delete Rules button to remove the specific entry Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist After clicking the Add Rule button the following page will appear 191 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile Information Profile ID Frofile Name EthernetACle Profile Type Ethernet Ethernet Type Rule Detail Keep the in
218. eceived RX To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Statistics gt Port Statistics gt Packets gt Received RX as shown below ecelvediA Unit 07 Apply Clear 1000 900 o B00 Foo BOO UnittPackets sec or Bytes sec Time Interval pe Record Number 200 ShowiHide le Bytes le Packets Figure 11 4 Received RX window for Bytes and Packets Click the link to display the information in a table rather than a line graph facealved Unit Port Packets Unicast Multicast Broadcast TX Packets Packets Figure 11 5 RX Packets Analysis Table window 284 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Select the unit you want to configure Pot is Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts the number of bytes received on the port Packets ts Counts the number of packets received on
219. ect an ACL type Click the Create button to create a profile Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After O the Show Details button the following page will appear ACL Profile Details Profile Name PCACL Profile Type Packet Content Chunk 1 1 Value 0x00000000 Show All Profiles Figure 7 19 Access Profile Detail Information Packet Content ACL Click the Show All Profiles button to navigate back to the Access Profile List Page NOTE Address Resolution Protocol ARP is the standard for finding a host s hardware address MAC e address However ARP is vulnerable as it can be easily spoofed and utilized to attack a LAN i e lt Q an ARP spoofing attack For a more detailed explanation on how ARP protocol works and how to employ D Link s unique Packet Content ACL to prevent ARP spoofing attack please see Appendix E at the end of this manual After clicking the Add View Rules button the following page will appear Available HW Entries 1279 Profile Type Action n i ES Figure 7 20 Access Rule List Packet Content ACL 169 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Add Rule button to create a new ACL rule in this profile Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page Click the Show Details button to view more information about the specific rule created Click the Delete Rules button to remove
220. ection also has a higher priority than the BPDU tunnel port setting in determination of BPDU handling That is when a port is configured as BPDU tunnel port for STP it will forward STP BPDU But if the port is BPDU protection enabled Then the port will not forward STP BPDU To view this window click Security gt BPDU Attack Protection as shown below 243 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide BPDU Attack Protection Global Settings BPDU Attack Protection State C Enabled Disabled Trap State Log State Both e Recover Time 60 1000000 sec L Infinite Unit From Port To Port State Mode a isabled isabled isabled Disabled Normal Disabled Normal Normal Disab isabled Shutdown isabled Shutdown isabled Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown Disabled Normal Shutdown Norma Shutdown Dis l Shutdown 3 Figure 8 49 BPDU Attack Protection window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description BPDU Attack Protection Click the radio buttons to enable or disable the BPDU Attack Protection state State Trap State Specify when a trap will be sent Options to choose from are None Attack Detected Attack Cleared or Both Log State Specify when a log entry will be sent Options to choose from are None Attack Detected Attack Cleared or Both Specify the BPDU protection Auto Recovery timer The default value of the recovery timer
221. ed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Trap Log O Enabled Disabled DHCP Snoop O Enabled Disabled Recover Learning Ports e g 1 1 1 7 1 12 po Jan Figure 8 26 IMPB Global Settings The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Trap Log Click the radio buttons to enable or disable the sending of trap log messages for IP MAC port binding When Enabled the Switch will send a trap message to the SNMP agent and the Switch log when an ARP packet is received that doesn t match the IP MAC port binding configuration set on the Switch The default is Disabled DHCP Snooping State Click the radio buttons to enable or disable DHCP snooping for IP MAC port binding The default is Disabled Recover Learning Ports Enter the port numbers used to recover the learning port state Tick the All check box to apply to all ports Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section IMPB Port Settings Select a port or a range of ports with the From Port and To Port fields Enable or disable the port with the State Allow Zero IP and Forward DHCP Packet field and configure the port s Max Entry To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding IMPB gt IMPB Port Settings as shown below Unit From Fort To Port ARP Inspection IP Inspection Protocol Zero IP DHCP Packet Stop Learning Threshold Disabled w Disabled IPv4 v Disabled Enabled w 0 500 Zer
222. ed are described below Parameter Description Select the unit you want to configure Pot Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics 291 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts the number of packets for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface was delayed because the medium was busy CRC Error Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte octet boundary LateColl Counts the number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet ExColl Excessive Collisions The number of packets for which transmission failed due to exces sive collisions SingColl single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision An estimate of the total number of collisions on this network segment Show Hide Check whether or not to display ExDefer CRCError LateColl ExColl SingColl and Collision errors Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Clear button to clear all statistics counters on this window Click the View Table link to disp
223. eeeesseaeceeeesaaeeeeeseeeaeeeesseaceceeesseaeeeeessaageeessssaeesess 3 Areas On Ine Us Ai lala LE 3 WeDP ad Srs an 4 Chapter 2 System Configuration nuit iia 5 Device INO MANO estancado iento ae 5 System Information Settings ccccceeeccccccseeseeeecceeeeeeeecseeeeceeeeaaeeeeeesseaeeeeeeseaseeeessaauseceeseseaeeeeesuaaeeeesesaaaeeeeessaageeesessagees 6 PORES OMG A e eo dd is 7 a e Na a doen tienes a stan aane R a i 7 Poni Descripilion Scuderia dai 9 FOCENO DI A Nast tes ese yq A aa hneincuiemetnts 9 JUNDOR AME 14 1 G ko eee eee o a eee ee ee ene eee are 10 e 10 A eat depen O cetera aes 11 POE POR SINO a e Ss a dt o Sei ek el 12 Sena Bl al ipo cds tac ic 13 Warning Temperature Settings ccccccssesccccceeseeceeccaeseeeeeecseaseeeeeseeueeeesesaaeeeeeseaaseeeeesueasceeessaaaeceeessaaeceeesssaageeeesssaaess 14 System Log CONQUE aia io ica cede 15 System ele SEUN iso as 15 System LOG Server SUING Sissi a aeaa 15 Ss A EA ORE tate neh ee oe ny ier en Oe ee ee A ee E A 16 System LOG se Trap clunds ee eerie oe eee eee eee 17 SV SIEM SS VETILY Seting Si A ds 18 MVS FANGS SS WINGS sak seas cee eh e ais a o e O 19 Por Group Settings El MOS ONV ciate A a 20 a 20 User Accounts MS esa 21 GONNA LAIA AS o dal 22 SLACK NC A oe o 22 SACKING Device Table saia do 24 StackIng MOAS ENIS on E E oar E IED aaa La eee 25 Chapters Management 26 A a ono E 26 o 26 Proxy ARP Settings El Mode On liinda 27 Pe A 27 A en A
224. elow system Log Enabled Disabled Apply System Log Save Mode Settings Save Mode OnDemand min 1 65535 Figure 2 11 System Log Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description System Log Use the radio buttons to enable or disable the system log settings Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Save Mode Use the pull down menu to choose the method for saving the switch log to the flash memory The user has three options On Demand Users who choose this method will only save log files when they manually tell the Switch to do so either using the Save Log link in the Save folder Time Interval Users who choose this method can configure a time interval by which the Switch will save the log files in the box adjacent to this configuration field The user may set a time between 1 and 65535 minutes Log Trigger Users who choose this method will have log files saved to the Switch every time a log event occurs on the Switch Click the Apply button to accept the changes made System Log Server Settings The Switch can send System log messages to up to four designated servers using the System Log Server To view the following window click System Configuration gt System Log Configuration gt System Log Server Settings as show below xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Add System Log Server Server ID
225. em reset or system boot Figure 8 23 RADIUS Accounting Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description When enabled the Switch will send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when 802 1X and WAC port access control events occur on the Switch When enabled the Switch will send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when a user either logs in logs out or times out on the Switch using the console Telnet or SSH System When enabled the Switch will send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when system events occur on the Switch such as a system reset or system boot Click the Apply button to accept the changes made RADIUS Authentication Users can display information concerning the activity of the RADIUS authentication client on the client side of the RADIUS authentication protocol 219 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide To view this window click Security gt RADIUS gt RADIUS Authentication as shown below Serverindex serverPortMumber AccessRequests Figure 8 24 RAIUS Authentication window The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description InvalidServerAddr Serverlndex AuthServerAddr Serve
226. en an LLDP change is detected in an advertisement received on the port from an LLDP neighbor To set the LLDP Notification Interval enter a value in seconds 5 to 3600 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section 125 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide LLDP Port Settings On this page the user can configure the LLDP port parameters To view the following window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Port Settings as show below Unit From Port To Port Notification Admin Status ao el 01 01 v Disabled w subtype Action Address Note The IPv4 address should be the switcH s address Unit 1 Settings Fort ID Notification Admin Status IPv4 IPv6 Address SS o able Xan Disabled Tan o S Disabled TK and RKP isabled po Tam RK Disabled X and co sable OM E T T A Disabled Tam RX u Ba S SS A Disabled an and Disabled Ta y o SSE AAA SSS ee ee a INN SSS AAA Oo O A Disabled ae isabled TX and Disabled Figure 4 82 LLDP Port Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IT Select the starting and ending ports to use From Port To Port Use the drop down menu to select the ports used for this configuration Notification Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the status of the LLDP notification This function controls the SNMP trap however it cannot implement
227. epting all ARP packets not intended for the Switch and will stop receiving all unnecessary broadcast IP packets until the storm has subsided The default setting is Fuzzy mode Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 268 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Chapter9 Network Application DHCP SNTP Flash File System Settings DHCP DHCP Relay DHCP Relay Global Settings Users can enable and configure DHCP Relay Global Settings The relay hops count limit allows the maximum number of hops routers that the DHCP messages can be relayed through to be set If a packet s hop count is more than the hop count limit the packet is dropped The range is between 7 and 76 hops with a default value of 4 The relay time threshold sets the minimum time in seconds that the Switch will wait before forwarding a BOOTREQUEST packet If the value in the secondes field of the packet is less than the relay time threshold the packet will be dropped The range is between 0 and 65 535 seconds with a default value of O seconds To view this window click Network Application gt DHCP gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Global Settings as shown below DHCP Relay State Disabled DHCP Relay Hops Count Limit 1 16 DHCP Relay Time Threshold 0 65535 sec DHCP Relay Option 62 State Disabled DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check Disabled DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 62 Policy Re
228. er 11 MonNIHOrINO scsi an 281 o tele ee ed et aN ca cede oad lets Ad tee aE lan a hela acd ae a a ld siete 281 GPU NZ ANON O de a ad dansisubtangubelsaudecadecseteeacuda tetas aska 281 DRAM amp Flash Utilization cc ccoccic nsosoiiiesebaesanetebdinaseodbd A exsdunesaueubletaceddesnactenel 282 FOE TIN Zea OM a iia 282 A eaucereacesecieenen Aa E a 283 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide o eee PO ea Se APR rE Re rr VE mn MDE ciao eee ee ee eee 283 PACKET aca ae Oi nth O UA cat Ta EY cael Se acts MeL as Mh tl ps a ia eal te le need 283 EONS us E dna ese teos ences 288 PAGS A O eens a te 292 MO O mT me ee 294 PON MINO Se WINGS ics seek es et cee eee eee os ees se et ee ue ese ee esas 294 Ro PAN Set OS ii A A Ea 295 SPIOW EV IMOGES ON ii 296 SRIOW Glo Bal Se Un de ee ed o end dt done 296 sFlow Analyzer Server Settings ccccccsssseccecceseeeeecceeeseceeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeesseaeeceeesseueceeessaaseeeeessagseeeeessaagseeees 297 SFIOW FION Sampler SENOS iia 298 SFW Counter Poler SO NING S x ceecsacecesesccecactetezwua duntanevecstauacenseonst adeecuasduntebe Saencuacoseteaes E E 299 PNO TO ctr tae at ha aad alata Se acca a ua ata atmo batant banan litne lcannd on ohio S 299 ace Rola tdi i 301 FE NOISY A PORO PORRA O a lL ee ware ab el a ii a aia Re a ca a a nha esa aU Salo aehclea tea atsbate 303 DEVICES ENVIO Menta iaa aio 303 Chapter 12 Save and TOONS sicvscesecetesneecevce
229. er is intended for Linux users requiring SSH authentication techniques and the host computer is running the Linux operating system with a SSH program previously installed This parameter is enabled by default Click the Apply button to accept the changes made The fields that can be configured for the Encryption Algorithm are described below Parameter Description 3DES CBC Use the check box to enable or disable the Triple Data Encryption Standard encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled Blow fish CBC Use the check box to enable or disable the Blowfish encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled AES128 CBC Use the check box to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled AES192 CBC Use the check box to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES192 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled AES256 CBC Use the check box to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES 256 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled ARC4 Use the check box to enable or disable the Arcfour encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled Cast128 CBC Use the check box to enable or disable the Cast128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled 263 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stack
230. er of the DHCP client packet the port number starts from 1 NO of WD Remote ID sub option format MAC Address 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Figure 9 3 Remote ID Sub option Format 1 Sub option type 2 Length 3 Remote ID type 4 Length 5 MAC address The Switch s system MAC address 271 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide DHCP Relay Interface Settings Users can set up a server by IP address for relaying DHCP information to the Switch The user may enter a previously configured IP interface on the Switch that will be connected directly to the DHCP server using this window Properly configured settings will be displayed in the DHCP Relay Interface Table at the bottom of the window once the user clicks the Apply button The user may add up to four server IPs per IP interface on the Switch Entries may be deleted by clicking the corresponding Delete button To view this window click Network Application gt DHCP gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Interface Settings as shown below Interface Name fe Max 12 characters Server IP eg 10 90 90 90 Total Entries 0 Interface Name Server sever Servers Sever Figure 9 4 DHCP Relay Interface Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Interface Name The IP interface on the Switch that will be connected directly to the Server Enter the IP address of the DHCP
231. erity from the drop down menu a secondary tick must be made Secondary ticks are Emergency Alert Critical Error Warning Notice Informational and Debug To view all information in the log simply tick the All check box Module List When selecting Module List the module name must be manually entered Available modules are MSTP and ERROR_LOG Attack Log When selecting Attack Log all attacks will be listed A counter incremented whenever an entry to the Switch s history log is made The table displays the last entry highest sequence number first Display the time in days hours minutes and seconds since the Switch was last restarted Display the level of the log entry Log Text Display text describing the event that triggered the history log entry Click the Find button to display the log in the display section according to the selection made Click the Clear Log button to clear the entries from the log in the display section Click the Clear Attack Log button to clear the entries from the attack log in the display section System Log amp Trap Settings The Switch allows users to configure the system log source IP interface addresses here To view the following window click System Configuration gt System Log Configuration gt System Log amp Trap Settings as show below 17 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide System Log Source IP Interface Settings Trap Source IP Inte
232. erver IP Destination File source File Figure 12 8 Upload Firmware TFTP window SI Mode Only O Upload Firmware To TFTP Unit 1 Y TFTP Severi PM Po Pv Destination File Po Figure 12 9 Upload Firmware TFTP window El Mode Only 307 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Use the drop down menu to select a unit for uploading the firmware TFTP Server IP Enter the TFTP server IP address used Source File Enter the location and name of the Source File O OOS Click Upload to initiate the upload Download Configuration The following window is used to download the configuration file for the Switch Download Configuration From TFTP This page allows the user to download the configuration file from a TFTP Server to the Switch and updates the switch Download Configuration From TFTP Download Configuration From HTTP Unit 1 ml TFTPSeneriP SOS Destination File Po Figure 12 10 Download Configuration TFTP window SI Mode Only Download Configuration From TFTP Download Configuration From HTTP Unit 4 El TFTP SemeriP O AS Oe source File Destination File fo Figure 12 11 Download Configuration TFTP window El Mode Only The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Use the drop down
233. erver from which the SNTP information will be taken SNTP Poll Interval In The interval in seconds between requests for updated SNTP information Seconds 30 99999 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Time Zone Settings Users can configure time zones and Daylight Savings Time settings for SNTP To view this window click Network Application gt SNTP gt Time Zone Settings as shown below Daylight Saving Time State Disabled w Daylight Saving Time Offsetin Minutes 60 w Time Zone Offset From GMT in HH MM woo woo w DST Repeating Settings From Which Week ofthe Month From Day of the Week From Month From Time in HH MM To Which Week of the Month To Day of the Week To Month To Time in HH MM DST Annual Settings From Month From Day From Time in HH MM To Month To Day To Time in HH MM Apply Figure 9 10 Time Zone Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Daylight Saving Time Use this pull down menu to enable or disable the DST Settings State Daylight Saving Time Use this pull down menu to specify the amount of time that will constitute your local Offset In Minutes DST offset 30 60 90 or 120 minutes ime Zone Offset From Use these pull down menus to specify your local time zone s offset from Greenwich GMT In HH MM Mean Time GMT 276 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed
234. es Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Chapter5 L3 Features IPv4 Default Route Settings SI Mode Only IPv4 Static Default Route Settings El Mode Only IPv4 Route Table IPv6 Static Default Route Settings El Mode Only IP Forwarding Table IPv4 Default Route Settings Sl Mode Only Entries into the Switch s forwarding table can be made using both an IP address subnet mask and a gateway To view the following window click L3 Features gt IPv4 Default Route Settings as show below IPv4 Default Route Settings Gateway e g 172 18 211 10 Metric 1 65535 Total Sida 0 Meimask Gateway Interface Name Cos Protocal Figure 5 1 IPv4 Default Route Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Gateway This field allows the entry of a Gateway IP Address to be applied to the corresponding gateway of the IP address Represents the metric value of the IP interface entered into the table This field may read a number between 1 and 65535 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made IPv4 Static Default Route Settings El Mode Only The Switch supports static routing for IPv4 formatted addressing Users can create up to 512 static route entries for IPv4 For IPv4 static routes once a static route has been set the Switch will send an ARP request packet to the next hop router that has been set by the user Once an ARP response has been retrieved by the sw
235. est VLAN Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name Click the button and assign a VLAN as a Guest VLAN The VLAN must be an existing static VLAN VID 1 4094 Click the button and assign a VLAN ID for a Guest VLAN The VLAN must be an existing static VLAN before this VID can be configured Port List e g 1 6 9 The list of ports to be configured Alternatively tick the All Ports check box to set every port at once Use the drop down menu to choose the desired operation Create VLAN Add Ports or Delete Ports Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Once properly configured the Guest VLAN and associated ports will be listed in the lower part of the window Port Security Port Security Settings A given port s or a range of ports dynamic MAC address learning can be locked such that the current source MAC addresses entered into the MAC address forwarding table cannot be changed once the port lock is enabled The port can be locked by changing the Admin State pull down menu to Enabled and clicking Apply Port Security is a security feature that prevents unauthorized computers with source MAC addresses unknown to the Switch prior to locking the port or ports from connecting to the Switch s locked ports and gaining access to the network To view this window click Security gt Port Security gt Port Secur
236. estricted restricted restricted restricted CommunityWiew CommunityWiew subtree 1 36 1 2 1 1 13612111 13161631021 1361531121 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 1 1 3 6 1 6 3 View Type Included Included Included Included Included Included Excluded Apply Delete Delete Delete Delete Delete CommunityWiew 13616131 Included Delete Figure 3 36 SNMP View Table Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description View Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the new SNMP view being created Subtree OID Type the Object Identifier OID Subtree for the view The OID identifies an object tree MIB tree that will be included or excluded from access by an SNMP manager View Type Select Included to include this object in the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access Select Excluded to exclude this object from the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry SNMP Community Table Settings Users can create an SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and an agent The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the Switch One or more of the following characteristics can be associated with the community string e An Access List of IP addresses of SNMP m
237. et Rx sampling The configured rate value multiplied by 256 is the actual rate For example if the rate is 20 the actual rate 5120 One packet will be sampled from every 5120 packets If set to 0 the sampler is disabled If the rate is not specified its default value is O The sampling rate for packet Tx sampling The configured rate value multiplied by 256 is the actual rate For example if the rate is 20 the actual rate 5120 One packet will be sampled from every 5120 packets If set to 0 the sampler is disabled If the rate is not specified its default value is 0 MAX Header Size The maximum number of leading bytes in the packet which has been sampled that will 298 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide a be encapsulated and forwarded to the server If not specified the default value is 128 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry SFlow Counter Poller Settings On this page the user can configure the sFlow counter poller parameters If the user wants to change the analyzer server ID he needs to delete the counter poller and create a new one Unit From Port To Port Analyzer Server ID 1 4 Interval 20 120 Total Entries 0 Analyzer Server ID Polling Interval sec Figure 11 22 sFlow Counte
238. f malformed RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets which contained invalid authenticators received from this server PendingRequests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Accounting Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Accounting Response a timeout or a retransmission Timeouts The number of accounting timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as an Accounting Request as well as a timeout UnknownTypes The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the accounting port PacketsDropped The number of RADIUS packets which were received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason Click the Clear button to clear the current statistics shown IP MAC Port Binding IMPB El Mode Only The IP network layer uses a four byte address The Ethernet link layer uses a six byte MAC address Binding these two address types t
239. ffect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of methods like TACACS XTACACS Local Enable the Switch will send an authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group If no verification is found the Switch will send an authentication request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed XTACACS If no authentication takes place using the XTACACS list the Local Enable password set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user Successful authentication using any of these methods will give the user an Admin privilege y lt Q NOTE To set the Local Enable Password see the next section entitled Local Enable Password To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Enable method Lists Settings as shown below Method List Name Max 15 characters f Priority 4 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 Apply Total Entries 1 Method List Name Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 default Figure 8 63 Enable method Lists Settings window To delete an Enable Method List defined by the user click the Delete button corresponding to the entry desired to be deleted To modify an Enable Method List click on its corresponding Edit button The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Method Li
240. fic VLAN To view this window click Security gt Port Security gt Port Security VLAN Settings as shown below 2 VLAN Name fl VID List e 9 1 4 6 PS Max Learning Address 0 3072 SEEE No Limit Port Security VLAN Table Only VLANs with limitation are displayed VLAN Name Max Learning Address Figure 8 46 Port Security VLAN Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name Enter the VLAN Name VID List Specify a list of the VLAN be VLAN ID Max Learning Address Specify the maximum number of port security entries that can be learned by this VLAN Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Port Security Entries Users can remove an entry from the port security entries learned by the Switch and entered into the forwarding database To view this window click Security gt Port Security gt Port Security Entries as shown below 241 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Clear Port Security Entries By Port VLAN Name rt O VID List e g 1 4 6 3 Show All Clear All Total Entries O MAC Address Lock Mode Figure 8 47 Port Security Entries window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name The VLAN Name of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the Switch VID List The VLAN ID of the entry in
241. filed to the mask 172 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide After clicking the Add CPU ACL Profile button the following page will appear AOU LeU ALL Frome Profile 1D 1 5 Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL Tag ged 1Pv4 ACL IPv6 ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask MAC Address Ethemet Type MAC Address C Source MAC Mask o O Destination MAC Mask 802 1p Ethernet Type Figure 7 24 Add CPU ACL Profile Ethernet ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID 1 5 Enter a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 7 to 5 Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 address or packet content mask This will change the window according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header Source MAC Mask Enter a MAC address mask for the source MAC address Destination MAC Mask Enter a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address
242. follows 1 Create a user account with admin level access using the User Accounts window This is identical to creating any other admin level User Account on the Switch including specifying a password This password is used to logon to the Switch once a secure communication path has been established using the SSH protocol 2 Configure the User Account to use a specified authorization method to identify users that are allowed to establish SSH connections with the Switch using the SSH User Authentication Mode window There are three choices as to the method SSH will use to authorize the user which are Host Based Password and Public Key 3 Configure the encryption algorithm that SSH will use to encrypt and decrypt messages sent between the SSH client and the SSH server using the SSH Authentication Method and Algorithm Settings window 4 Finally enable SSH on the Switch using the SSH Configuration window After completing the preceding steps a SSH Client on a remote PC can be configured to manage the Switch using a secure in band connection SSH Settings Users can configure and view settings for the SSH server To view this window click Security gt SSH gt SSH Settings as shown below 261 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 55H Server State Enabled Disabled 55H Global Settings Max Session 1 8 Connection Timeout 120 600 sec Authfail Attempts 2 20 times Rekey Timeou
243. for this tag acquires the tagged packets and maps them to a class queue on the Switch Then in turn the administrator will set a priority for this queue so that will be emptied before any other packet is forwarded This result in the end user receiving all packets sent as quickly as possible thus prioritizing the queue and allowing for an uninterrupted stream of packets which optimizes the use of bandwidth available for the video conference Understanding QoS The Switch supports 802 1p priority queuing The Switch has eight priority queues These priority queues are numbered from 7 Class 7 the highest priority queue to O Class 0 the lowest priority queue The eight priority tags specified in IEEE 802 1p p0 to p7 are mapped to the Switch s priority queues as follows e Priority O is assigned to the Switch s Q2 queue e Priority 1 is assigned to the Switch s QO queue e Priority 2 is assigned to the Switch s Q1 queue e Priority 3 is assigned to the Switch s Q3 queue e Priority 4 is assigned to the Switch s Q4 queue e Priority 5 is assigned to the Switch s Q5 queue e Priority 6 is assigned to the Switch s Q6 queue e Priority 7 is assigned to the Switch s Q7 queue For strict priority based scheduling any packets residing in the higher priority classes of service are transmitted first Multiple strict priority classes of service are emptied based on their priority tags Only when these classes are empty are pac
244. forwarding multicast packets when there are no longer hosts requesting that they continue To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Settings as show below IGMP Snooping Global Settings IGMP Snooping State Enabled Disabled Apply IGMP Data Driven Learning Settings Max Learned Entry Value 1 1024 Apply Total Entries 1 ID VLAN Name Disabled Modify Router Port 11 EN CS Figure 4 40 IGMP Snooping Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IGMP Snooping State Here the user can enable or disable the IGMP Snooping state Max Learning Entry Here the user can enter the maximum learning entry value Value Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Edit button to configure the IGMP Snooping Parameters Settings Click the Modify Router Port link to configure the IGMP Snooping Router Port Settings After clicking the Edit button the following page will appear 95 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide VID VLAN Name default Rate Limit No Limitation Querier IP 0 0 0 0 Querier Expiry Time O secs Query Interval 1 65535 Max Response Time 1 25 sec Robustness Value 1 7 Last Member Query Interval 1 25 sec Data Driven Group Expiry Time 1 65535 Sec Querier State Disabled Fast Leave Disabled
245. g for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Replace DSCP 0 63 Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field When an ACL rule is added to change both the priority and DSCP of an IPv4 packet only one of them can be modified due to a chip limitation Currently the priority is changed when both the priority and DSCP are set to be modified Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch 192 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Counter Here the user can select the counter By checking the counter the administrator can see how many times that the rule was hit When a range of ports is to be configured the Auto Assign check box MUST be ticked in the Access ID field of this window If not the user will be presented with an error message and the access rule will not be configured Specify the VLAN ID to apply to the access rule Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button in the Access Rule List the following page will appear aress Access RUIE Vet MTO
246. ge number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist IGMP Snooping Static Group Settings Users can view the Switch s IGMP Snooping Group Table IGMP Snooping allows the Switch to read the Multicast Group IP address and the corresponding MAC address from IGMP packets that pass through the Switch To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Static Group Settings as show below 98 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 9 VLAN Name Max 32 characters VID List seg 1 3 5 IPv4 Address e g 224 1 1 1 View All Total Entries 1 VID VLAN Name IP Address otatic Member Port EEE ico Figure 4 44 IGMP Snooping Static Group Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name The VLAN Name of the multicast group VID List The VID List or of the multicast group IPv4 Address Enter the IPv4 address Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Create button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry based on the information entered Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate
247. ggled to Enabled the relay agent will check the validity of the packet s option 82 field If the switch receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP client the switch drops the packet because it is invalid In packets received from DHCP servers the relay agent will drop invalid messages Disabled When the field is toggled to Disabled the relay agent will not check the validity of the packet s option 82 field DHCP Relay Agent This field can be toggled between Replace Drop and Keep by using the pull down Information Option 82 menu It is used to set the Switches policy for handling packets when the DHCP Policy Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check is set to Disabled The default is Replace Replace The option 82 field will be replaced if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Drop The packet will be dropped if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Keep The option 82 field will be retained if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client DHCP Relay Agent Here the user can enter the DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Remote ID Information Option 82 Remote ID DHCP Relay Option 60 Here the user can enable or disable the use of the DHCP Relay Option 60 State State feature DHCP Relay Option 61 Here the user can enable or disable the use of the DHCP Relay Option 61 State State feature Cl
248. gone the election process and therefore both have a Primary Master and a Backup master a new Primary Master will be elected from one of the already existing Primary Masters based on priority or MAC address This Primary Master will take over all of the Primary Master s roles for all new switches that were hot inserted This process is done using discovery packets that circulate through the switch stack every 1 5 seconds until the discovery process has been completed The hot remove action means removing a device from the stack while the stack is still running The hot removal is detected by the stack when it fails to receive heartbeat packets during its specified interval from a device or when one of the stacking ports links is down Once the device has been removed the remaining switches will update their stacking topology database to reflect the change Any one of the three roles Primary Master Backup Master or Slave may be removed from the stack yet different processes occur for each specific device removal If a Slave device has been removed the Primary Master will inform other switches of the hot remove of this device through the use of unit leave messages Switches in the stack will clear the configurations of the unit removed and dynamically learned databases such as ARP will be cleared as well If the Backup Master has been hot removed a new Backup Master will be chosen through the election process previously described Switches
249. group The Switch has four built in Authentication Server Groups that cannot be removed but can be modified Up to eight authentication server hosts may be added to any particular group To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Server Group Settings as shown below server Group List Edit Server Group Group Name Max 15 characters Group Name Figure 8 59 Authentication Server Group Settings Server Group List window This window displays the Authentication Server Groups on the Switch The Switch has four built in Authentication Server Groups that cannot be removed but can be modified To add a new Server Group enter a name in the Group Name field and then click the Add button To modify a particular group click the Edit button or the Edit Server Group tab which will then display the following Edit Server Group tab 293 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide server Group List Edit Server Group Group Name Max 15 characters Server Host IP Address Protocol TACACS Add Host List IP Address Protocol Figure 8 60 Authentication Server Group Settings Edit Server Group window To add an Authentication Server Host to the list enter its name in the Group Name field IP address in the IP Address field use the drop down menu to choose the Protocol associated with the IP address of the Authentication Server Host and then c
250. gs as show below Asymmetric VLAN State Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 10 Asymmetric VLAN Settings window Click Apply to implement changes GVRP GVRP Global Settings Users can determine whether the Switch will share its VLAN configuration information with other GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP enabled switches In addition Ingress Checking can be used to limit traffic by filtering incoming packets whose PVID does not match the PVID of the port Results can be seen in the table under the configuration settings To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt GVRP gt GVRP Global Settings as show below 69 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide GVRP Global Settings GVRP State OEnabled Disabled GVRP Timer Settings Join Time 100 100000 Leave Time 100 100000 Leave All Time 100 100000 ms Note Leave Time should be greater than 2 Join Time Leave All Time should be greater than Leave Time Figure 4 11 GVRP Global Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description GVRP State Click the radio buttons to enable or disable the GVRP State Enter the Join Time value in milliseconds Enter the Leave Time value in milliseconds Leave All Time Enter the Leave All Time value in milliseconds Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section NOTE The Leave Time
251. gs window The fields that can be configured are described below 295 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parameter Description RSPAN State Click the radio buttons to enable or disable the RSPAN feature VLAN Name Create the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name VID Create the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Modify button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry After clicking the Modify button the following page will appear a i ATT RSPAN Settings Table VID 1 VLAN Name default Source Ports e g 1 1 1 4 Source V RX w Add Delete O Redirect Port List fe Add Delete Figure 11 18 RSPAN Settings Modify window The fields that can be configured are described below Displays the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID VLAN Name Displays the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name Parameter Description Source Ports If the ports are not specified by option the source of RSPAN will come from the source specified by the mirror command or the flow based source specified by an ACL If no parameter is specified for source it deletes the configured source parameters Select RX TX or Both to specify in which direction the packets will be monitored Tick Add or Delete to add or delete source ports Redirect Port List Specify
252. h Upload Configuration To TFTP This page allows the user to upload the configuration file from the Switch to a TFTP Server 309 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Upload Configuration To TFTP Upload Configuration To HTTP Unit TFTP Server IP Pp Destination File Po Filter e g samp wlan stp Filter Include e g samp van stp Filter Include e g samp vian stp Figure 12 13 Upload Configuration TFTP window SI Mode Only Upload Configuration To TFTP Upload Configuration To HTTP Unit a w TFTP SeverP O lt lt O O Destination File Po Filter in clu de w e g snmp vlan stp Filter Include e g snmp vlan stp Filter maue O E e a snmp wlan stp Figure 12 14 Upload Configuration TFTP window El Mode Only The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Umit Use the drop down menu to select a unit for uploading the configuration file TFTP Server IP Enter the TFTP server IP address used IPv4 El Mode Only Click the radio button to enter the TFTP server IP address used IPv6 El Mode Only Click the radio button to enter the TFTP server IPv6 address used Destination File Enter the location and name of the Destination File Source Fie Enter the location and name of the Source File w Use the drop down menu to include begin or exclude a filter like SNMP VLAN or STP
253. h from remote stations anywhere on the network through a standard browser The browser acts as a universal access tool and can communicate directly with the Switch using the HTTP protocol The Web based management module and the Console program and Telnet are different ways to access the same internal switching software and configure it Thus all settings encountered in web based management are the same as those found in the console program Login to the Web Manager To begin managing the Switch simply run the browser installed on your computer and point it to the IP address you have defined for the device The URL in the address bar should read something like http 123 123 123 123 where the numbers 123 represent the IP address of the Switch Lu Q NOTE The factory default IP address is 10 90 90 90 This opens the management module s user authentication window as seen below Connect to 10 90 90 90 The server 10 90 90 90 at Welcome requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection Remember my password Figure 1 1 Enter Network Password window Leave both the User Name field and the Password field blank and click OK This will open the Web based user interface The Switch management features available in the web based manager are explained below xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable
254. hNoPriv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with a NoAuth NoPriv 55 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide security level AuthNoPriv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with an Auth NoPriv security level AuthPriv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with an Auth Priv security level Community String Type in the community string or SNMP V3 user name as appropriate SNMP V3 User Name Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry SNMPv6 Host Table Settings El Mode Only Users can set up SNMP trap recipients for IPv6 To view the following window click Management gt SNMP Settings gt SNMPv6 Host Table Settings as show below Add Host Table Host IPv6 Address fs User based Security Model SNMPv1 hd Security Level NoAuthNoPriv Community String SNMPv3 User Name Apply Total Entries 0 Host IPv6 Address User based Security Model Security Level Community Name SNMPv3 User Name 3 42 SNMPv6 Host Table Settings The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Host IPv6 Address Type the IPv6 address of the remote management station that will serve as the SNMP host for the Switch User based Security SNMPv1 Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used Model SNMPv2 Specifies that SNMP version 2 will be used S
255. hanges made SSH User Authentication List Users can configure parameters for users attempting to access the Switch through SSH In the window above the User Account username has been previously set using the User Accounts window in the Configuration folder A User Account MUST be set in order to set the parameters for the SSH user To view this window click Security gt SSH gt SSH User Authentication List as shown below Authentication Method Host Name Host IP Note Maximum 8 entries and Host Name should be less than 33 characters Figure 8 68 SSH User Authentication List window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description A name of no more than 15 characters to identify the SSH user This User Name must be a previously configured user account on the Switch Authentication Method The administrator may choose one of the following to set the authorization for users attempting to access the Switch Host Based This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a 264 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide remote SSH server for authentication purposes Choosing this parameter requires the user to input the following information to identify the SSH user Password This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use an administrator defined password for authentication Upon entry of this parameter the Switch
256. hat will be the limit for the selected port The user may choose a rate between 64 and 1024000 Kbits per second Effective RX If a RADIUS server has assigned the RX bandwidth then it will be the effective RX bandwidth The authentication with the RADIUS sever can be per port or per user For per user authentication there may be multiple RX bandwidths assigned if there are multiple users attached to this specific port The final RX bandwidth will be the largest one among these multiple RX bandwidths Effective TX If a RADIUS server has assigned the TX bandwidth then it will be the effective TX bandwidth The authentication with the RADIUS sever can be per port or per user For per user authentication there may be multiple TX bandwidths assigned if there are multiple users attached to this specific port The final TX bandwidth will be the largest one among these multiple TX bandwidths 143 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Queue Bandwidth Control Settings To view this window click QoS gt Bandwidth Control gt Queue Bandwidth Control Settings as shown below To view the following window click QoS gt Bandwidth Control gt Queue Bandwidth Control Settings as show below Unit From Port To Port From Queue To Queue Min Rate 64 1024000 Max Rate 64 1024000 Queue Bandwidth Control Table On Port 1 Queue Min Rate Kbit sec Max Rate K
257. he DSCP value Replace ToS Precedence Here the user can enter the ToS Precedence value Use the drop down menu to select and enter the information that this rule will be applied to Ports Enter a port number or a port range VLAN Name Enter a VLAN name VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID Group ID El Mode Only Enter a port group ID This selection appears only when Egress is selected in the Type drop down menu Group Name El Mode Only Enter a port group name This selection appears only when Egress is selected in the Type drop down menu Click the Apply button to accept the changes made bits may also be masked at the same time To optimize the ACL profile and rules please use NOTE The Switch will use one minimum mask to cover all the terms that user input however some extra manual configuration Access Profile List Access profiles allow you to establish criteria to determine whether the Switch will forward packets based on the information contained in each packet s header To view Access Profile List window click ACL gt Access Profile List as shown below The Switch supports four Profile Types Ethernet ACL IPv4 ACL IPv6 ACL and Packet Content ACL Creating an access profile is divided into two basic parts The first is to specify which part or parts of a frame the Switch will examine such as the MAC source address or the IP destination address The second part is entering the criteria the Switch w
258. he Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the View All button to display all the existing entries MLD Snooping Counter This page displays the statistics counter for MLD protocol packets that are received by the switch since MLD Snooping is enabled To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Counter as show below VILL SNMOODING COUNT VLAN Name VID List e g 1 4 6 Port List e g 1 1 1 3 1 5 Total Entries 1 1 20 Packet Statistics Figure 4 60 MLD Snooping Counter window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name Specify a VLAN name to be displayed VID List Specify a list of VLANs to be displayed Port List Specify a list of ports to be displayed Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Packet Statistics link to view the MLD Snooping Counter Settings for the specific entry After clicking the Packet Statistics link the following page will appear 110 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide MLD Snooping Counter Table Clear Counter Port 1 20 Group Number 0 Receive Statistics MLD v1 Report MLD v2 Report MLD v1 Done Total Dropped By Multicast VLAN Dropped By Rate Limitation
259. he SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked This field will require the user to enter a password Priv Protocol None Specify that no authorization protocol is in use DES Specify that DES 56 bit encryption is in use based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard This field is only operable when V3 is selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked This field will require the user to enter a password Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry SNMP Host Table Settings Users can set up SNMP trap recipients for IPv4 To view the following window click Management gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Host Table Settings as show below Add Host Table Host IF Address User based Security Model SNMPv1 Security Level NoAuthNoPriv Community String SNMPv3 User Name fe Apply Total Entries 0 Host IF Address User based Security Model security Level Community NWame SNMPv3 User Name Figure 3 41 SNMP Host Table Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Host IP Address Type the IP address of the remote management station that will serve as the SNMP host for the Switch User based Security SNMPv1 Specify that SNMP version 1 will be used Model SNMPv2 Specify that SNMP version 2 will be used SNMPv3 Specify that SNMP version 3 will be used Security Level NoAut
260. he fields that are about the System Interface Parameter Description Interface Name Display the System interface name Management VLAN Name This allows the entry of a VLAN name from which a management station will be allowed to manage the Switch using TCP IP in band via Web manager or Telnet Management stations that are on VLANs other than the one entered here will not be able to manage the Switch in band unless their IP addresses are entered in the Trusted Host window Security gt Trusted Host If VLANs have not yet been configured for the Switch the default VLAN contains all of the Switch s ports There are no entries in the Trusted Host table by default so any management station that can connect to the Switch can access the Switch until a management VLAN is specified or Management Station IP addresses are assigned Interface Admin State Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the configuration on this interface If the state is disabled the IP interface cannot be accessed IP Address This field allows the entry of an IPv4 address to be assigned to this IP interface A Bitmask that determines the extent of the subnet that the Switch is on Should be of the form xxx xxx xxx xxx where each xxx is a number represented in decimal between 0 and 255 The value should be 255 0 0 0 for a Class A network 255 255 0 0 for a Class B network and 255 255 255 0 for a Class C network but custom subnet masks are allowed IP a
261. he multicast packets whose destination is an unregistered multicast group will be forwarded within the range of ports specified above Filter Unregistered Groups The multicast packets whose destination is a registered multicast group will be forwarded within the range of ports specified above Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist 124 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide LLDP LLDP Global Settings On this page the user can configure the LLDP global parameters To view the following window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Global Settings as show below LLUF al0Dal senings LLDP State O Enabled Disabled LLDP Forward Message O Enabled Disabled Message TX Interval 5 32768 Message TX Hold Multiplier 2 10 LLDP Relnit Delay 1 10 LLDP TX Delay 1 8192 LLOP Notification Interval 5 3600 LLDP System Information Chassis ID Subtype Chassis ID System Name System Description System Capabilities sec MAC Address 00 01 02 03 04 00 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Repeater Bridge Apply Figure 4 81 LLDP Global Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description LLDP State Click the radio buttons to enable or disabl
262. his profile set This value can be set from 7 to 5 176 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 address or packet content mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header 802 1Q VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding IPv4 DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding Source IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the source IP address e g 255 255 255 255 Destination IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the destination IP address e g 255 255 255 255 Protocol Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the protocol type value in each frame s header You must then specify what protocol s to include according to the following guidelines Select CMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet
263. his session will be lost Figure 12 20 Reboot System Window Selecting the Yes radio button will instruct the Switch to save the current configuration to non volatile RAM before restarting the Switch Selecting the No radio button instructs the Switch not to save the current configuration before restarting the Switch All of the configuration information entered from the last time Save Changes was executed will be lost Click the Reboot button to restart the Switch Reboot 5ystem Warning System is currently rebooting om Figure 12 21 System Rebooting window 313 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 314 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Appendix A Mitigating ARP Spoofing Attacks Using Packet Content ACL How Address Resolution Protocol works Address Resolution Protocol ARP is the standard Sender method for finding a host s hardware address MAC ias address when only its IP address is known A A However this protocol is vulnerable because a crackers can spoof the IP and MAC information in the 00 20 5C 01 33 33 00 20 5C 01 11 11 ARP packets to attack a LAN known as ARP 0 20 10 5 10 10 10 1 spoofing This document is intended to introduce the ARP protocol ARP spoofing attacks and the countermeasures brought by D Link s switches to thwart ARP spoofing attacks pen SS rm pa t Port 4 Port 2
264. hs for network traffic and ensure that redundant paths are disabled when the main paths are operational and enabled if the main paths fail The port in a resilient link that will take over data transmission if the main port in the link fails A device which filters forwards and floods packets based on the packet s destination address The switch learns the addresses associated with each switch port and builds tables based on this information to be used for the switching decision A layered set of communications protocols providing Telnet terminal emulation FTP file transfer and other services for communication among a wide range of computer equipment A TCP IP application protocol that provides virtual terminal service letting a user log in to another computer system and access a host as if the user were connected directly to the host Allows the user to transfer files such as software upgrades from a remote device using your switch s local management capabilities An Internet standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another device A group of location and topology independent devices that communicate as if they are on a common physical LAN A Switch to Switch link which carries traffic for all the VLANs on each Switch A type of terminal that uses ASCII characters VT100 screens have a text based appearance 326
265. hunk19 Chunk20 Chunk21 Chunk22 gt Chunk23 Chunk24 Chunk25 Chunk26 Chunk27 Chunk28 Chunk29 Chunk30 Chunk31 oo or fr 70 co 07 09 os oe 100 007 n nsn 120 Pee ee 72 70 60 or 68 02 90 500 100 108 152 v6 120 120 Tes se re rr or 5 09 99 97 tor 105 100 100 107 ver 125 Pf ee v0 re re oe 66 20 oe oe 502 106 100 150 108 122 a8 Table 6 Chunk and Packet Offset The following table indicates a completed ARP packet contained in Ethernet frame which is the pattern for the calculation of packet offset man a niii Ethernet Header Header Gratuitous ARP Parle Protocol Target paa sh ei Address co as Length 6 bytes 6 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 01 02 0806 Qa5a5a5a 03 04 10 90 90 90 05 06 Table 5 A Completed ARP Packet Contained in an Ethernet Frame Command Description create access_profile_id 1 Create access profile 1 to match Ethernet Type and profile_name 1 ethernet source_mac Source MAC address FF FF FF FF FF FF ethernet_type config access_profile profile_id 1 Configure access profile 1 add access_id 1 ethernet source mac Only if the gateway s ARP packet that contains the 01 02 03 04 05 06 ethernet_type 319 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 0x806 port 1 12 permit correct Source MAC in the Ethernet frame can pa
266. ibed below Parameter Description IT Select the unit to be displayed From Port To Port Select a port or range of ports to be displayed MAC Address Tick the check box and enter the MAC address of the Switch connected to the corresponding port if any Click the Apply button to accept the changes made NOTE The Initialize Port s cannot be viewed on the Switch unless 802 1X is enabled by port or by MAC address To enable 802 1X go to Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Global Settings and select Port based or Mac based from the Authentication Mode drop down menu Reauthenticate Port s This window displays reauthentication of a port or group of ports To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt Reauthenticate Port s as shown below Unit 1 From Port 01 ToPot o1 J MAC Address PAE State Backend State Status Priority Figure 8 20 Reauthenticate Port s window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Unit Select the unit to be displayed From Port To Port Select a port or range of ports to be displayed Click the Apply button to see the current status of the reauthenticated port s e NOTE The Reauthenticate Port s cannot be viewed on the Switch unless 802 1X is enabled by port or by MAC address To enable 802 1X go to Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Global Settings and select Port based or Mac based from the Authentication Mode drop d
267. ick the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section 2 0 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide NOTE If the Switch receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP client and the information checking feature is enabled the Switch drops the packet because it is invalid However in some instances users may configure a client with the option 82 field In this situation disable the information check feature so that the Switch does not remove the option 82 field from the packet Users may configure the action that the Switch takes when it receives a packet with existing option 82 information by configuring the DHCP Agent Information Option 82 Policy The Implementation of DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 The DHCP Relay Option 82 command configures the DHCP relay agent information option 82 setting of the Switch The formats for the circuit ID sub option and the remote ID sub option are as follows Circuit ID sub option format NOTE For the circuit ID sub option of a standalone switch the module field is always zero 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Figure 9 2 Circuit ID Sub option Format Sub option type Length Circuit 1D type Length VLAN The incoming VLAN ID of DHCP client packet Module For a standalone switch the Module is always 0 for a stackable switch the Module is the Unit ID Port The incoming port numb
268. ick the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Click the Modify button to re configure the specific entry Click the View button to display the information of the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry After clicking the Add or Modify button the following page will appear je A H ONN q 5 li C L a ry Profile ID 1 256 Profile Name Access ID 1 512 Rate Kbps o 1048578 Burst Size Kbyte 0 131072 Drop Packet Remark DSCP sd 63 CIR Kbps Po 0 1048576 ae pee eee 0 1048576 CBS Kbyte si 0 131072 PBS Kbyte sf co 131072 5 Rate Rate Exceeded CIR Kbps si c 1048578 srTCM CBS Kbyte EA TCM Color Color Blind Color Aware Replace DSCP seo Conform Counter Replace DSCP J oea Counter Replace DSCP sd 63 Counter Exceed Permit Violate Permit Figure 7 64 Egress ACL Flow Meter Configuration window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description 202 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile ID Here the user can enter the Profile ID for the flow meter Profile Name Here the user can enter the Profile Name for the flow meter Here the user can enter the Access ID for the flow meter Rate Specify the rate for single rate two color mode Rate Specify the committed bandwidth in Kbps for the flow Burst Size Specify th
269. ide MAC based Access Control Global Settings MAC based Access Control State OEnabled Disabled Method Password RADIUS Authorization Local Authorization Enabled Trap State Log State Enabled Max User 1 1000 MIN Limit Guest VLAN Settings VLAN Name ol VID 1 4094 a o o MemberPons eg 111519 Port Settings Unit From Port To Port State Mode Aging Time 1 1440 Block Time 0 300 Max User 1 1000 Hostbased 1440 min LJ Infinite 300 ee L_ No Limit Apply Aging Time min 1 Host based a Disabled Hostbased Disabled Host based Disabled Hostbased Host based Host based Host based Host based Host based Host based Host based o Host based Uart harmad Figure 8 32 MAC based Access Control Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description MAC based Access Toggle to globally enable or disable the MAC based access control function on the Control State Switch Use this drop down menu to choose the type of authentication to be used when authentication MAC addresses on a given port The user may choose between the following methods Local Use this method to utilize the locally set MAC address database as the authenticator for MAC based access control This MAC address list can be configured in the MAC based access control Local Database Settings window RADIUS Use this method to utilize a remote RADIUS server as the authenticator for MAC based
270. ient Figure 8 5 The Client xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Authentication Process Utilizing the three roles stated above the 802 1X protocol 02 1X Authentication process provides a stable and secure way of authorizing and sales authenticating users attempting to access the network poa dais Authentication Server Only EAPOL traffic is allowed to pass through the or erme mf specified port before a successful authentication is made I This port is locked until the point when a Client with the EAPOL Start correct username and password and MAC address if A EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request 802 1X is enabled by MAC address is granted access ae OE and therefore successfully unlocks the port Once Wa AA unlocked normal traffic is allowed to pass through the EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept port The following figure displays a more detailed talas explanation of how the authentication process Is EAPOL Logoff RADIUS Account Stop completed between the three roles stated above Po A Port Unauthorized OTP One Time Password Figure 8 6 The 802 1X Authentication Process The D Link implementation of 802 1X allows network administrators to choose between two types of Access Control used on the Switch which are 1 Port Based Access Control This method requires only one user to be authenticated per port by a remote RADIUS server to allow the remain
271. ifferent physical networks B will not receive ARP broadcast requests from A and therefore cannot respond Yet if the physical network of A is connected by a router or layer 3 switch to B the router or Layer 3 switch will see the ARP request from A This local proxy ARP function allows the Switch to respond to the proxy ARP if the source IP and destination IP are in the same interface To view the following window click Management gt ARP gt Proxy ARP Settings as show below Proxy ARP State Local Proxy ARP State Figure 3 2 Proxy ARP Settings window Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry and select the proxy ARP state of the IP interface By default both the Proxy ARP State and Local Proxy ARP State are disabled ARP Table Users can display current ARP entries on the Switch To view the following window click Management gt ARP gt ARP Table as show below Total Entries 4 Interface Name IP Address MAC Address 10 0 0 0 FF FF FF FF FF FF 10 90 90 1 00 0C 6E 44 B9 C0 Dynamic 10 90 90 90 00 01 02 03 04 00 Local System 10 255 255 255 FF FF FF FF FF FF Local Broadcast EEN le Figure 3 3 ARP Table window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Interface Name Enter or view the Interface name used 2 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IP Address Enter or view the IP Address used MAC Address Enter or
272. ific entry based on the information entered Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry selected Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist ACL Flow Meter Before configuring the ACL Flow Meter here is a list of acronyms and terms users will need to Know trTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker This along with the srTCM are two methods available on the switch for metering and marking packet flow The trT CM meters and IP flow and marks it as a color based on the flow s surpassing of two rates the CIR and the PIR CIR Committed Information Rate Common to both the trT CM and the srTCM the CIR is measured in bytes of IP packets IP packet bytes are measured by taking the size of the IP header but not the link specific headers For the 186 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide trT CM the packet flow is marked green if it doesn t exceed the CIR and yellow if it does The configured rate of the CIR must not exceed that of the PIR The CIR can also be configured for unexpected packet bursts using the CBS and PBS fields CBS Committed Burst Size Measured in bytes the CBS is associated with the CIR and Is used to identify packets that exceed the normal boundaries of packet size The CBS should be configured to accept the biggest IP packet that is expected in the IP flow PIR Peak Information Rate This rate is measured
273. ighbor IPv6 Address Link Layer MAC Address Interface Name State Total Entries 0 Neighbor Link Layer Address Interface Name Figure 3 6 IPv6 Neighbor Settings The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Interface Name Enter the interface name of the IPv6 neighbor Neighbor IPv6 Address Enter the neighbor IPv6 address Link Layer MAC Address Enter the link layer MAC address Interface Name Enter the name of the IPv6 neighbor Tick the All check box to search for all current interfaces on the Switch Use the drop down menu to select All Address Static or Dynamic When the user selects address from the drop down menu the user will be able to enter an IP address in the space provided next to the state option Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Clear button to clear all the information entered in the fields IP Interface System IP Address Settings The IP address may initially be set using the console interface prior to connecting to it through the Ethernet The Web manager will display the Switch s current IP settings Se NOTE The Switch s factory default IP address is 10 90 90 90 with a subnet mask of 255 0 0 0 and a default gateway of 0 0 0 0 To view the following window click Management gt IP Interface gt System IP Address Settings as show
274. igure From Port Use the drop down menu to select a beginning port number 245 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Use the drop down menu to select an ending port number State Use the drop down menu to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Traffic Segmentation Settings Traffic segmentation is used to limit traffic flow from a single or group of ports to a group of ports This method of segmenting the flow of traffic is similar to using VLANs to limit traffic but is more restrictive It provides a method of directing traffic that does not increase the overhead of the master switch CPU To view this window click Security gt Traffic Segmentation Settings as shown below Traffic Segmentation Settings Unit From Port D To Port Unit 1 ka Forward Port List Forts Unit Forward Fort List Figure 8 51 Traffic Segmentation Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Umit Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port Here the user can select the ports to be included in the traffic segmentation setup Forward Port List Here the user can select the ports to be included in the traffic segmentation setup by simply ticking the corresponding port s tick box Click the Clear All button to un select all the ports for the configuration
275. ill use to determine what to do with the frame The entire process is described below in two parts Users can display the currently configured Access Profiles on the Switch 154 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Add ACL Profile Total User Set Rule Entries Total Used HW Entries Total Available HW Entries 1 2 1534 Profile ID Profile Name Profile Type EthernetACL Ethernet Add View Rules IPVBACL IPv6 Add View Rules PCACL Packet Content Add View Rules Figure 7 2 Access Profile List window Click the Add ACL Profile button to add an entry to the Access Profile List Click the Delete All button to remove all access profiles from this table Click the Show Details button to display the information of the specific profile ID entry Click the Add View Rules button to view or add ACL rules within the specified profile ID Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist There are four Add Access Profile windows e one for Ethernet or MAC address based profile configuration e one for IPv6 address based profile configuration e one for IPv4 address based profile configuration and e one for packet content profile configuration Add an Ethernet ACL Profile The window shown below is the Add ACL Profile window for Ethernet To use specific filtering masks in this ACL profile click
276. ing users on the same port access to the network 2 Host Based Access Control Using this method the Switch will automatically learn up to a maximum of 448 MAC addresses by port and set them in a list Each MAC address must be authenticated by the Switch using a remote RADIUS server before being allowed access to the Network Understanding 802 1X Port based and Host based Network Access Control The original intent behind the development of 802 1X was to leverage the characteristics of point to point in LANs As any single LAN segment in such infrastructures has no more than two devices attached to it one of which is a Bridge Port The Bridge Port detects events that indicate the attachment of an active device at the remote end of the link or an active device becoming inactive These events can be used to control the authorization state of the Port and initiate the process of authenticating the attached device if the Port is unauthorized This is the Port Based Network Access Control Port Based Network Access Control Once the connected device has successfully been authenticated the Port then becomes Authorized and all subsequent traffic on the Port is not subject to access control restriction until an event occurs that causes the Port to become Unauthorized Hence if the Port is actually connected to a shared media LAN segment with more than one attached device successfully authenticating one of the attached devices effectively provide
277. ion 60 the relay servers will be determined by the default relay server setting Max 255 characters Server IP fo e g 10 90 90 90 Match Type ExactMatch Add IP Address Find J _ Delete Show All Delete All Total Entries 1 Match Type IP Address 192 168 69 124 Figure 9 6 DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Enter the DHCP Relay Option 60 String value Different strings can be specified for the same relay server and the same string can be specified with multiple relay servers The system will relay the packet to all the matching servers Here the user can enter the DHCP Relay Option 60 Server IP address Match Type Here the user can enter the DHCP Relay Option 60 Match Type value Exact Match The option 60 string in the packet must full match with the specified string Partial Match The option 60 string in the packet only need partial match with the specified string IP Address Enter the DHCP Relay Option 60 IP address Sting Enter the DHCP Relay Option 60 String value Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry based on the information entered Click the Show All button to display all the existing entries Click the Delete All button to remove al
278. iously configured by the administrator of the Switch Enable Admin Users who have logged on to the Switch on the normal user level and wish to be promoted to the administrator level can use this window After logging on to the Switch users will have only user level privileges To gain access to administrator level privileges the user will open this window and will have to enter an authentication password Possible authentication methods for this function include TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS user defined server groups local enable local account on the Switch or no authentication none Because XTACACS and TACACS do not support the enable function the user must create a special account on the server host which has the username NOTE TACACS XTACACS and TACACS are separate entities and are not compatible The Switch and the server must be configured exactly the same using the same protocol For example if the Switch is set up for TACACS authentication so must be the host server 250 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide enable and a password configured by the administrator that will support the enable function This function becomes inoperable when the authentication policy is disabled To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Enable Admin as shown below Enable Admin Click Enable Admin button will let user input the new password to upgrade
279. iption Umit Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port Select a range of ports you wish to configure QuietPeriod This allows the user to set the number of seconds that the Switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange with the client The default setting is 60 seconds SuppTimeout This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the client The default setting is 30 seconds It is defined in SuppTimeout IEEE 802 1X 2001 page 47 The initialization value is used for the awhile timer when timing out the Supplicant lts default value is 30 seconds however if the type of challenge involved in the current exchange demands a different value of timeout for example if the challenge requires an action on the part of the user then the timeout value is adjusted accordingly It can be set by management to any value in the range from 1 to 65535 seconds ServerTimeout This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the authentication server The default setting is 30 seconds The maximum number of times that the Switch will retransmit an EAP Request to the client before it times out of the authentication sessions The default setting is 2 It is defined in MaxReq IEEE 802 1X 2001 page 47 The maximum number of times that the 209 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide state
280. istening ports are the only ones to receive multicast group data MLD Control Messages Three types of messages are transferred between devices using MLD snooping These three messages are all defined by four ICMPv6 packet headers labeled 130 131 132 and 143 1 Multicast Listener Query Similar to the IGMPv2 Host Membership Query for IPv4 and labeled as 130 in the ICMPv6 packet header this message is sent by the router to ask if any link is requesting multicast data There are two types of MLD query messages emitted by the router The General Query is used to advertise all multicast addresses that are ready to send multicast data to all listening ports and the Multicast Specific query which advertises a specific multicast address that is also ready These two types of messages are distinguished by a multicast destination address located in the IPv6 header and a multicast address in the Multicast Listener Query Message 2 Multicast Listener Report Version 1 Comparable to the Host Membership Report in IGMPv2 and labeled as 131 in the ICMP packet header this message is sent by the listening port to the Switch stating that it is interested in receiving multicast data from a multicast address in response to the Multicast Listener Query message 3 Multicast Listener Done Akin to the Leave Group Message in IGMPv2 and labeled as 132 in the ICMPv6 packet header this message is sent by the multicast listening port stating that it is
281. itch Web Ul Reference Guide Priority Use the drop down menu to select a Priority value This appears when selecting DSCP Priority in the DSCP Map drop down menu DSCP Enter a DSCP value This appears when selecting DSCP Priority in the DSCP DSCP drop down menu Click the Apply button to accept the changes made HOL Blocking Prevention HOL Head of Line Blocking happens when one of the destination ports of a broadcast or multicast packet are busy The switch will hold this packet in the buffer while the other destination port will not transmit the packet even they are not busy The HOL Blocking Prevention will ignore the busy port and forward the packet directly to have lower latency and better performance On this page the user can enable or disable HOL Blocking Prevention To view the following window click QoS gt HOL Blocking Prevention as show below HOL Blocking Prevention Global Settings HOL Blocking Prevention State Enabled Disabled Figure 6 10 HOL blocking Prevention window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description HOL Blocking Prevention Click the radio buttons to enable of disable the HOL blocking prevention global State settings Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Scheduling Settings QoS Scheduling This window allows the user to configure the way the Switch will map an incoming packet per port based on its 802 1p user priority t
282. itch from that next hop the route becomes enabled However if the ARP entry already exists an ARP response will not be sent The Switch also supports a floating static route which means that the user may create an alternative static route to a different next hop This secondary next hop device route is considered as a backup static route for when the primary static route is down If the primary route is lost the backup route will uplink and its status will become Active Entries into the Switch s forwarding table can be made using both an IP address subnet mask and a gateway To view the following window click L3 Features gt IPv4 Static Default Route Settings as show below 135 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IPv4 Static Default Route Settings IP Address M Defaut Netmask e92 255 255 255 254 or 0 32 Gateway ste 9 172 18 211 10 Metric 1 65535 f Backup State Primary 44 IP Address Metmask Gateway Protocol Backup Figure 5 2 IPv4 Static Default Route Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IP Address This field allows the entry of an IPv4 address to be assigned to the Static or Default route This field allows the entry of a subnet mask to be applied to the corresponding subnet mask of the IP address Gateway This field allows the entry of a Gateway IP Address to be applied to the corresponding gateway of the I
283. itch s management mode Below is a list of the main folders available in the Web interface System Configuration In this section the user will be able to configure features regarding the Switch s configuration Management In this section the user will be able to configure features regarding the Switch s management L2 Features In this section the user will be able to configure features regarding the Layer 2 functionality of the Switch L3 Features In this section the user will be able to configure features regarding the Layer 3 functionality of the Switch QoS In this section the user will be able to configure features regarding the Quality of Service functionality of the Switch ACL In this section the user will be able to configure features regarding the Access Control List functionality of the Switch Security In this section the user will be able to configure features regarding the Switch s security Network Application In this section the user will be able to configure features regarding network applications handled by the Switch OAM In this section the user will be able to configure features regarding the Switch s operations administration and maintenance OAM Monitoring In this section the user will be able to monitor the Switch s configuration and statistics y NOTE Be sure to configure the user name and password in the User Accounts menu before connecting the Switch to the greater network xSt
284. ithms used for authentication encryption There are three categories of algorithms listed and specific algorithms of each may be enabled or disabled by ticking their corresponding check boxes All algorithms are enabled by default To view this window click Security gt SSH gt SSH Authentication method and Algorithm Settings as shown below 262 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 55H Authentication Mode Settings Password Public Key 4 Hostbased Encryption Algorithm 4 3DES CBC J AES128 CBC J AES192 CBC 4 AES256 CBC J Cast128 CBC 4 ARCA J Blow fish CBCc Twofish128 J Twofish192 J Twofish256 Data Integrity Algorithm J HMAC MD5 v HMAC SHA1 Public Key Algorithm v HMAC RSA J HMAC DSA Figure 8 67 SSH Authentication Method and Algorithm Settings window The fields that can be configured for SSH Authentication Mode are described below Parameter Description Password This may be enabled or disabled to choose if the administrator wishes to use a locally configured password for authentication on the Switch This parameter is enabled by default Public Key This may be enabled or disabled to choose if the administrator wishes to use a public key configuration set on a SSH server for authentication This parameter is enabled by default Host based This may be enabled or disabled to choose if the administrator wishes to use a host computer for authentication This paramet
285. ity Settings as shown below 239 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Port Security Trap Log Settings Port Security System Settings system Maximum Address 1 3072 Unit From Port To Port Port Security Port Table fe moo a m om amp Ww ha Admin State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled PieahicdA O Enabled Co MN Limit Lock Address Mode Delete on Reset Lock Address Mode DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset MNealntaMin Dac at Max Learning Address Apply Apply Max Learning Address 0 3072 Apply View Details Edit ps ad aa Edi T masr Maki Figure 8 44 Port Security Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Port Security Trap Log Use the radio button to enable or disable Port Security Traps and Logs on the Switch Settings System Max Address Unit Select the unit you want to configure From Port The beginning port of a consecutive group of ports to be configured Admin State Use the pull down menu to enable or disable Port Security
286. ity of storm control on a GE port is 1pps 147 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide DSCP DSCP Trust Settings This page is to configure the DSCP trust state of ports When ports are under the DSCP trust mode the switch will insert the priority tag to untagged packets by using the DSCP Map settings instead of the default port priority To view the following window click QoS gt DSCP gt DSCP Trust Settings as show below From Port tt Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 6 7 DSCP Trust Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IT Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port Use the drop down menu to select a range of port to configure State Enable disable to trust DSCP By default DSCP trust is disabled Click the Apply button to accept the changes made DSCP Map Settings The mapping of DSCP to queue will be used to determine the priority of the packet which will be then used to determine the scheduling queue when the port is in DSCP trust state The DSCP to DSCP mapping is used in the swap of DSCP of the packet when the packet is ingresses to the port The remaining processing of the packet will base on the new DSCP By default the DSCP is mapped to the same DSCP To view the following window click QoS gt DSCP gt DSCP Map Settings as show below 148 xStack DGS 3120 Serie
287. ixcccesacntconsecetevssaantieaveduvounssdebeuncedebanesadahmbetelneaaenddabcansd Intinapeintdeetedntiaaradabiarainteansadnehasaecabaeadedetaas 87 AGP POM MS eee as o dead 88 E AP a o CO E o o E OE eee ea 90 Stato POB SSUINO Sissi EE ue EA A AS 90 Unicast Static FDB S6tINES rra nda aaa 90 Multicast Static FOB Sets T 90 MAG Notllicatlon SERMOS as A a 91 MAG Aadress Aging Time Settings ri dal 92 MAC Address Tal basin 93 ARES FDE Table ais 94 ES WIUNIGAS TG ONO eins E 95 TIS IO OPI Qiero aa a a e 95 IGMP SITOO DINE Set UNES acia AE 95 IGMIP Snooping Rate Limit SETAS 98 IGMIPSROopinge static Group ete aia 98 GNP ROUter POR dd 100 IGMP S100 DINE Gro UD rana AAA 100 IGMP Snooping Forwarding Tabla ataca atados 101 GIVIPSMOO DING COUNTER A cia 101 MED SOO UNG APO P O OPP A PPP O A 103 VIED SHO OPIS SStUINE Sada AS IA A AA 104 VIED SNOODINE Rate LIMIE SSA Susi e a lea 106 MED SHOODINE Static OrOUp SEINES ninia 107 NMILD ROUTET PO oa E aci 108 MEDSACOPINS COD a A AE Mathcad chee te setatees 109 MED Snooping Forwardine Talens ica 109 MED SNOOPINECOUN tE ddin 110 MUlcast VEAN lts 111 IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings nai ain a a a 112 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Setting Serana a odias 113 MED MUNCI SCGrOuUp FProrle Settings inch od 115 MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Settihg Ss isten nnn aa a 116 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide PTD ASH aH WWMM ea ersnchltes ae cacao tet atcha S
288. k a bandwidth intensive network device or devices such as a server to the backbone of a network The Switch allows the creation of up to 32 link aggregation groups each group consisting of 2 to 8 links ports The optional Gigabit ports can only belong to a single link aggregation group All of the ports in the group must be members of the same VLAN and their STP status static multicast traffic control traffic segmentation and 802 1p default priority configurations must be identical Port locking port mirroring and 802 1X must not be enabled on the trunk group Further the LACP aggregated links must all be of the same speed and should be configured as full duplex The Master Port of the group is to be configured by the user and all configuration options including the VLAN configuration that can be applied to the Master Port are applied to the entire link aggregation group Load balancing is automatically applied to the ports in the aggregated group and a link failure within the group causes the network traffic to be directed to the remaining links in the group The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat a link aggregation group as a single link on the switch level On the port level the STP will use the port parameters of the Master Port in the calculation of port cost and in determining the state of the link aggregation group If two redundant link aggregation groups are configured on the Switch STP will block one entire group in the s
289. k the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button in the CPU Access Rule List the following page will appear 185 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide CPU ACL Rule Details Profile ID Access ID Show All Rules Figure 7 43 CPU Access Rule Detail Information Packet Content ACL Click the Show All Rules button to navigate back to the CPU Access Rule List ACL Finder The ACL rule finder helps you to identify any rules that have been assigned to a specific port and edit existing rules quickly To view this window click ACL gt ACL Finder as shown below The ACL rule finder helps you to identify any rules that have been assigned to a specific port Profile ID Unit All viPot sd State Normal Profile ID Profile Type Summary Action Figure 7 44 ACL Finder window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Use the drop down menu to select the Profile ID for the ACL rule finder to identify the rule Select the unit you want to configure Enter the port number for the ACL rule finder to identify the rule Unit O Port Use the drop down menu to select the state Normal Allow the user to find normal ACL rules CPU Allow the user to find CPU ACL rules Egress Allow the user to find Egress ACL rules Click the Find button to locate a spec
290. kets of lower priority transmitted For weighted round robin queuing the number of packets sent from each priority queue depends upon the assigned weight For a configuration of eight CoS queues A H with their respective weight value 8 1 the packets are sent in the following sequence A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 A4 B4 C4 D4 E4 A5 B5 C5 D5 A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 A8 A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 For weighted round robin queuing if each CoS queue has the same weight value then each CoS queue has an equal opportunity to send packets just like round robin queuing For weighted round robin queuing if the weight for a CoS is set to 0 then it will continue processing the packets from this CoS until there are no more packets for this CoS The other CoS queues that have been given a nonzero value and depending upon the weight will follow a common weighted round robin scheme Remember that the Switch has eight configurable priority queues and eight Classes of Service for each port on the Switch NOTICE The Switch contains eight classes of service for each port on the Switch One of these classes is reserved for internal use on the Switch and is therefore not configurable All references in the following section regarding classes of service will refer to only the eight classes of service that may be used and configured by the administrator 802 1p Settings 140 xStack DGS
291. ks and thus faster topology adjustment A drawback of 802 1D 1998 is this absence of immediate feedback from adjacent bridges 802 1Q 2005 MSTP 802 1D 2004RSTP 802 1D 1998STP Forwarding Learning Disabled Disabled Disabled No Blocking sete O sau u RSTP is capable of a more rapid transition to a forwarding state it no longer relies on timer configurations RSTP compliant bridges are sensitive to feedback from other RSTP compliant bridge links Ports do not need to wait for the topology to stabilize before transitioning to a forwarding state In order to allow this rapid transition the protocol introduces two new variables the edge port and the point to point P2P port Edge Port The edge port is a configurable designation used for a port that is directly connected to a segment where a loop cannot be created An example would be a port connected directly to a single workstation Ports that are designated as edge ports transition to a forwarding state immediately without going through the listening and learning states An edge port loses its status if it receives a BPDU packet immediately becoming a normal spanning tree port P2P Port A P2P port is also capable of rapid transition P2P ports may be used to connect to other bridges Under RSTP MSTP all ports operating in full duplex mode are considered to be P2P ports unless manually overridden through configuration 802 1D 1998 802 1D 2004 802 1Q 2005 Compatibility MSTP or R
292. l IGMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an IGMP type value Select TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting TCP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask src port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff which you wish to filter dst port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff which you wish to filter flag bit The user may also identify which flag bits to filter Flag bits are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may filter packets by filter ing certain flag bits within the packets by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field The user may choose between urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn Synchronize fin finish Select UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting UDP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask src port mask Specify a UDP port mask for the source port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff dst port mask Specify a UDP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff Select Protocol ID Enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask Specify the protocol ID m
293. l Ethernet Type Figure 7 48 Add Egress ACL Profile window Ethernet ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Enter a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 1 to 256 Profile Name Enter a profile name for the profile created Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address or IPv6 address This will change the window according to the requirements for the type of profile 190 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Select Ethernet ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header Source MAC Mask Source MAC Mask Enter a MAC address mask for the source MAC address Destination MAC Mask Enter a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address 802 1Q VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the 802 1Q VLAN identifier of each packet header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding 802 1p Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the 802 1p priority value of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding Ethernet Type Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet typ
294. l console port of each device in the stack Users must reconfigure Box IDs and reboot the stack Stacking Device Table This window is used to display the current devices in the Switch Stack To view this window click System Configuration gt Stacking gt Stacking Device as shown below Box Type HAN Version Serial Number DGS 3120 24TC Figure 2 25 Stacking Device Table window 24 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Stacking Mode Settings To begin the stacking process users must first enable this device for stacking by using the Stacking Mode Settings window To view this window click System Configuration gt Stacking gt Stacking Mode Settings as shown below tacking Mode Setting y Satequarc Stacking Mode Enabled Disabled Force Master Role Enabled Disabled Box ID Settings Current Box ID New Box ID Priority 1 63 Figure 2 26 Stacking Mode Settings window The fields that can be configured or viewed are described below Parameter Description Stacking Mode The DGS 3120 Series enables stacking mode by default Force Master Role Use the radio buttons to enable or disable the function It is used to ensure the master role is unchanged when adding a new device to the current stacking topology If the Enabled radio button is selected the master s priority will become zero after the stacking has stabilized Current Box ID The Box ID of the switch in the sta
295. l the entries listed Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry 273 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings On this page the user can configure add and delete DHCP relay option 61 parameters To view this window click Network Application gt DHCP gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings as shown below DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Drop e g 10 90 90 90 Apply Client ID MAC Address eg 01 11 22 33 44 55 Relay Rule Relay sd e g 10 90 90 90 Add Client ID MAC Address Delete Delete All Total Entries 1 Relay Rule ClientiD17 192 168 69 1 Figure 9 7 DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description DHCP Relay Option Here the user can select the DHCP Relay Option 61 default action 61 Default Drop Specify to drop the packet Relay Specify to relay the packet to an IP address Enter the IP Address of the default relay server When there is no matching server found for the packet based on option 61 the relay servers will be determined by this default relay server setting Client ID MAC Address The client s client ID which is the hardware address of client String The client s client ID which is specified by administrator Relay Rule Drop Specify to drop the packet Relay
296. lay the information in a table rather than a line graph Click the View Graphic link to display the information in a line graph rather than a table Packet Size Users can display packets received by the Switch arranged in six groups and classed by size as either a line graph or a table Two windows are offered To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Statistics gt Packet Size as shown below 292 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Unit on 07 Apply Clear Facket Size Analysis Port 1 1000 900 a00 rod 600 500 400 300 1024 1518 00 UL ShowlHide Iw 64 W 65 127 W 128 255 W 256 511 W 512 1023 Iw 1024 1518 Figure 11 14 Packet Size window Click the link to display the information in a table rather than a line graph Unit Port 1 jis y Frame Size Frame Counts Framesisec 128 255 256 511 1024 1518 Figure 11 15 RX Size Analysis window table The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Select the unit you want to configure Time Interval Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Pot Use the drop down
297. le HW Entries 1020 Profile ID Access ID Profile Type Action A E Figure 7 5 Access Rule List window Ethernet ACL Click the Add Rule button to create a new ACL rule in this profile Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page Click the Show Details button to view more information about the specific rule created Click the Delete Rules button to remove the specific entry Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist After clicking the Add Rule button the following page will appear 157 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile Information Profile ID it Profile Name EthernetAcL Profile Type Ethernet Source MAC 00 1 1 22 33 44 55 Rule Detail Keep the input field blank to specify that the corresponding option does not matter Access ID 1 1536 C Auto Assign Source MAC Address Poo fe 00 00 00 00 F F FF Source MAC Address Mask fo E Rule Action Action Priority 0 7 La Replace Priority Replace DSCP 0 63 A Oo Replace ToS Precedence 0 7 C Time Range Name d Counter Disabled v Ports v PJ eta 124 16 1 9 Figure 7 6 Add Access Rule window Ethernet ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Access ID 1 1536 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 1536 Auto Assign Ticking
298. led Global State VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that identifies the VLAN the user wishes to apply the DHCP Local Relay operation State Enable or disable the configure DHCP Local Relay for VLAN state Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section SNTP The Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP is a protocol for synchronizing computer clocks through the Internet It provides comprehensive mechanisms to access national time and frequency dissemination services organize the SNTP subnet of servers and clients and adjust the system clock in each participant SNTP Settings Users can configure the time settings for the Switch To view this window click Network Application gt SNTP gt SNTP Settings as shown below Status SNTP State O Enabled Disabled Current Time 07 02 2000 02 56 27 Time Source System Clock SNTP Settings SNTP First Server SNTP Second Server SNTP Poll Interval In Seconds 30 99999 Figure 9 9 SNTP Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description SNTP State Use this radio button to enable or disable SNTP Displays the Current Time Displays the time source for the system 2 5 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide SNTP First Server The IP address of the primary server from which the SNTP information will be taken SNTP Second Server The IP address of the secondary s
299. lick Add to add this Authentication Server Host to the group The entry should appear in the Host List at the bottom of this tab lt Authentication Server Settings User defined Authentication Server Hosts for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security protocols can be set on the Switch When a user attempts to access the Switch with Authentication Policy enabled the Switch will send authentication packets to a remote TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host on a remote host The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host will then verify or deny the request and return the appropriate message to the Switch More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16 To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Server Settings as shown below NOTE The user must configure Authentication Server Hosts using the Authentication Server Hosts window before adding hosts to the list Authentication Server Hosts must be configured for their specific protocol on a remote centralized server before this function can work properly NOTE The three built in server groups can only have server hosts running the same TACACS daemon TACACS XTACACS TACACS protocols are separate entities and are not compatible
300. lients will be forwarded to all servers but will only be processed by one of them In multicast mode the client uses a multicast MAC address as the destination MAC to reach the server Regardless of the mode the destination MAC is the shared MAC The server uses its own MAC address rather than the shared MAC as the source MAC address of the reply packet The NLB multicast FDB entry will be mutually exclusive with the L2 multicast entry To view this window click L2 Features gt NLB FDB Settings as shown below 133 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide NLB FDB Settings VLAN Name O viD MAC Address Unit Port Select All None Egress Egress Ports Total Entries 0 MAC Address VID Egress Ports Figure 4 93 NLB Multicast FDB Table window The following fields can be set Parameter Description VLAN Name Click the radio button and enter the VLAN of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be created VID 1 4094 Click the radio button and enter the VLAN by the VLAN ID MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be created Unit Select the unit you wish to configure Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Clear All button to remove all the entered information in the fields Click the Edit button to update the information of the corresponding entry Click the Delete button to delete the corresponding entry 134 xStack DGS 3120 Seri
301. llowing window click Management gt Telnet Settings as show below Telnet State Enabled Disabled Port 1 65535 Figure 3 44 Telnet Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Telnet State Telnet configuration is Enabled by default If you do not want to allow configuration of the system through Telnet choose Disabled Port 1 65535 The TCP port number used for Telnet management of the Switch The well known TCP port for the Telnet protocol is 23 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Web Settings Users can configure the Web settings on the Switch To view the following window click Management gt Web Settings as show below 57 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Web State Enabled Disabled Port 1 65535 Apply Figure 3 45 Web Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Web Status Web based management is Enabled by default If you choose to disable this by clicking Disabled you will lose the ability to configure the system through the web interface as soon as these settings are applied Port 1 65535 The TCP port number used for web based management of the Switch The well known TCP port for the Web protocol is 80 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 58 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackabl
302. low Parameter Description Multicast Address List Enter the multicast address list value Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page 112 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Delete button to remove the corresponding entry IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings On this page the user can configure the IGMP snooping multicast VLAN parameters To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt Multicast VLAN gt IGMP Snooping Multicast Group VLAN Settings as show below IGMP Multicast VLAN State Enabled Disabled Apply IGMP Multicast VLAN Forward p nh Unmatched Enabled Disabled Apply VLANName vID 2409 Remap Priority None Replace Priority Add Total Entries 1 VID VLAN Name Remap Priority Profile List Edit Delete Figure 4 64 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IGMP Multicast VLAN Click the radio buttons to enable or disable the IGMP Multicast VLAN state State IGMP Multicast VLAN Click the radio buttons to enable or disable the IGMP Multicast VLAN Forwarding Forward state VLAN Name Enter the VLAN Name used Enter the VID used Remap Priority 0 7 The remap priority value 0 to 7 to
303. low for faster convergences of new topologies for the failed instance Frames designated for these VLANs will be processed quickly and completely throughout interconnected bridges utilizing any of the three Spanning tree protocols STP RSTP or MSTP This protocol will also tag BPDU packets so receiving devices can distinguish spanning tree instances spanning tree regions and the VLANs associated with them An MSTI ID will classify these instances MSTP will connect multiple spanning trees with a Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The CIST will automatically determine each MSTP region its maximum possible extent and will appear as one virtual bridge that runs a single spanning tree Consequentially frames assigned to different VLANs will follow different data routes within administratively established regions on the network continuing to allow simple and full processing of frames regardless of administrative errors in defining VLANs and their respective spanning trees Each switch utilizing the MSTP on a network will have a single MSTP configuration that will have the following three attributes 1 A configuration name defined by an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters defined in the MST Configuration Identification window in the Configuration Name field 2 A configuration revision number named here as a Revision Level and found in the MST Configuration Identification window and 3 A 4094 element table defined here as a VID List i
304. lowing steps explain how to use the Password Recovery feature on D Link devices to easily recover passwords Complete these steps to reset the password 1 For security reasons the Password Recovery feature requires the user to physically access the device Therefore this feature is only applicable when there is a direct connection to the console port of the device It is necessary for the user needs to attach a terminal or PC with terminal emulation to the console port of the switch 2 Power on the Switch After the UART init is loaded to 100 the Switch will allow 2 seconds for the user to press the hotkey Shift 6 to enter the Password Recovery Mode Once the Switch enters the Password Recovery Mode all ports on the Switch will be disabled Boot Procedure V1 00 B010 Power On Self Test MAC Address 00 19 5B EC 32 15 H W Version Al Please Wait Loading V1 00 B039 Runtime Image Password Recovery Mode gt 3 Inthe Password Recovery Mode only the following commands can be used Command Parameters The reset config command resets the whole configuration back to the default values reboot The reboot command exits the Reset Password Recovery Mode and restarts the switch A confirmation message will be displayed to allow the user to save the current settings reset account The reset account command deletes all the previously created accounts reset password The reset password command resets the pass
305. lt Route Settings Interface Name fs Max 12 characters Nexthop Address o leg 3FFE 1 Metric 1 65535 Backup State Apply Delete All Total Entries 0 Prefix Next Hop Interface Name Protocol Metric Backup Figure 5 5 IPv6 Static Default Route Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Interface Name The IP Interface where the static IPv6 route is created Nexthop Address The corresponding IPv6 address for the next hop Gateway address in IPv6 format The metric of the IPv6 interface entered into the table representing the number of routers between the Switch and the IPv6 address above Metric values allowed are between 1 and 65535 Backup State Each IP address can only have one primary route while other routes should be assigned to the backup state When the primary route failed the switch will try the backup routes according to the order learnt by the routing table until route success This field represents the backup state for the IPv6 configured This field may be Primary or Backup Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed IP Forwarding Table The IP forwarding table stores all the direct connected IP information On this page the user can view all the direct connected IP information To view the following window click L3 Features gt IP Forwarding Table as show below 137 xStack DGS 3
306. lue can be set from 7 to 256 Profile Name Enter a profile name for the profile created Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address or IPv6 address This will change the window according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header IPv6 Class Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of service ToS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 IPv6 TCP Source Port Mask Specify that the rule applies to the range of TCP source ports Destination Port Mask Specify the range of the TCP destination port range IPv6 UDP Source Port Mask Specify the range of the UDP source port range Destination Port Mask Specify the range of the UDP destination port mask ICMP Select CMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header IPv6 Source Mask The user may specify an IP address mask for the source IPv6 address by ticking the corresponding check box and entering the IP address mask e g 255 255 255 255 IPv6 Destination Mask The user may specify an IP add
307. machine will retransmit an EAP Request packet to the Supplicant before it times out the authentication session lts default value is 2 it can be set by management to any value in the range from 1 to 10 TxPeriod This sets the TxPeriod of time for the authenticator PAE state machine This value determines the period of an EAP Request Identity packet transmitted to the client The default setting is 30 seconds ReAuthPeriod A constant that defines a nonzero number of seconds between periodic re authentication of the client The default setting is 3600 seconds ReAuthentication Determines whether regular re authentication will take place on this port The default setting is Disabled Port Control This allows the user to control the port authorization state Select ForceAuthorized to disable 802 1X and cause the port to transition to the authorized state without any authentication exchange required This means the port transmits and receives normal traffic without 802 1X based authentication of the client If ForceUnauthorized is selected the port will remain in the unauthorized state ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate The Switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface If Auto is selected it will enable 802 1X and cause the port to begin in the unauthorized state allowing only EAPOL frames to be sent and received through the port The authentication process begins when the link state of th
308. made 208 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 802 1X Port Settings Users can configure the 802 1X authenticator port settings To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Port Settings as shown below 802 1X Port Access Control Unit From Port 0 To Port 01 QuietPeriod 0 65535 6 sec SuppTimeout 1 65535 ServerTimeout 1 65535 se MaxReq 1 10 times TX Period 1 65535 sec ReAuthPeriod 1 65535 sec ReAuthentication Port Contral Capability Direction Forward EAPOL PDU Max User 1 448 C No Limit Port ladmpirt OnencriDi Port Quiet Server aman ReAuth can Concha Forward EAP OL Pia 5 AdmDir OpenCriDir Control TX Period ee Toi MaxReq Period ReAuth Capability PDU Both 60 Disabled 60 30 30 2 3600 Disable Disabled E Disabled Both Both Auto 30 60 30 30 2 3600 Disabled None Disabled ho E 3 3 3 Both Both Auto 30 60 30 30 2 3600 Disabled None Disabled None Disabled 16 Oo fm in Both Both Auto 30 6o 30 30 2 3600 Disabled Disabled Both Both Auto 30 60 30 230 2 3600 Disabled Disabled Disabled None Disabled isable Disabled Both Both Auto 30 60 30 30 2 3600 Disabled None Disabled Disabled Disabled wt Figure 8 10 802 1X Port Settings The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Descr
309. may result in unacceptable levels of packet loss or significant transmission delays If you choose to customize this setting it is important to monitor network performance especially during peak demand as bottlenecks can quickly develop if the QoS settings are not suitable To view this window click QoS gt Scheduling Settings gt QoS Scheduling Mechanism as shown below 151 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Unit From Port To Port Scheduling Mechanism 07 01 Mode Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Figure 6 12 QoS Scheduling Mechanism The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Umit Select the unit you wish to configure From Port To Port Enter the port or port list you wish to configure Scheduling Mechanism Strict The highest class of service is the first to process traffic That is the highest class of service will finish before other queues empty Weighted Round Robin Use the weighted round robin algorithm to handle packets in an even distribution in priority classes of service Click the Apply button to accept the changes made lt Q NOTE The settings you assign to the queues numbers 0 7 represent the IEEE 802 1p priority tag number Do not confuse these settings with port numbers
310. menu to select a unit for receiving the configuration file Select All for all units 308 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide TFTP Server IP Enter the TFTP server IP address used IPv4 El Mode Only Click the radio button to enter the TFTP server IP address used IPv6 El Mode Only Click the radio button to enter the TFTP server IPv6 address used Destination File Enter the location and name of the Destination File Source File Enter the location and name of the Source File Click Download to initiate the download Download Configuration From HTTP This page allows the user to download the configuration file from a computer to the Switch and updates the switch Download Configuration From TFTP Download Configuration From HTTP Unit Destination File fo source File fs Browse Figure 12 12 Download Configuration HTTP window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Use the drop down menu to select a unit for receiving the configuration file Select All for all units Destination File Enter the location and name of the Destination File Enter the location and name of the Source File or click the Browse button to navigate to the configuration file for the download Click Download to initiate the download Upload Configuration The following window is used to upload the configuration file from the Switc
311. n 32 alphanumeric characters that will be used to identify this time range on the Switch This range name will be used in the Access Profile table to identify the access profile and associated rule to be enabled during this time range This parameter is used to set the time in the day that this time range is to be enabled using the following parameters Start Time Use this parameter to identify the starting time of the time range in hours minutes and seconds based on the 24 hour time system 19 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide End Time Use this parameter to identify the ending time of the time range in hours minutes and seconds based on the 24 hour time system Weekdays Use the check boxes to select the corresponding days of the week that this time range is to be enabled Tick the Select All Days check box to configure this time range for every day of the week Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Current configured entries will be displayed in the Time Range Information table in the bottom half of the window shown above Port Group Settings El Mode Only This window is used to create port groups and add or delete ports from the port groups To view the following window click System Configuration gt Port Group Settings as show below Group Name Sroup ID 1 64 O Port List e 9 1 1 1 5 Action Create PortGroup Total Entries O Port Group ID
312. n fixed length cells packets ATM is designed to carry a complete range of user traffic including voice data and video signals A feature on a port which allows it to advertise its capabilities for soeed duplex and flow control When connected to an end station that also supports auto negotiation the link can self detect its optimum operating setup A port which does not learn device addresses and which receives all frames with an unknown address Backbone ports are normally used to connect the Switch to the backbone of your network Note that backbone ports were formerly known as designated downlink ports The part of a network used as the primary path for transporting traffic between network segments Information capacity measured in bits per second that a channel can transmit The bandwidth of Ethernet is 10Mbps the bandwidth of Fast Ethernet is 100Mbps The switching speed of a line Also known as line speed between network segments The BOOTP protocol allows automatic mapping of an IP address to a given MAC address each time a device is started In addition the protocol can assign the subnet mask and default gateway to a device A device that interconnects local or remote networks no matter what higher level protocols are involved Bridges form a single logical network centralizing network administration A message sent to all destination devices on the network Multiple simultaneous broadcasts that typically absorb available ne
313. n higher priorities for forwarding packets To view the following window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt MSTP Port Information as show below 01 Ww Unit MSTP Port Setting Instance ID intemal Path Cost 1 200000000 Port 1 Settings Designated Bridge Internal Path Cost Priority Status Figure 4 29 MSTP Port Information window To view the MSTI settings for a particular port use the drop down menu to select the Port number To modify the settings for a particular MSTI instance enter a value in the Instance ID field an Internal Path Cost and use the drop down menu to select a Priority 85 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IT Select the unit you want to configure Pot Select the port you want to configure The MSTI ID of the instance to be configured Enter a value between O and 15 An entry of Oin this field denotes the CIST default MSTI Internal Path Cost This parameter is set to represent the relative cost of forwarding packets to specified ports when an interface is selected within an STP instance Selecting this parameter with a value in the range of 7 to 200000000 will set the quickest route when a loop occurs A lower Internal cost represents a quicker transmission Selecting O zero for this parameter will set the quickest route automatically and optimally for an in
314. n the MST Configuration Identification window which will associate each of the possible 4094 VLANs supported by the Switch for a given instance To utilize the MSTP function on the Switch three steps need to be taken 1 The Switch must be set to the MSTP setting found in the STP Bridge Global Settings window in the STP Version field 2 The correct spanning tree priority for the MSTP instance must be entered defined here as a Priority in the MSTI Config Information window when configuring MSTI ID settings 3 VLANs that will be shared must be added to the MSTP Instance ID defined here as a VID List in the MST Configuration Identification window when configuring an MSTI ID settings 802 1D 2004 Rapid Spanning Tree The Switch implements three versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined by the IEEE 802 1Q 2005 the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP as defined by the IEEE 802 1D 2004 specification and a version compatible with the IEEE 802 1D 1998 STP RSTP can operate with legacy equipment implementing IEEE 802 1D 1998 however the advantages of using RSTP will be lost The IEEE 802 1D 2004 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP evolved from the 802 1D 1998 STP standard RSTP was developed in order to overcome some limitations of STP that impede the function of some recent switching innovations in particular certain Layer 3 functions that are increasingly handled by Ethernet switches The basic
315. n this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt Authenticator Diagnostics as shown below 215 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide o Connect Enter Connect Logoff Auth Enter Auth SUCCESS Auth Timeout Auth Fail Figure 8 17 Authenticator Diagnostics window NOTE The Authenticator Diagnostics cannot be viewed on the Switch unless 802 1X is enabled by pa port or by MAC address To enable 802 1X go to Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Global Settings and select Port based or Mac based from the Authentication Mode drop down menu Initialize Port s Existing 802 1X port and MAC settings are displayed and can be configured using the window below To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt Initialize Port s as shown below If Port based is selected in the Authentication Mode drop down menu in 802 1X Global Settings window the following window appears MAC Address PAE State Backend State Figure 8 18 Initialize Port s Port based window 216 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide If MAC based is selected in the Authentication Mode drop down menu in 802 1X Global Settings window the following window appears Unit 1 From Port 01 v ToPon v MAC Address CI Figure 8 19 Initialize Port s MAC based window The fields that can be configured are descr
316. naged Switch Web Ul Reference Guide octet hex value For IEEE802 3 LLC this is a 2 octet IEEE 802 2 Link Service Access Point LSAP pair The first octet is for Destination Service Access Point DSAP and the second octet is for Source Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries based on the information entered Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete Settings button to remove the Protocol for the Protocol VLAN Group information for the specific entry Click the Delete Group button to remove the entry completely Es lt Q NOTE The Group name value should be less than 33 characters 802 1v Protocol VLAN Settings The user can configure Protocol VLAN settings The lower half of the table displays any previously created settings To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt 802 1v protocol VLAN gt 802 1v Protocol VLAN Settings as show below Add New Protocol VLAN Group ID VID 1 4094 802 1p Priority O Group Name O VLAN Name po Port List e g 1 1 1 6 a CAI Ports Protocol VLAN Table Search Port List e g 1 1 1 6 a Total Entries 0 Port VLAN Name Group ID 802 1p Priority Figure 4 9 802 1v Protocol VLAN Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Group ID Select a previously configured Group ID from the d
317. ncnnnononancnnnnnnnnncnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrennnnnnnnns 135 IPv4 Static Default Route Settings El Mode Only occoccccocccconccoconcconononnnocononononnnnnnnonnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnns 135 a A eee Reena eee ee eee eee 136 IPv6 Static Detault Route Settings El Mode Online 137 IF Forwarding Table rai cuca eee A ee Noe eee ae ee 137 Ghaptero MO aaa 139 902 1P SeN uns A as 140 802 1D UE SNS et a e Da 141 802 18 USER PROMISCUO 141 Dan WII CO TO loc ocdas 142 Ban aWidi Control Seting S tii ed ia io 142 Queue Banawidth Control Settings oisnean a a 144 TraMic GoOntolSetInd Sada dois 145 A O A A A auieupttassoaeeenet ube 148 DS ISE ol o a Ll 148 DSGP IA SEMI e O a N 148 FOL BIOCKING Pre Ve MUON sche ce nian ole ici 150 SENECU O CIN Se n e a A N E 150 OS SC ie UNINC annann a 150 OOS Scheduling Mechans Misese a iiai n 151 Chapter AC bcininaa datada ad 153 AGL COMMOURAMON WIZA si o a 153 ACCESS PROMO Sos corra aia 154 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Fa WY ey oko ad er UB os e ii eee 171 PAG Me NCIC Fehon cette as act eed A o O E E tne 186 o Sata arian ce eds a a spall ces aa aa sane a aa cies auavatecs soe tessesmedoegeusbans Oaa 186 Egress Access Profile List EI Mode Only ussconna aa Me ecsbee eis sees eres TEER ERa 190 Egress ACL Flow Meter EliMOde Only it io iii lecitina E 201 Chapter SecUliVisinnatonian nn tie a a aiaa aiaa 205 802 e
318. nd The packet that exceeds the limited rate will be dropped Selecting the No Limit option lifts the rate limit requirement Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry MLD Snooping Static Group Settings This page used to configure the MLD snooping multicast group static members To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Static Group Settings as show below VLAN Name fs Max 32 characters OVID List J eg 1 3 5 Fo View All Total Entries 1 VIB VLAN Name IP Address Static Member Port EEN lt gt Figure 4 55 MLD Snooping Static Group Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name The name of the VLAN on which the static group resides VID List The ID of the VLAN on which the static group resides IPv6 Address Specify the multicast group IPv6 address Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered 107 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Create button to add a static group Click the Delete button to delete a static group Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Edit button to
319. ndow displays all of the SNMP User s currently configured on the Switch To view the following window click Management gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP User Table Settings as show below Add User SNMP Version Wa SNMP V3 Encryption None Auth Protocol by Password MOS Password Po PrivProtocol by Password Mone Password Auth Protocol by Key MDS Key Priv Protocol by Key None Key Apply Total Entries 1 UserName Group Name SNMP Version Auth Protocol Priv Protoco Figure 3 40 SNMP User Table Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below 94 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parameter Description User Name An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the SNMP users This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages SNMP Version V3 Indicates that SNMP version 3 is in use SNMP V3 Encryption Use the drop down menu to enable encryption for SNMP V3 This is only operable in SNMP V3 mode The choices are None Password or Key Auth Protocol MD5 Specify that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used This field is only operable when V3 is selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked This field will require the user to enter a password SHA Specify that the HMAC SHA authentication protocol will be used This field is only operable when V3 is selected in t
320. new user type in a User Name and New Password and retype the same password in the Confirm New Password field Choose the level of privilege Admin Operator Power_User or User from the Access Right drop down menu Management Admin Operator Power_User User Configuration Read Write Read Write Read Write A pr partly Network Monitoring Read Write Read Write Read only Read only Community Strings and Trap Read Write Read only Read only Read only Stations Update Firmware and Configuration Read Write Files System Utilities Read Write Read only Read only Read only Read Write No No IO User Account Management Add Update Delete User Accounts Read Write View User Accounts Read Write The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description User Name Enter a new user name for the Switch Enter a new password for the Switch Confirm Password Re type in a new password for the Switch Access Right Specify the access right for this user 21 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Apply button to accept the changes made NOTICE In case of lost passwords or password corruption please refer to the appendix chapter entitled Password Recovery Procedure which will guide you through the steps necessary to resolve this issue g lt Q NOTE The username and password should be less than 16 characters Command Logging Settings This window
321. nfigured are described below Parameter Description MAC Address Aging Time This field specify the length of time a learned MAC Address will remain in the 10 1000000 forwarding table without being accessed that is how long a learned MAC Address is allowed to remain idle To change this option type in a different value representing the MAC address age out time in seconds The MAC Address Aging Time can be set to any value between 70 and 1000000 seconds The default setting is 300 seconds Click the Apply button to accept the changes made MAC Address Table This allows the Switch s MAC address forwarding table to be viewed When the Switch learns an association between a MAC address VLAN and a port number it makes an entry into its forwarding table These entries are then used to forward packets through the Switch To view the following window click L2 Features gt FDB gt MAC Address Table as show below Unit Clear Dynamic Entries VLAN Name VID List MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Security View All Entries Clear All Entries Total Entries 3 VID VLAN Name MAC Address default 00 00 01 02 03 04 E Static default 00 01 02 03 04 00 Self default 00 0C 6E AA BS C0 E Dynamic Add to Static MAC table Figure 4 37 MAC Address Table window The fields that can be configured are described below IT Select the unit you want to configure Pot The port to which the MAC address below corresponds Parameter Descripti
322. ng the Show Details button the following page will appear ld Af i rome Ueta i Armario Profile ID A Profile Type Packet Content Offset 0 15 Figure 7 40 CPU Access Profile Detail Information Packet Content ACL Click the Show All Profiles button to navigate back to the CPU ACL Profile List Page After clicking the Add View Rules button the following page will appear Add Rule Unused Rule Entries 99 Profile ID Access ID Profile Type Action Delete Rules Figure 7 41 CPU Access Rule List Packet Content ACL Click the Add Rule button to create a new CPU ACL rule in this profile Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page Click the Show Details button to view more information about the specific rule created Click the Delete Rules button to remove the specific entry Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist After clicking the Add Rule button the following page will appear 184 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile Information Profile ID Profile Type Packet Content 0x00000000 0x00000000 Offset 0 15 0x00000000 000000000 Rule Detail Keep the input field blank to specify thatthe corresponding option does not matter Access ID 1 100 C Auto Assign O offset 0 15 00000000 oco0000 Jjoooaooo Jfaoaoaoos Rule Action Action Permit Y Time Range Name d Ports Seg
323. ning Tree Protocol STP globally on the switch RSTP Select this parameter to set the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP globally on the Switch MSTP Select this parameter to set the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP globally on the Switch Forwarding BPDU This field can be Enabled or Disabled When Enabled it allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other network devices The default is Enabled Bridge Max Age 6 40 The Max Age may be set to ensure that old information does not endlessly circulate through redundant paths in the network preventing the effective propagation of the new information Set by the Root Bridge this value will aid in determining that the Switch has spanning tree configuration values consistent with other devices on the bridged LAN The user may choose a time between 6 and 40 seconds The default value is 20 seconds Bridge Hello Time 1 2 The Hello Time can be set from 7 to 2 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge This field will only appear here when STP or RSTP is selected for the STP Version For MSTP the Hello Time must be set on a port per port basis The default is 2 seconds Bridge Forward Delay The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds Any port on the Switch spends this 4 30 time in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding
324. nio E E aE a ae ETa 55 SNMPv6 Host Table Settings El Mode Only ooocccccccconncnnccccocconncnononcnnnononancnnnnnnnnncnnnnononnrnnnnonannnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnanncannnns 56 LO A A A E E E emeenadacseacd 56 Tener oeni Seira alce 57 WED ENG ui aiii 57 Chapter 4 Ee FC ATU OS aria 59 A ee ee ee eee ee ee ee eee ee eee ee eee eee es 59 S02 10 VLAN SENOS eesse 64 A A a ass a a a A 67 802 1V Protocol Group Settings siasa a ia 67 802 Iv Protocol VLAN Setting Saruana N T O ieee 68 ASVMMEWIG VLAN SCUINGS rro iio 69 EA a I AA EEA P ET AEEA AE EAEE I E A AE NA AAA META AE E E S ETTEI AE 69 E A tacentontae dessins 69 GVRP FOTE SCLIN SS aaa danita 70 WMAG based VEAN SEMNGS oirin a ii 72 Ervale VEAN SENOS ainda 72 PVD AUTO ANS SIGS CUINA AA A AAA ADA Ad siden 74 VOI MEAN dd tala 74 VOICE VEAN Glo Dal SCLIN GS si ria dt A A date a 74 Voice VLAN PO SEINE S sandalia a a aN a a A 75 VOKCEVLANOUILS ERINE Serai E E A E EN 76 Voice VEAN DEVICE ias 76 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide VEAN Ue eC NG Scena aida a 77 BOW ENEAN A abana E EE A neseoceaancednehanneciatese weet 77 SNOW VLAN PONS tasca ici N E e dc lee Mansa ee a a a 78 AA ee ee ne et ln EE e Ue ere eer eee eee ee eee 79 AC A O eee eee 81 SS aa ee AC a ee See eee Re ene eens ey 82 MSTGontguration identico iaa isin N tel esac sie ee ates ee ae 83 SP NStanico Scenes 84 MOST PO o 85 KOKAJ da ION ranas E N 86 Port Trunking Settings c
325. nnesceessyecevasswacevenenececessweceieuewscsbescnscebosswecekeeewassboceewens 304 Save Conng rat on 1 aran 304 cl A eres nadiGaceetesctatetsee 304 OWING AG TIFAW Al Suit ada oenethbe drpixtud onsale ivepuntue ie iene 306 Ubload FIRM WANG Yeieset et ateca dd da 307 DOW lO AG CONIL ea e sil 308 Upload Ea A 309 Upo aT EO RIE icara See ars Pie ener nn ree Sn ae ec Re a eee eee eee 311 FACS PF OO 312 o A AA 313 Appendix A Mitigating ARP Spoofing Attacks Using Packet Content ACL oooccconnnicnoocommo 315 Appendix B Password Recovery Procedure coooocconnccocnccooocconoccnnoccnnnccnnnnrnnanennanrnnanennanennanennanos 321 Appendix Trap LOS 322 No AE AAA E e ENa 325 vill xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Intended Readers Typographical Conventions Notes Notices and Cautions Safety Instructions General Precautions for Rack Mountable Products Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge The DGS 3120 Series Web UI Reference Guide contains information for setup and management of the Switch This manual is intended for network managers familiar with network management concepts and terminology Typographical Conventions Convention Description In a command line square brackets indicate an optional entry For example copy filename means that optionally you can type copy followed by the name of the file Do not type the brackets Bold font Indicates a button a to
326. no longer interested in receiving multicast data from a specific multicast group address therefore stating that it is done with the multicast data from this address Once this message is received by the Switch it will no longer forward multicast traffic from a specific multicast group address to this listening port 4 Multicast Listener Report Version 2 Comparable to the Host Membership Report in IGMPv3 and labeled as 143 in the ICMP packet header this message is sent by the listening port to the Switch stating that it is interested in receiving multicast data from a multicast address in response to the Multicast Listener Query message Data Driven Learning The Switch allows you to implement data driven learning for MLD snooping groups If data driven learning also Known as dynamic IP multicast learning is enabled for a VLAN when the Switch receives IP multicast traffic on the VLAN an MLD snooping group is created Learning of an entry is not activated by MLD membership registration but activated by the traffic For an ordinary MLD snooping entry the MLD protocol will take care of the aging out of the entry Fora data driven entry the entry can be specified not to age out or to age out by a timer When the data driven learning State is enabled the multicast filtering mode for all ports is ignored This means multicast packets will be flooded an ordinary MLD snooping entry In other words the aging out mechanism will follow the
327. nt Group connect to other groups and devices Possible icons on this window are as follows Description Description Group gy Layer 3 member switch s Layer 2 commander switch Member switch of other group Layer 3 commander switch Layer 2 candidate switch Layer 2 member switch Unknown device Non SIM devices Tool Tips Commander switch of other group gt Layer 3 candidate switch 41 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide In the Topology view window the mouse plays an important role in configuration and in viewing device information Setting the mouse cursor over a specific device in the topology window tool tip will display the same information about a specific device as the Tree view does See the window below for an example Figure 3 19 Device Information Utilizing the Tool Tip Setting the mouse cursor over a line between two devices will display the connection speed between the two devices as shown below defaultlaa 00 01 E 35 26 01 default pay yon RH y Si y cdefaui 3 L o defaultdd O0 04 Biv 36 26 02 default 355 5 ey EN default 35 26 84 y pee faiult 35 26 00 id erat et ag EAS 26 Figure 3 20 Port Speed Utilizing the Tool Tip Right Click Right clicking on a device will allow the user to perform various functions depending on the role of the Switch in the SIM group and the icon associated with it Grou
328. nt to point P2P shared link P2P ports are similar to edge ports however they are restricted in that a P2P port must operate in full duplex Like edge ports P2P ports transition to a forwarding state rapidly thus benefiting from RSTP A P2P value of False indicates that the port cannot have P2P status Auto allows the port to have P2P status whenever possible and operate as if the P2P status were True f the port cannot maintain this status for example if the port is forced to half duplex operation the P2P status changes to operate as if the P2P value were False The default setting for this parameter is Auto Restricted TCN Topology Change Notification is a simple BPDU that a bridge sends out to its root port to signal a topology change Restricted TCN can be toggled between True and False If set to True this stops the port from propagating received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports The default is False When operating in RSTP mode selecting Yes forces the port that has been selected to transmit RSTP BPDUs Port STP This drop down menu allows you to enable or disable STP for the selected group of ports The default is Enabled Forward BPDU Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the flooding of BPDU packets when STP is disabled Choosing the True parameter designates the port as an edge port Edge ports cannot create loops however an edge port can lose edge port status if a topology change cre
329. ntry To view more details about for example the Management Address Count click on the Show Detail hyperlink 132 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Subtype IF Type index 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 10 1 Figure 4 90 LLDP Local Port Information Show Detail window Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page LLDP Remote Port Information This page displays port information learned from the neighbors The switch receives packets from a remote station but is able to store the information as local To view the following window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Remote Port Information as show below LLOP Remote Port Brief Table Total Entries 0 Entity Chassis ID Subtype Chassis ID Port ID Subtype Port ID Port Description Figure 4 91 LLDP Remote Port Information window Select a Port number and click the Find button to locate a specific entry To view the normal LLDP Remote Port information page per port click the Show Normal button LLDP Remote Entity Information Table Information Figure 4 92 LLDP Remote Port Information Show Normal window Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page NLB FDB Settings The Switch supports Network Load Balancing NLB This is a MAC forwarding control for supporting the Microsoft server load balancing application where multiple servers can share the same IP address and MAC address The requests from c
330. o IP DHCP Packet Stop Learning Threshold Mode Disabled Forward Disabled isabled Disabled isabled Oo o otAow Foward S0ONoma Disabled isabled Pv Notow Forward 50ONomal Disabled isabled 500 Normal Disabled Disabled Forward Disabled Disabled d Disabled isabled Forward D D D D D D isabled Not Allow Forward isabled IPv4 Not Allow isabled IPv4 Not Allow 500 Normal isabled isabled Py Not Allow 500 Normal isabled isabled Pyd Not Allow lisabled lisabled Pvd Not Allow Disabled isabled Pv4 Not Allow Disabled isabled IPva Not Allow Disabled Not Allow Disabled 500 Normal D D D D isabled Not Allow Forward 500 Normal isabled Disabled OOo P O O Not Allow Forward 500 Normal jisabled Disabled Not Allow 500 Normal lisabled Disabled Not Allow rd 500 Normal jisabled Disabled Not Allow Forward 500 Norme orm Orm isabled isabled Oo Pa NE TT Forward vorm or or mal Figure 8 27 IMPB Port Settings window 223 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Unit Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port Select a range of ports to set for IP MAC port binding ARP Inspection When the ARP inspection function is enabled the legal ARP packets are forwarded while the illegal packets are dropped Disabled Disable the ARP ins
331. o navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist 108 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide NOTE The abbreviations used on this page are Static Router Port S Dynamic Router Port D and Forbidden Router Port F lt MLD Snooping Group Users can view MLD Snooping Groups present on the Switch MLD Snooping is an IPv6 function comparable to IGMP Snooping for IPv4 To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Group as show below VLAN Name VID List e g 1 4 6 Port List e g 1 1 1 3 1 5 Group IPv6 Address Data Driven Clear Data Driven View All Clear All Data Driven Total Entries 0 VID VLAN Name Source Group Member Port Router Port Group Type Up Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Figure 4 58 MLD Snooping Group window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name Click the radio button and enter the VLAN name of the multicast group VID List Click the radio button and enter a VLAN list of the multicast group Port List Specify the port number s used to find a multicast group Group IPv6 Address Enter the group IPv6 address used here Select the Data Driven option to enable the data driven feature for this MLD snooping group lf Data Drive is selected only data driven groups will be displayed Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on th
332. o one of the eight available hardware priority queues available on the Switch To view this window click QoS gt Scheduling Settings gt QoS Scheduling as shown below 150 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide os Scheduling Settings Unit From Port To Por Class ID Scheduling Mechanism Class 0 v Strict ow Weight k I m a o n e a se ee es Be ee ba pb 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Figure 6 11 QoS Scheduling window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Select the unit you wish to configure From Port To Port Enter the port or port list you wish to configure Class ID Select the Class ID from 0 7to configure for the QoS parameters Scheduling Mechanism Strict The highest class of service is the first to process traffic That is the highest class of service will finish before other queues empty Weight Use the weighted round robin WAR algorithm to handle packets in an even distribution in priority classes of service Click the Apply button to accept the changes made QoS Scheduling Mechanism Changing the output scheduling used for the hardware queues in the Switch can customize QoS As with any changes to QoS implementation careful consideration should be given to how network traffic in lower priority queues are affected Changes in scheduling
333. o remove a port from voice VLAN if the port is an automatic VLAN member When the last voice device stops sending traffic and the MAC address of this voice device is aged out the voice VLAN aging timer will be started The port will be removed from the voice VLAN after expiration of voice VLAN aging timer If the voice traffic resumes during the aging time the aging timer will be reset and stop Log State Used to enable disable sending of issue of voice VLAN log Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Voice VLAN Port Settings This page is used to show the ports voice VLAN information To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt Voice VLAN gt Voice VLAN Port Settings as show below Mode Disabled D isabled Disabled Disabled D l isab Figure 4 18 Voice VLAN Port Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Umit Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port Here the user can select a range of port to display State Here the user can configure the state of the port Mode sis Here the user can configure the mode of the port Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 19 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Voice VLAN OUI Settings This page is used to configure the user defined voice traffic s OUI The OUI is u
334. o use for this configuration OOOO Enter the IP address the use for this configuration Click the Find by Port button to locate a specific entry based on the port number selected Click the Find by MAC button to locate a specific entry based on the MAC address entered Click the Find by IP Address button to locate a specific entry based on the IP address entered Click the View All Entries button to display all the existing entries Click the Add to IP MAC Port Binding Table to add the specific entry to the IMPB Entry Settings window El Mode Only 94 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide L2 Multicast Control IGMP Snooping Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP snooping allows the Switch to recognize IGMP queries and reports sent between network stations or devices and an IGMP host When enabled for IGMP snooping the Switch can open or close a port to a specific device based on IGMP messages passing through the Switch IGMP Snooping Settings In order to use IGMP Snooping it must first be enabled for the entire Switch under IGMP Global Settings at the top of the window You may then fine tune the settings for each VLAN by clicking the corresponding Edit button When enabled for IGMP snooping the Switch can open or close a port to a specific multicast group member based on IGMP messages sent from the device to the IGMP host or vice versa The Switch monitors IGMP messages and discontinues
335. of the Primary Master The Backup Master can be set by the user by assigning this Switch the second highest priority before physically assembling the stack or it can be determined automatically by the stack through an election process which determines the second lowest MAC address and then will assign that switch as the Backup Master if all priorities are the same Slave Slave switches constitute the rest of the switch stack and although not Primary or Backup Masters they can be placed into these roles when these other two roles fail or are removed from the stack Slave switches perform operations requested by the master monitor the status of neighbor switches in the stack and the stack topology and adhere to the Backup Master s commands once it becomes a Primary Master Slave switches will do a self check to determine if it is to become the Backup Master if the Backup Master is promoted to the Primary Master or if the Backup Master fails or is removed from the switch stack If both Primary and Backup masters fail or are removed from the Switch stack it will determine if it is to become the Primary Master These roles will be determined first by priority and if the priority is the same the lowest MAC address Once switches have been assembled in the topology desired by the user and powered on the stack will undergo three processes until it reaches a functioning state Initialization State This is the first state of the stack where the
336. ogether allows the transmission of data between the layers The primary purpose of IP MAC port binding is to restrict the access to a switch to a number of authorized users Authorized clients can access a switch s port by either checking the pair of IP MAC addresses with the pre configured database or if DHCP snooping has been enabled in which case the switch will automatically learn the IP MAC pairs by snooping DHCP packets and saving them to the IMPB white list If an unauthorized user tries to access an IP MAC binding enabled port the system will block the access by dropping its packet For the xStack DGS 3120 series of switches active and inactive entries use the same database The maximum number of entries is 511 The creation of authorized users can be manually configured by CLI or Web The function is port based meaning a user can enable or disable the function on the individual port IMPB Global Settings Users can enable or disable the Trap Log State and DHCP Snoop state on the Switch The Trap Log field will enable and disable the sending of trap log messages for IP MAC port binding When enabled the Switch will send a trap message to the SNMP agent and the Switch log when an ARP packet is received that doesn t match the IP MAC port binding configuration set on the Switch To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding IMPB gt IMPB Global Settings as shown below 222 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Manag
337. olbar icon menu or menu item For example Open the File menu and choose Cancel Used for emphasis May also indicate system messages or prompts appearing on screen For example You have mail Bold font is also used to represent filenames program names and commands For example use the copy command Boldface Typewriter Indicates commands and responses to prompts that must be typed exactly as printed in Font the manual Initial capital letter Indicates a window name Names of keys on the keyboard have initial capitals For example Click Enter Menu Name gt Menu Menu Name gt Menu Option Indicates the menu structure Device gt Port gt Port Option Properties means the Port Properties menu option under the Port menu option that is located under the Device menu Notes Notices and Cautions A NOTE indicates important information that helps make better use of the device A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells how to avoid the problem A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage personal injury or death xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Chapter1 Web based Switch Configuration Introduction Login to the Web Manager Web based User Interface Web Pages Introduction All software functions of the DGS 3120 Series switches can be managed configured and monitored via the embedded web based HTML interface Manage the Switc
338. olor will be added Users may change the DSCP field of incoming packets The ACL Flow Meter function will allow users to color code IP packet flows based on the rate of incoming packets Users have two types of Flow metering to choose from trT CM and srTCM as explained previously When a packet flow is placed in a color code the user can choose what to do with packets that have exceeded that color coded rate Green When an IP flow is in the green mode its configurable parameters can be set in the Conform field where the packets can have their DSCP field changed This is an acceptable flow rate for the ACL Flow Meter function Yellow When an IP flow is in the yellow mode its configurable parameters can be set in the Exceed field Users may choose to either Permit or Drop exceeded packets Users may also choose to change the DSCP field of the packets Red When an IP flow is in the red mode its configurable parameters can be set in the Violate field Users may choose to either Permit or Drop exceeded packets Users may also choose to change the DSCP field of the packets Users may also choose to count exceeded packets by clicking the Counter check box If the counter is enabled the counter setting in the access profile will be disabled Users may only enable two counters for one flow meter at any given time To view this window click ACL gt ACL Flow Meter as shown below View All Delete All Mode Figure 7 45 ACL Flow Mete
339. on VLAN Name Enter a VLAN Name for the forwarding table to be browsed by MAC Address Enter a MAC address for the forwarding table to be browsed by Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered 93 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Clear Dynamic Entries button to delete all dynamic entries of the address table Click the View All Entries button to display all the existing entries Click the Clear All Entries button to remove all the entries listed in the table Click the Add to Static MAC table button to add the specific entry to the Static MAC table Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist ARP amp FDB Table On this page the user can find the ARP and FDB table parameters To view the following window click L2 Features gt FDB gt ARP amp FDB Table as show below t MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 IP Address Find by IP Address View All Entries IP Address MAC Address VLAN Name default CGE MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 IP Address O Find by IP Address Wew All Entries Total Entries 1 MAC Address VLAN Name System 10 90 90 1 00 0C GE AA B9 C0 default ET Add to IP MAC Port Binding Table Figure 4 39 ARP amp FDB Table window El Mode Only The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Port Select the port number t
340. on The purpose of the RSPAN function is to mirror packets to a remote switch A packet travels from the switch where the monitored packet is received passing through the intermediate switch and then to the switch where the sniffer is attached The first switch is also named the source switch Parameter Description NOTE You cannot mirror a fast port onto a slower port For example if you try to mirror the traffic from a 100 Mbps port onto a 10 Mbps port this can cause throughput problems The port you are copying frames from should always support an equal or lower speed than the port to which you are sending the copies Please note a target port and a source port cannot be the same port To make the RSPAN function work the RSPAN VLAN source setting must be configured on the source switch For the intermediate and the last switch the RSPAN VLAN redirect setting must be configured NOTE RSPAN VLAN mirroring will only work when RSPAN is enabled when one RSPAN VLAN has been configured with a source port The RSPAN redirect function will work when RSPAN is enabled and at least one RSPAN VLAN has been configured with redirect ports To view this window click Monitoring gt Mirror gt RSPAN Settings as shown below RSPAN Global Settings RSPAN State Enabled 9 Disabled Apply VLAN Name Max 32 characters O vogaa add Total Entries 1 RX Source Ports TX Source Ports Redirect Ports Figure 11 17 RSPAN Settin
341. or 1000M Full Master the other side of the connection must be set for 1000M Full_ Slave Any other configuration will result in a link down status for both ports Flow Control Displays the flow control scheme used for the various port configurations Ports configured for full duplex use 802 3x flow control half duplex ports use backpressure flow control and Auto ports use an automatic selection of the two The default is Disabled Here the current connection speed will be displayed MDIX Auto Select auto for auto sensing of the optimal type of cabling Normal Select normal for normal cabling If set to normal state the port is in MDI mode and can be connected to a PC NIC using a straight through cable or a port in MDI mode on another switch through a cross over cable Cross Select cross for cross cabling If set to cross state the port is in MDIX mode and can be connected to a port in MDI mode on another switch through a straight cable Address Learning Enable or disable MAC address learning for the selected ports When Enabled destination and source MAC addresses are automatically listed in the forwarding table When address learning is Disabled MAC addresses must be manually entered into the forwarding table This is sometimes done for reasons of security or efficiency See the section on Forwarding Filtering for information on entering MAC addresses into the forwarding table The default setting is Enabled Medium Type
342. ore will not operate for hardware based Traffic Control implementations The possible time settings for this field are 0 and 3 to 30 minutes 146 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Time Interval 5 600 The Time Interval will set the time between Multicast and Broadcast packet counts sent from the Switch s chip to the Traffic Control function These packet counts are the determining factor in deciding when incoming packets exceed the Threshold value The Time Interval may be set between 5 and 600 seconds with a default setting of 5 seconds Threshold 0 255000 Specifies the maximum number of packets per second that will trigger the Traffic Control function to commence The configurable threshold range is from 0 255000 with a default setting of 137072 packets per second Traffic Control Type Specifies the desired Storm Control Type None Broadcast Multicast Unknown Unicast Broadcast Multicast Broadcast Unknown Unicast Multicast Unknown Unicast and Broadcast Multicast Unknown Unicast Traffic Trap Settings Enable sending of Storm Trap messages when the type of action taken by the Traffic Control function in handling a Traffic Storm is one of the following None Will send no Storm trap warning messages regardless of action taken by the Traffic Control mechanism Storm Occurred Will send Storm Trap warning messages upon the occurrence of a Traffic Storm only Storm
343. oritized View the following map to see how the Switch implements basic 802 1P priority queuing Implementation of QoS 802 1p Priority Tagging Qos Qos Qos Qos Class 1 Class 3 Class 4 Class 0 a y QoS bdd n Class 7 QoS a e Pri re z iori gt z e gt ES Sa uz T we e A odias packets tagged gt gt Packets without QoS tags with the QoS priorities 0 7 will be forwarded to the as will be forwarded to the QoS class based on the QoS Sees as aho QoS 802 1p default priority set per individual part i Figure 6 1 Mapping QoS on the Switch The picture above shows the default priority setting for the Switch Class 7 has the highest priority of the seven priority classes of service on the Switch In order to implement QoS the user is required to instruct the Switch to examine the header of a packet to see if it has the proper identifying tag Then the user may forward these tagged packets to designated classes of service on the Switch where they will be emptied based on priority For example let s say a user wishes to have a video conference between two remotely set computers The administrator can add priority tags to the video packets being sent out utilizing the Access Profile commands Then on 139 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide the receiving end the administrator instructs the Switch to examine packets
344. ormation window IPv6 ACL Click the Show All Profiles button to navigate back to the Access Profile List Page After clicking the Add View Rules button the following page will appear Available HW Entries 1534 Profile Type Action ma Te Figure 7 15 Access Rule List window IPv6 ACL Click the Add Rule button to create a new ACL rule in this profile Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page Click the Show Details button to view more information about the specific rule created Click the Delete Rules button to remove the specific entry 165 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist After clicking the Add Rule button the following page will appear Profile Information Profile ID 30 Profile Name IPVBACL Profile Type IPv6 Class Rule Detail Keep the input field blank to specify that the corresponding option does not matter Access ID 1 1536 O Auto Assign Class e g 0 255 Rule Action Action Permit Priority 0 7 fa Replace Priority Replace DSCP 0 63 E Replace ToS Precedence 0 7 d Time Range Name O Counter Ports v PJ fg 121 124 128 1 9 Figure 7 16 Add Access Rule IPv6 ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Access ID 1 1536 Type in a unique identifier number for this acce
345. ort No Limit Rate 64 1024000 To Port Type Bandwidth Control Table Port RX Rate Kbit sec TX Rate Kbit sec Effective RX Kbitisec Effective TX Kbit sec No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit imit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit imit No Limit No Limit No Limit No No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No No Limit Mo Limit No Limit No Limit The Effective RATX Rate refers to the actual bandwidth of the switch port if it does not match the configured rate This usually means that the bandwidth has been assigned by a higher priority resource such as a RADIUS server Figure 6 4 Bandwidth Control Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IT Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port Use the drop down menu to select the port range to use for this configuration Type This drop down menu allows a selection between RX receive TX transmit and Both This setting will determine whether the bandwidth ceiling is applied to receiving transmitting or both receiving and transmitting packets No Limit This drop down menu allows the user to specify that the selected port will have no bandwidth limit or not NOTE If the configured number is larger than the port speed it means no bandwidth limit Rate 64 1024000 This field allows the input of the data rate t
346. osts in a preferable order in the built in Authentication Server Groups and when a user tries to gain access to the Switch the Switch will ask the first Authentication Server Hosts for authentication If no authentication is made the second server host in the list will be queried and so on The built in Authentication Server Groups can only have hosts that are running the specified protocol For example the TACACS Authentication Server Groups can only have TACACS Authentication Server Hosts The administrator for the Switch may set up six different authentication techniques per user defined method list TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS local none for authentication These techniques will be listed in an order preferable and defined by the user for normal user authentication on the Switch and may contain up to eight authentication techniques When a user attempts to access the Switch the Switch will select the first technique listed for authentication If the first technique goes through its Authentication Server Hosts and no authentication is returned the Switch will then go to the next technique listed in the server group for authentication until the authentication has been verified or denied or the list is exhausted Users granted access to the Switch will be granted normal user privileges on the Switch To gain access to administrator level privileges the user must access the Enable Admin window and then enter a password which was prev
347. otocol message that is not properly authenticated While all implementations of SNMP entities MAY be capable of generating this trap the snmpEnableAuthenTraps object indicates whether this trap will be generated 323 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 14 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 15 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 16 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 8 6 0 17 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide risingAlarm fallingAlarm newRoot topologyChange This trap is an SNMP notification that 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 29 2 0 1 is generated when a high capacity alarm entry crosses its rising threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps This trap is an SNMP notification that 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 29 2 0 2 is generated when a high capacity alarm entry crosses its falling threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps The newRoot trap indicates that the 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 sending agent has become the new root of the Spanning Tree the trap is sent by a bridge soon after its election as the new root e g upon action of the Topology Change Timer immediately subsequent to its election Implementation of this trap is optional A topologyChange trap is sent by a 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 bridge when any of its configured ports transitions from the
348. ou to stop the scrolling of multiple pages of text beyond the limits of the console CLI Paging is Enabled by default To disable it click the Disabled radio button DHCP Auto Enable or disable the Switch s DHCP auto configuration feature When enabled the Configuration State Switch is instructed to receive a configuration file from a TFTP server which will set the Switch to become a DHCP client automatically on boot up To employ this method the DHCP server must be set up to deliver the TFTP server IP address and configuration file name information in the DHCP reply packet The TFTP server must be up and running and hold the necessary configuration file stored in its base directory when the request Is 35 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Le received from the Switch Power Saving State Enable or disable the link down power saving mode of each physical port The switch port will go into sleep mode when a port is not connected Length Detection State Enable or disable the length detection power saving mode on the physical ports The switch port will reduce the power feed for shorter cables Password Encryption Password encryption will encrypt the password configuration in configuration files State Password encryption is Disabled by default To enable password encryption click the Enabled radio button Click the Apply button to accept the changes made To learn more about the D Link G
349. ough its management VLAN 2 Member Switch MS This is a switch that has joined a single IP group and is accessible from the CS and it takes on the following characteristics a Itis nota CS or MS of another IP group b It is connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN 3 Candidate Switch CaS This is a switch that is ready to join a SIM group but is not yet a member of the SIM group The Candidate Switch may join the SIM group of the Switch by manually configuring it to be a MS of a SIM group A switch configured as a CaS is not a member of a SIM group and will take on the following characteristics a Itis nota CS or MS of another Single IP group b Itis connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN The following rules also apply to the above roles e Each device begins in a Candidate state e CSs must change their role to CaS and then to MS to become a MS of a SIM group Thus the CS cannot directly be converted to a MS e The user can manually configure a CS to become a CaS e AMS can become a CaS by o Being configured as a CaS through the CS o If report packets from the CS to the MS time out e The user can manually configure a CaS to become a CS e The CaS can be configured through the CS to become a MS After configuring one switch to operate as the CS of a SIM group additional DGS 3120 Series switches may join the group by manually configuring the Switch to be a MS The CS will then serve as the in ban
350. ous page After clicking the Show Details button in the Access Rule List the following page will appear 197 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Egress ACL Rule Details Profile ID Access ID Profile Type Action VLAN Based VID DSCP Show All Rules Figure 7 57 Egress Access Rule Detail Information IPv4 ACL Click the Show All Rules button to navigate back to the Access Rule List Adding an IPv6 ACL Profile The window shown below is the Add Egress ACL Profile window for IPv6 To use specific filtering masks in this egress ACL profile click the packet filtering mask field to highlight it red This will add more filed to the mask After clicking the Add ACL Profile button the following page will appear Profile ID 1 256 Profile Name Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL IPv4 ACL IPv6 ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask IPv6 Class IPv6 TCP IPv6 Address IPv6 Class DJ IPv Class TCP OTer Source Port Mask 0 FFFF Destination Port Mask 0 FFFFJ sd IPv6 Address Llipvesourcemask DJ iPv6 Destination Mask Figure 7 58 Add Egress ACL Profile window IPv6 ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description 198 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile ID Enter a unique identifier number for this profile set This va
351. ow below 120 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide OmMICcast Group Settings Pos vw eg 1 1 1 4 15 Max Group 1 1024 Minnie Action Total Entries 3 Max Multicast Group Number Infinite Infinite Infinite EEN CEES Figure 4 75 IPv4 Max Multicast Group Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Ports VID List Select the appropriate port s or VLAN IDs used for the configuration here If the checkbox Infinite is not selected the user can enter a Max Group value Tick the check box to enable or disable the use of the Infinite value select Drop to initiate the drop action or the user can select Replace to initiate the replace action IS Use the drop down menu to select the appropriate action for this rule The user can Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist IPv6 Multicast Filtering Users can add a profile to which multicast address s reports are to be received on specified ports on the Switch This function will therefore limit the number of reports received and the number of multicast groups configured on the Switch The user may set an IPv6 Multicast address or range of IPv6 Multicast addresses to accept reports Permit
352. own menu 217 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide RADIUS Authentication RADIUS Server Settings The RADIUS feature of the Switch allows the user to facilitate centralized user administration as well as providing protection against a sniffing active hacker To view this window click Security gt RADIUS gt Authentication RADIUS Server Settings as shown below Index Server IP Poo eg 1090 90 90 Authentication Port 1 65535 Poo Defaut Accounting Port 1 65535 Po Dee faut Timeout 1 255 fs see MDefautt Retransmit 1 20 times Default ek ee Oo outs E RADIUS Server List IP Address Auth P ort Acct P ort Timeout Retransmit Key Figure 8 21 Authentication RADIUS Server Settings window SI Mode Only Index E IPv4 Address te 10 90 90 90 O IPv6 Address o lt SF 22 Authentication Port 1 65535 Poo Default Accounting Port 1 65535 Poo Defaut Timeout 1 255 fs see Default Retransmit 1 20 eS times Default Key Max 32 characters fF O Confirm Key fF O RADIUS Server List IP Address Auth P ort Acct P ort Timeout Retransmit Key Figure 8 22 Authentication RADIUS Server Settings window El Mode Only The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Choose the desired RADIUS server to configure 7 2 or 3 and select the IPv4 Address Server IP SI Mode Only Set the RADIUS server IP address IPv4 Address El Mode
353. p Icon 42 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide a Collapse a Property default s5 26 a0 Figure 3 21 Right Clicking a Group Icon The following options may appear for the user to configure e Collapse To collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon e Expand To expand the SIM group in detail e Property To pop up a window to display the group information Property Device Mare default 03 04 00 Module Mame DGS 31 20 247C L2 Switch Wac Address 00 01 02 03 04 00 Remote Port ho Local Port Mo Port Speed Close Es Applet Window Figure 3 22 Property window Parameter Description Device Name This field will display the Device Name of the switches in the SIM group configured by the user If no Device Name is configured by the name it will be given the name default and tagged with the last six digits of the MAC Address to identify it Module Name Displays the full module name of the switch that was right clicked MAC Address Displays the MAC Address of the corresponding Switch Remote Port No Displays the number of the physical port on the MS or CaS that the CS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Local Port No Displays the number of the physical port on the CS that the MS or CaS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Port Speed Displays the connection speed between the CS and the MS or CaS
354. pection function Enabled Strict This mode disables hardware learning of the MAC address All packets are dropped by default until a legal ARP or IP packets are detected When enabling this mode the Switch stops writing dropped FDB entries on these ports If detecting legal packets the Switch needs to write forward FDB entry Enabled Loose In this mode all packets are forwarded by default until an illegal ARP packet is detected The default value is Disabled IP Inspection When both ARP and IP inspections are enabled all IP packets are checked The legal IP packets are forwarded while the illegal IP packets are dropped When IP Inspection is enabled and ARP Inspection is disabled all non IP packets Ex L2 packets or ARP are forwarded by default The default value is Disabled Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this feature Allow zero IP configures the state which allows ARP packets with 0 0 0 0 source IP to bypass DHCP Packet By default the DHCP packet with broadcast DA will be flooded When set to disable the broadcast DHCP packet received by the specified port will not be forwarded in strict mode This setting is effective when DHCP snooping is enabled in the case when a DHCP packet which has been trapped by the CPU needs to be forwarded by the software This setting controls the forwarding behavior in this situation Stop Learning Here is displayed the number of blocked entries on the port The default val
355. place DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Remote ID 00 01 02 03 04 00 Default DHCP Relay Option 60 State Disabled DHCP Relay Option 61 State Disabled Figure 9 1 DHCP Relay Global Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description DHCP Relay State This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu lt is used to enable or disable the DHCP Relay service on the Switch The default is Disabled DHCP Relay Hops Count This field allows an entry between 7 and 16 to define the maximum number of router Limit 1 16 hops DHCP messages can be forwarded The default hop count is 4 DHCP Relay Time Allows an entry between 0 and 65535 seconds and defines the maximum time limit 269 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Threshold 0 65535 for routing a DHCP packet If a value of 0 is entered the Switch will not process the value in the seconds field of the DHCP packet If a non zero value is entered the Switch will use that value along with the hop count to determine whether to forward a given DHCP packet DHCP Relay Option 82 This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It State is used to enable or disable the DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 on the Switch The default is Disabled Enabled When this field is toggled to Enabled the relay agent will insert and remove
356. ply to the access rule Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button in the Access Rule List the following page will appear egress Access Rule Detall Information Egress ACL Rule Details Profile ID a Access ID 1 Profile Type IPv6 Action Permit VLAN Based VID 1 IPv6 Class 30 Show All Rules Figure 7 62 Egress Access Rule Detail Information IPv6 ACL Click the Show All Rules button to navigate back to the Access Rule List Egress ACL Flow Meter El Mode Only This window is used to configure the packet flow based metering based on an egress access profile and rule To view this window click ACL gt Egress ACL Flow Meter as shown below 201 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide View All Delete All Access ID Mode Figure 7 63 Egress ACL Flow Meter window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Here the user can enter the Profile ID for the flow meter Here the user can enter the Profile Name for the flow meter Here the user can enter the Access ID for the flow meter Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Cl
357. pping these packets will continue until the maximum time has been reached which is 320 seconds and every stop from this point until a return to normal ingress flow would be 320 seconds For a better understanding please examine the following example of the Safeguard Engine Time in k heini Checking intervals occur every 5 seconds 0 10 20 30 40 50 Stop Rate Interval e Seconds gt p 0 Seconds h o ee If the second checking If the third checking If the fourth interval If the Switch detects interval reveals there are interval reveals there are reveals the packet flooding too many packets it still too many ingress still too many ingress has subsided the Switch will drop all ingress packets the Switch will packets the Switch will will return to accepting ARP and IP stop all ARP and IP stop all ARP and IP ARP and IP broadcast broadcast packets broadcast packets for 10 broadcast packets for 20 packets for 5 seconds seconds 5 2 10 seconds 10 2 10 Safeguard Engine Checking Interval Example Figure 8 71 Mapping QoS on the Switch For every consecutive checking interval that reveals a packet flooding issue the Switch will double the time it will discard ingress ARP and IP broadcast packets and packets from the illegal IP addresses In the example above the Switch doubled the time for dropping ARP and IP broadcast packets when consecutive flooding issues were detected at 5 second intervals Firs
358. promote user level privileges to administrator privileges he or she will be prompted to enter the password configured here that is locally set on the Switch To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Local Enable Password Settings as shown below Old Local Enable Password Max 15 characters Mew Local Enable Password Confirm Local Enable Password Figure 8 64 Local Enable Password Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Old Local Enable lf a password was previously configured for this entry enter it here in order to change it Password to a new password New Local Enable Enter the new password that you wish to set on the Switch to authenticate users Password attempting to access Administrator Level privileges on the Switch The user may set a password of up to 15 characters Confirm Local Enable Confirm the new password entered above Entering a different password here from the Password one set in the New Local Enabled field will result in a fail message Click the Apply button to accept the changes made SSL Settings Secure Sockets Layer or SSL is a security feature that will provide a secure communication path between a host and client through the use of authentication digital signatures and encryption These security functions are implemented through the use of a cipher suite which is a security string that determines the exac
359. pt the changes made Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry based on the information entered Access Authentication Control The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS commands allow users to secure access to the Switch using the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS protocols When a user logs in to the Switch or tries to access the administrator level privilege he or she is prompted for a password If TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS authentication is enabled on the Switch it will contact a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify the user If the user is verified he or she is granted access to the Switch There are currently three versions of the TACACS security protocol each a separate entity The Switch s software supports the following versions of TACACS e TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Provides password checking and authentication and notification of user actions for security purposes utilizing via one or more centralized TACACS servers utilizing the UDP protocol for packet transmission 249 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide e Extended TACACS XTACACS An extension of the TACACS protocol with the ability to provide more types of authentication requests and more types of response codes than TACACS This protocol also uses UDP to transmit packets e TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System plus Provides detailed
360. pted by the source ports to be forwarded to the receiver ports To view the following window click L2 Features gt Multicast Filtering gt IPv4 Multicast Filtering gt IPv4 Limited Multicast Range Settings as show below eg 1 1 1 4 1 5 Access eg 1 1 1 4 1 5 Access State Profile ID 1n 1 le Figure 4 74 IPv4 Limited Multicast Range Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Ports VID List Select the appropriate port s or VLAN IDs used for the configuration Access Assign access permissions to the ports selected Options listed are Permit and Deny Profile ID Profile Use the drop down menu to select the profile ID or profile name used and then assign Name Permit or Deny access to them Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist IPv4 Max Multicast Group Settings Users can configure the ports and VLANs on the switch that will be a part of the maximum filter group up to a maximum of 1024 To view the following window click L2 Features gt Multicast Filtering gt IPv4 Multicast Filtering gt IPv4 Max Multicast Group Settings as sh
361. put field blank to specify that the corresponding option does not matter Access ID 1 512 O Auto Assign Ethernet Type 0 FFFF E Rule Action Action Priority 0 7 ae o Replace DSCP 0 63 Pe O Time Range Name F Counter Disabled VLAN Name m ax 32 characters Figure 7 51 Add Egress Access Rule window Ethernet ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Access ID 1 512 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 572 Auto Assign Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID for the rule being created Ethernet Type Specify the Ethernet type select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Priority 0 7 Tick the corresponding check box if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mappin
362. r The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Here the user can enter the Profile ID for the flow meter 187 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile Name Here the user can enter the Profile Name for the flow meter AccessID Here the user can enter the Access ID for the flow meter Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Click the Modify button to re configure the specific entry Click the View button to display the information of the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry After ae the Add or dl button the following page will appear Profile ID 1 768 Profile Name Access ID 1 1536 Rate Kbps sf o 1048578 Burst Size Kbyte _ 131072 Drop Packet Remark DSCP sd 63 CIR Kbps si 0 1048576 PIR Kbps Po 0 1048576 O trTCM CBS Kbyte 131072 PBS Kbyte si 131072 CIR Kbps sd 0 1048578 O srTCM CBS Kbyte Po 0 131072 EBS Kbyte sd 131072 Rate Exceeded TCM Color Color Blind Color Aware Replace DSCP Counter Replace DSCP Conform Exceed Permit Drop Action Counter Replace DSCP Counter
363. r specify Code to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP code value Select GMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an IGMP type value Select TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting TCP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask src port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff which you wish to filter dst port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff which you wish to filter flag bit The user may also identify which flag bits to filter Flag bits are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may filter packets by filter ing certain flag bits within the packets by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field The user may choose between urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn synchronize fin finish Select UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting UDP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask src port mask Specify a UDP port mask for the source port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff dst port mask Specify a UDP port mask
364. r 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Port Port State Connection Status OOOO Ron Figure 2 5 Port Error Disabled The fields that can be displayed are described below Parameter Description Pot Display the port that has been error disabled Port State Describe the current running state of the port whether enabled or disabled Connection Status Display the uplink status of the individual ports whether enabled or disabled Reason Describe the reason why the port has been error disabled such as it has become a shutdown port for storm control Jumbo Frame Settings The Switch supports jumbo frames Jumbo frames are Ethernet frames with more than 1 518 bytes of payload The Switch supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame size of up to 13312 bytes To view the following window click System Configuration gt Port Configuration gt Jumbo Frame Settings as show below Jumbo Frame Enabled Disabled Current Status The maximum size of frame is 1536 bytes Figure 2 6 Jumbo Frame Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Jumbo Frame Use the radio buttons to enable or disable the Jumbo Frame function on the Switch The default is Disabled When disabled the maximum frame size is 1536 bytes When enabled the maximum frame size is 13312 bytes Click the Apply button to implement changes made PoE The DGS 3120 24PC and DGS 3120 48PC switches support
365. r Poller Settings The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IT Select a unit to configure From Port To Port Use the drop down menus to specify the list of ports to be configured Analyzer Server ID The analyzer server ID specifies the ID of a server analyzer where the packet will be forwarded The maximum number of seconds between successive samples of the counters Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Ping Test Ping is a small program that sends ICMP Echo packets to the IP address you specify The destination node then responds to or echoes the packets sent from the Switch This is very useful to verify connectivity between the Switch and other nodes on the network To view this window click Monitoring gt Ping Test as shown below 299 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IPv4 Ping Test Enter the IP address ofthe device or station you want to ping then click Start Target IP Address 0 0 0 0 Repeat Pinging for Infinite times Ol 4 255 times Timeout 1 99 sec Figure 11 23 Ping Test window SI Mode Only Ping ESO Ue f m mm IPv Ping Test Enter the IP address ofthe device or station you wantto ping then click Start T
366. rPortNumber RoundTripTime AccessRequests AccessRetrans AccessAccepts AccessRejects AccessChallenges AccessResponses Bad Authenticators PendingRequests The number of RADIUS Access Response packets received from unknown addresses The NAS Identifier of the RADIUS authentication client The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Authentication server that the client shares a secret with The conceptual table listing the RADIUS authentication servers with which the client shares a secret The UDP port the client is using to send requests to this server The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from this RADIUS authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to this server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from this server The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from this server The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from this server The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Signature attributes or known types are not include
367. rameter to enable or disable the packet counter for the specified ACL entry in the green flow Exceed This field denotes the yellow packet flow Yellow packet flows may have excess packets permitted through or dropped Users may replace the DSCP field of these packets by checking its radio button and entering a new DSCP value in the allotted field Counter Use this parameter to enable or disable the packet counter for the specified ACL entry in the yellow flow Violate This field denotes the red packet flow Red packet flows may have excess packets permitted through or dropped Users may replace the DSCP field of these packets by checking its radio button and entering a new DSCP value in the allotted field Counter Use this parameter to enable or disable the packet counter for the specified ACL entry in the red flow Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page Click the Apply button to accept the changes made After clicking the View button the following page will appear 203 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide ProflelD ID A ID Rate Kbps Burst Size Kbyte Rate Exceeded Remark DSCP Figure 7 65 Egress ACL Flow meter Display window Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page 204 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Chapter8 Security 802
368. re members of the VLAN s the port belongs to whether there is a single computer directly connected to a switch or an entire department On port based VLANs NICs do not need to be able to identify 802 1Q tags in packet headers NICs send and receive normal Ethernet packets lf the packet s destination lies on the same segment communications take place using normal Ethernet protocols Even though this is always the case when the destination for a packet lies on another switch port VLAN considerations come into play to decide if the packet gets dropped by the Switch or delivered VLAN Segmentation Take for example a packet that is transmitted by a machine on Port 1 that is a member of VLAN 2 If the destination lies on another port found through a normal forwarding table lookup the Switch then looks to see if the other port Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2 and can therefore receive VLAN 2 packets If Port 10 is not a member of VLAN 2 then the packet will be dropped by the Switch and will not reach its destination If Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2 the packet will go through This selective forwarding feature based on VLAN criteria is how VLANs segment networks The key point being that Port 1 will only transmit on VLAN 2 802 1Q VLAN Settings The VLAN List tab lists all previously configured VLANs by VLAN ID and VLAN Name To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN Settings as show below Add Edit VLAN Fin
369. reen Technologies go to http green dlink com for more details Session Table Users can display the management sessions since the Switch was last rebooted To view the following window click Management gt Session Table as show below Refresh Live Time From Figure 3 15 Session Table window Click the Refresh button to refresh the display table so that new entries will appear Single IP Management Simply put D Link Single IP Management is a concept that will stack switches together over Ethernet instead of using stacking ports or modules There are some advantages in implementing the Single IP Management feature 1 SIM can simplify management of small workgroups or wiring closets while scaling the network to handle increased bandwidth demand 2 SIM can reduce the number of IP address needed in your network 3 SIM can eliminate any specialized cables for stacking connectivity and remove the distance barriers that typically limit your topology options when using other stacking technology Switches using D Link Single IP Management labeled here as SIM must conform to the following rules e SIM is an optional feature on the Switch and can easily be enabled or disabled through the Command Line Interface or Web Interface SIM grouping has no effect on the normal operation of the Switch in the user s network e There are three classifications for switches using SIM The Commander Switch CS which is the master s
370. remove the specific entry Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist After clicking the Add Rule button the following page will appear 178 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile Information Profile ID 2 Profile Type Rule Detail Keep the input field blank to specify that the corresponding option does not matter Access ID 1 100 C Auto Assign Rule Action Time Range Name C Ports Pf fg 124 taas 1 9 Figure 7 32 Add CPU Access Rule IPv4 ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Access ID 1 100 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 100 select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered VLAN Name Allows the entry of a name for a previously configured VLAN Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Ports Ticking the All Ports check box will denote all ports on the Switch Click the Apply button to a
371. res gt LLDP gt LLDP Dot1 TLVs Settings as show below 128 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Dott TLV PVID Doti TLV Protocol VLAN Dott TLV VLAN Doti TLY Protocol Identity Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Port and Protocol VID State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disab Disab Disab led led Disabled From Port VLAN Name VLAN Name EAPOL e O Disabled Disabled Disab Disab Disab led led led VLAN Name State led led led led led led led led led led led 0 9 02 o o 5 cu ar cc aL o a oO To Port Protocol Identity State Protocal Identity Disable Disable Disabled Disabled Ill Disable a Disable Disab Disab led led led led led led led led oO Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled lt Figure 4 85 LLDP Dot1 TLVs Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description FUnit Select the starting and ending ports to use From Port To Port Use the drop down menu to select the port range to use for this configuration Dot TLV PVID Use the drop down menu to enable or disable and configure the Doti TLV PVID option Dot1 TLV Protocol VLAN Use the drop down menu to enable or disable and configure
372. ress mask for the destination IPv6 address by ticking the corresponding check box and entering the IP address mask e g 255 255 255 255 Click the Select button to select an ACL type Click the Create button to create a profile Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button the following page will appear Egress ACL Profile Details Profile ID 3 Profile Name IPVBACL Profile Type IPv6 IPv6 Class Yes Show All Profiles Figure 7 59 Egress Access Profile Detail Information window IPv6 ACL Click the Show All Profiles button to navigate back to the Access Profile List Page After clicking the Add View Rules button the following page will appear 199 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Available HW Entries 254 Access ID Profile Type Action EE 2 Figure 7 60 Egress Access Rule List window IPv6 ACL Click the Add Rule button to create a new ACL rule in this profile Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page Click the Show Details button to view more information about the specific rule created Click the Delete Rules button to remove the specific entry Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist After clicking the Add Rule button the following page will appear de gg g eo 6 al i Profile Inform
373. ress or range of IP Multicast addresses to accept reports Permit or deny reports Deny coming into the specified switch ports To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt Multicast VLAN gt IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings as show below Profile Name fe Max 32 characters Add Find Delete All View All Total Entries 1 Profile Name New Group List Figure 4 62 IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile Name Enter a name for the IP Multicast Profile Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Delete button to remove the corresponding entry Click the Group List link to configure the Multicast Group Profile Address Settings for the specific entry After clicking the Group List link the following page will appear WUTC aS WA POUD rrote VUNICAaST Address se WS Profile Name New Multicast Address List fg 25 2 2 1 235 2 2 2 Add lt lt Back Multicast Address Group List 1 Multicast Address List Figure 4 63 Multicast Group Profile Multicast Address Settings window The fields that can be configured are described be
374. rface Settings Interface Name fr IPv4 Address fF e Figure 2 15 System Log amp Trap Settings window SI Mode Only System Log Source IP Interface Settings Interface Name A IPv4 Address IPv6 Address O Trap Source IP Interface Settings Interface Name fe IPv Address fr IPv6 Address Figure 2 16 System Log amp Trap Settings window El Mode Only The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Interface Name Enter the IP interface name used IPv4 Address Enter the IPv4 address used IPv6 Address El Mode Only Enter the IPv6 address used Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Clear button to clear all the information entered in the fields System Severity Settings The Switch can be configured to allow alerts be logged or sent as a trap to an SNMP agent The level at which the alert triggers either a log entry or a trap message can be set as well Use the System Severity Settings window to set the criteria for alerts The current settings are displayed below the System Severity Table To view the following window click System Configuration gt System Log Configuration gt System Severity Settings as show below 18 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide System Severity Severity Level Apply System Severity Table severity Level Information 6 Information 6 Figure 2 17 System Severity Setting
375. rified first and then IMPB will be verified Both authentication methods need to be passed IMPB WAC IMPB will be verified first and then WAC will be verified Both authentication methods need to be passed MAC IMPB MAC will be verified first and then IMPB will be verified Both authentication methods need to be passed Authorized Mode Toggle between Host based and Port based When Port based is selected if one of the attached hosts passes the authentication all hosts on the same port will be granted access to the network If the user fails the authorization this port will keep trying the next authentication method When Host based is selected users are authenticated individually VID List Enter a list of VLAN ID Use the drop down menu to assign or remove the specified VID list as authentication VLAN s Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Compound Authentication Guest VLAN Settings El Mode Only Users can assign ports to or remove ports from a guest VLAN To view this window click Security gt Compound Authentication gt Compound Authentication Guest VLAN Settings as shown below 238 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Guest VLAN Settings 2 VLAN Name VID 1 4094 Port List e g 1 6 9 All Ports Action Create VLAN Guest VLAN Table Total Entries 0 VID Member Ports Figure 8 43 Compound Authentication Gu
376. rmati n Egress ACL Rule Details Profile ID 1 Access ID 1 Profile Type Ethernet Action Permit VLAN Based VID 1 Ethernet Type OxFFFF Counter Total Matched Counter 0 Show All Rules Figure 7 52 Egress Access Rule Detail Information window Ethernet ACL Click the Show All Rules button to navigate back to the Access Rule List Adding an IPv4 ACL Profile The window shown below is the Add Egress ACL Profile window for IPv4 To use specific filtering masks in this egress ACL profile click the packet filtering mask field to highlight it red This will add more filed to the mask After clicking the Add ACL Profile button the following page will appear 193 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile ID 1 256 F Profile Name Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL IPv4 ACL O IPv6 ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask L2 Header IFPv4 DSCP IPv4 Address ICMP 802 10 VLAN C VLAN VLANMask O FFF O O IPv4 DSCP Llosce IPv4 Address L Source IP Mask E C Destination IP Mask ICMP C ICMP ICMF Type ICMP Code Figure 7 53 Add Egress ACL Profile window IPv4 ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Enter a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 7 to 256 Profile Name Enter a profile name for the profile create
377. rop down menu Select a previously configured Group Name from the drop down menu VID 1 4094 This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN the user wishes to create VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN the user wishes to create 802 1p Priority This parameter is specified if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority previously set in the Switch which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to Once this field is specified packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by the user Click the corresponding box if you want to set the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority 0 7 field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch 68 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Port List Select the specified ports you wish to configure by entering the port number in this field or tick the All Ports check box Search Port List This function allows the user to search all previously configured po
378. rt Statistics gt Packets gt Transmitted TX as shown below 1000 ggg 800 Packets Foo o 600 500 400 MET OL UN 100 UnitiPacketsisec or Bytesisec Time Interval TENE Record Number ShowHide W Bytes W Packets Figure 11 8 Transmitted TX window for Bytes and Packets Click the View Table link to display the information in a table rather than a line graph 287 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Packets Linicast Multicast Packets Figure 11 9 TX Packets Analysis window table for Bytes and Packets The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts the number of bytes successfully sent on the port Counts the number of packets successfully sent on the port Unicast Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a unicast address Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a multicast address Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a broadcast address Show Hide Check whether or not to display Bytes and Packets Click the Apply but
379. rt Traps Enable this option to use the SNMP Cold Start Traps feature Warmstart Traps Enable this option to use the SNMP Warm Start Traps feature Click the Apply button to accept the changes made SNMP Linkchange Traps Settings On this page the user can configure the SNMP link change trap settings To view the following window click Management gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Linkchange Traps Settings as show below 49 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Unit From Port To Port Linkchange Traps Enabled Unit 1 Settings State Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Figure 3 35 SNMP Linkchange Traps Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description From Port To Port Click the Apply button to accept the changes made SNMP View Table Settings Users can assign views to community strings that define which MIB objects can be accessed by a remote SNMP manager The SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users identified in the SNMP User Table to the views created in the previous window To view the following window click Management gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP View Table Settings as show below 50 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide ViewName SS sumes oE y View Type Included Total Entries 8 View Name restricted r
380. rt list settings and display them on the lower half of the table To search for a port list enter the port number you wish to view and click Find To display all previously configured port lists on the bottom half of the screen click the Show All button to clear all previously configured lists click the Delete All button Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Show All button to display all the Protocol VLANs configured Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Asymmetric VLAN Settings Shared VLAN Learning is a primary example of the requirement for Asymmetric VLANs Under normal circumstances a pair of devices communicating in a VLAN environment will both send and receive using the same VLAN however there are some circumstances in which it is convenient to make use of two distinct VLANs one used for A to transmit to B and the other used for B to transmit to A in these cases Asymmetric VLANs are needed An example of when this type of configuration might be required would be if the client was on a distinct IP subnet or if there was some confidentiality related need to segregate traffic between the clients To view this window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt Asymmetric VLAN Settin
381. rt mask Specify a UDP port mask for the source port in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff dst port mask Specify a UDP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff Select Protocol ID Enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask Specify the protocol ID mask in hex form hex 0x0 Oxif Protocol ID Mask Specify that the rule applies to the IP Protocol ID Traffic User Define Specify the L4 part mask 177 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Select button to select a CPU ACL type Click the Create button to create a profile Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show j ACCE E ror a JE Profile ID 2 Profile Type IP DSCP Yes Show All Profiles Figure 7 30 CPU Access Profile Detail Information IPv4 ACL Click the Show All Profiles button to navigate back to the CPU ACL Profile List Page After clicking the Add View Rules button the following page will appear Add Rule Unused Rule Entries 99 Profile ID Access ID Profile Type Action n O E Figure 7 31 CPU Access Rule List IPv4 ACL Click the Add Rule button to create a new CPU ACL rule in this profile Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page Click the Show Details button to view more information about the specific rule created Click the Delete Rules button to
382. runtime codes are set and initialized and the system conducts a peripheral diagnosis to determine each individual switch is functioning properly Master Election State Once the codes are loaded and initialized the stack will undergo the Master Election State where it will discover the type of topology used elect a Primary Master and then a Backup Master 23 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Synchronization State Once the Primary Master and the Backup Master have been established the Primary Master will assign Stacking Unit IDs to switches in the stack synchronize configurations for all switches and then transmit commands to the rest of the switches based on the users configurations of the Primary Master Once these steps have been completed the switch stack will enter a normal operating mode Stack Switch Swapping The stacking feature of the Switch supports hot swapping of switches in and out of the running stack Users may remove or add switches to the stack without powering down or largely affecting the transfer of data between switches in the stack with a few minor provisions When switches are hot inserted into the running stack the new switch may take on the Primary Master Backup Master or Slave role depending on configurations set on the newly added switch such as configured priority or MAC address Yet if adding two stacks together that have both previously under
383. ryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session The Switch possesses four possible cipher suites for the SSL function which are all enabled by default To utilize a particular cipher suite disable the unwanted cipher suites leaving the desired one for authentication When the SSL function has been enabled the web will become disabled To manage the Switch through the web based management while utilizing the SSL function the web browser must support SSL encryption and the header of the URL must begin with https Ex https xx xx xx xx Any other method will result in an error and no access can be authorized for the web based management Users can download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch from a TFTP server The certificate file is a data record used for authenticating devices on the network It contains information on the owner keys for authentication and digital signatures Both the server and the client must have consistent certificate files for optimal use of the SSL function The Switch only supports certificate files with der file extensions Currently the Switch comes with a certificate pre loaded though the user may need to download more depending on user circumstances To view this window click Security gt SSL Settings as shown below 259 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide SSL Global Settings So
384. s 251 Application Authentication Settings cccccccccsssecceecceeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseaeeeeeeseeeseeeeessaaeeeeesseaseeeeessaaeeeeessaagseeeess 252 Authentication Server Group Seting S siii dal dnantteaataselal da riedind Ge lalawans Wetton led a A 253 Authentication Server SUNOS sos A AS A a 254 OCI MetNod SS Seting S a do la altos 255 Enable MEMO LISTS SEUNG Sinon A o 256 Local Enable Pa SS Word SUIS a A tae 258 SoL GEUN Sena eee 258 E S a PAET A A hea NE E a E E A ace A 261 nn A 261 SSH Authentication Method and Algorithm Settings ccccccccccccccsssseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeesseeeeeeeessaaeeeeessaaaeeeess 262 SSH WSerAUING AUCAOM LIS Tease tictnt cassie a lala 264 TRUSTS CIOS ESO UIC S siaa oben de 265 Safeguard Engine Settings tii di AS 266 ChapterS Network Application ossis aai 269 Bk ee eee See ne oe nC en eS Pen ene ee eee eee 269 aS A Clay eroa ee E E S E E E E pone anoandinte cake 269 DACP oad Fe WAC Fe oF sy 16 0 a Ao ripper ar eee ee ee 269 DACPRelav interface SOLU ES ads ii id ciao 272 DHCP Relay Option 60 Server eN e ee 272 DHCP Relay Option 6O SetUIN eS a r A N 273 DHCP Relay OptiOn G 1 Setecientos 274 DACP LocallRelay SEWN in lt ra o tice cavlaedecsB aN Ea cacas 274 A a Gera ioe o yy 275 SN TP OCUNI eaters ca 2a A E E E RN 275 Hne Lone Se A cad ee ae 276 Flash RIS System Sc lAs a a ele ele i ele 277 Chapter io OAMiussisnassin a 280 Gable Diagnosis diia 280 Chapt
385. s Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide eo L DSCP Map DSCP List 0 63 Priority DSCP Priority 4 oo ou La x co A i a j q i cn E ak mn k ne BI Ll bn k en k 16 23 16 23 24 31 16 23 24 31 16 23 16 23 40 47 16 23 40 47 56 63 16 23 40 47 56 63 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 56 63 16 23 24 31 32 31 40 47 56 63 16 23 40 47 56 63 16 23 40 47 56 63 j a j p on La TT k nj a 16 23 40 47 56 63 16 23 40 47 56 63 16 23 24 40 47 56 63 16 23 24 31 323 16 23 Figure 6 8 DSCP Map Settings DSCP Priority window HA or o 0 7 815 0 7 0 7 To view the following window click QoS gt DSCP gt DSCP Map Settings and select DSCP DSCP from the DSCP Map From Port DSCP Map DSCP List 0 63 DSCP 0 63 or a jor _DSCP DSCP_ v a F i mo sa Figure 6 9 DSCP Map Settings DSCP DSCP window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description FUnit Select the unit you want to configure From Port To Port Use the drop down menu to select a range of port to configure DSCP Map Use the drop down menu to select one of two options DSCP Priority Specifies a list of DSCP values to be mapped to a specific priority DSCP DSCP Specifies a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific DSCP DSCP List Enter a DSCP List value 149 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Sw
386. s MAC and the associated port into its Forwarding Table Forwarding Table Port 1 00 20 5C 01 11 11 In addition when the switch receives the broadcasted ARP request it will flood the frame to all ports except the source port port 1 see Figure 2 Sender Sender EA Whois 10 10 10 2 AF Whois 10 10 10 2 00 20 5C 01 33 33 00 20 5C 01 11 20 5C 01 11 11 00 20 5 C 01 33 33 00 20 5C 01 11 20 5 01 11 11 10 10 10 3 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 3 10 10 10 1 Fort 1 gt sl 00 20 5C 01 44 44 00 20 5C 01 22 22 00 20 5C 01 44 44 00 20 5C 01 22 22 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 2 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 2 Figure 2 Figure 3 When PC B replies to the ARP request its MAC address will be written into Target H W Address in the ARP payload shown in Table 3 The ARP reply will be then encapsulated into an Ethernet frame again and sent back to the sender The ARP reply is in a form of Unicast communication Protocol Sender Sender Target Operation HW Protocol HW Protocol ARP Reply 00 20 50 01 10 10 10 1 00 00 00 00 10 10 10 2 11 11 00 00 Table 3 ARP Payload When PC B replies to the query the Destination Address in the Ethernet frame will be changed to PC A s MAC address The Source Address will be changed to PC B s MAC address see Table 4 316 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Fi lt m DATA Ether Type ARP Source Address Destination Address
387. s access to the LAN for all devices on the shared segment Clearly the security offered in this situation is open to attack Ethernet Switch 8021 9021K 8021 8021X 8021 802 802 1K 8021X Cint Clit Client Chert Cint Client Clit Cirt Network access controlled port Network access uncontrolled port Figure 8 7 Example of Typical Port based Configuration 207 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Host Based Network Access Control In order to successfully make use of 802 1X ina shared media LAN segment it would be necessary to create logical Ports one for each attached device a that required access to the LAN The Switch would RADIUS Server regard the single physical Port connecting it to the shared media segment as consisting of a number of distinct logical Ports each logical Port being independently controlled from the point of view of EAPOL exchanges and authorization state The Switch learns each attached devices individual MAC addresses and effectively creates a logical Port that the attached device can then use to communicate with the LAN via the Switch Ethernet Switch 8021X 802 1K 8021K 802 1K 8021X 8021K 802 1 802 1K 8021X 802 1X 802 1 8021X Client Cint C Networkaccess controlled port E Network access uncontrolled port Figure 8 8 Example of Typical Host based Configuration 802 1X Global Settings Users can configure the 802 1
388. s permissions to the ports selected Options listed are Permit and Deny Profile ID Profile Name Use the drop down menu to select the profile ID or profile name used and then assign Permit or Deny access to them Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist IPv6 Max Multicast Group Settings Users can configure the ports and VLANs on the switch that will be a part of the maximum filter group up to a maximum of 1024 Vo Wax VUICA JTOUD Se js Ports w eg 1 1 1 4 15 Max Group 1 1024 __ Minfinite Action Drop Total Entries 3 Max Multicast Group Number Infinite Infinite Infinite Figure 4 79 IPv4 Max Multicast Group Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Ports VID List Select the appropriate port s or VLAN IDs used for the configuration here 123 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide If the checkbox Infinite is not selected the user can enter a Max Group value Tick the check box to enable or disable the use of the Infinite value Use the drop down menu to select the appropriate action for
389. s profile set This value can be set from 7 to53 Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 address or packet content mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet 180 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide A AA IPv6 Class Checking this field will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service ToS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 IPv6 Flow Label Checking this field will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non default quality of service or real time service packets IPv6 Source Mask The user may specify an IP address mask for the source IPv6 address by checking the corresponding box and entering the IP address mask IPv6 Destination Mask The user may specify an IP address mask for the destination IPv6 address by checking the corresponding box and entering the
390. s that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Application Lists the configuration applications on the Switch The user may configure the Login Method List and Enable Method List for authentication for users utilizing the Console Command Line Interface application the Telnet application SSH and the Web HTTP application Login Method List Using the pull down menu configure an application for normal login on the user level utilizing a previously configured method list The user may use the default Method List or other Method List configured by the user See the Login Method Lists window in this section for more information Enable Method List Using the pull down menu configure an application to promote user level to admin level users utilizing a previously configured method list The user may use the default Method List or other Method List configured by the user See the Enable Method Lists window in this section for more information Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 252 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Authentication Server Group Settings Users can set up Authentication Server Groups on the Switch A server group is a technique used to group TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server hosts into user defined categories for authentication using method lists The user may define the type of server group by protocol or by previously defined server
391. s the same value as the RA retransmit time in the config ipv6 nd ra command If this field is configured it will duplicate the entry into the RA field Automatic Link Local Here the user can select to enable or disable the Automatic Link Local Address Address Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page Click the View All IPv6 Address link to view all the current Pv6 address Click the View All IPv6 Address link to see the following window Total Entries 0 Address Type IPv6 Address Figure 3 13 IPv6 Interface Settings window El Mode Only Click the lt lt Back button to return to the previous page 34 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Management Settings Users can stop the scrolling of multiple pages beyond the limits of the console when using the Command Line Interface This window is also used to enable the DHCP auto configuration feature on the Switch When enabled the Switch is instructed to receive a configuration file from a TFTP server which will set the Switch to become a DHCP client automatically on boot up To employ this method the DHCP server must be set up to deliver the TFTP server IP address and configuration file name information in the DHCP reply packet The TFTP server must be up and running and hold the necessary configuration fil
392. s will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Counter Here the user can select the counter By checking the counter the administrator can see how many times that the rule was hit When a range of ports is to be configured the Auto Assign check box MUST be ticked in the Access ID field of this window If not the user will be presented with an error message and the access rule will not be configured Ticking the All Ports check box will denote all ports on the Switch VLAN Name Specify the VLAN name to apply to the access rule VLAN ID Specify the VLAN ID to apply to the access rule Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button in the Access Rule List the following page will appear ACL Rule Details Profile ID 303 Access ID 1 Profile Type Packet Content Action Permit Ports 1T Chunk 1 D Value 0x00000002 Mask OxOOOFFFFF Show All Rules Figure 7 22 Access Rule Detail Information Packet Content ACL Click the Show All Rules button to navigate back to the Access Rule List CPU Access Profile List Due to a chipset limitation and needed extra switch security the Switch incorporates CPU Interface filtering This added feature increases the running security of the Switch by enabling the user to create a list of access rules for packets destined for
393. s window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description System Severity Choose how the alerts are used from the drop down menu Select Log to send the alert of the Severity Type configured to the Switch s log for analysis Choose Trap to send itto an SNMP agent for analysis or select A to send the chosen alert type to an SNMP agent and the Switch s log for analysis Severity Level This drop down menu allows you to select the level of messages that will be sent The options are Emergency 0 Alert 1 Critical 2 Error 3 Warning 4 Notice 5 Information 6 and Debug 7 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Time Range Settings Time range is a time period that the respective function will take an effect on such as ACL For example the administrator can configure the time based ACL to allow users to surf the Internet on every Saturday and every Sunday meanwhile to deny users to surf the Internet on weekdays The user may enter up to 64 time range entries on the Switch To view the following window click System Configuration gt Time Range Settings as show below Range Name A Max 32 Characters Weekdays Mon O Tue O Wed O Thu O FiO sat sun Select All Days O Total Entries O Range Name Start Time End Time Figure 2 18 Time Range Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Range Name Enter a name of no more tha
394. s window click Security gt Loopback Detection Settings as shown below Loopback Detection Global Settings Loopback Detection State O Enabled Disabled Loopback Detection Global Settings Mode Portbased Interval 1 32767 sec Trap State Recover Time 0 or 60 1000000 sec Unit From Port To Port State Disabled Loopback Detection State Loop Status 1 Disabled Norma gt isabled 20 2 oO Oo m on Ga ho tl Disabled isabled isabled Disabled Disabled Normal Figure 8 50 Loopback Detection Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description LBD State Use the radio button to enable or disable loopback detection The default is Disabled Mode sts Use the drop down menu to toggle between Port based and VLAN based Trap Status Set the desired trap status None Loop Detected Loop Cleared or Both Interval 1 32767 The time interval in seconds that the device will transmit all the CTP Configuration Test Protocol packets to detect a loop back event The valid range is from 1 to 32767 seconds The default setting is 10 seconds Recover Time 0 or 60 Time allowed in seconds for recovery when a Loopback is detected The Loop detect 1000000 Recover Time can be set at 0 seconds or 60 to 1000000 seconds Entering 0 will disable the Loop detect Recover Time The default is 60 seconds fUnit Select the unit you want to conf
395. sed to identify the voice traffic There are a number of pre defined OUls The user can further define the user defined OUls if needed The user defined OUI cannot be the same as the pre defined OUI To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt Voice VLAN gt Voice VLAN OUI Settings as show below OUI Address Description E Apply Delete All Total Entries 8 OUI Address Description 00 01 E3 00 00 00 00 03 68 00 00 00 00 09 6E 00 00 00 00 0F E2 00 00 00 FF FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 Siemens Cisco Avaya Huawei amp 3COM FF FF FF 00 00 00 NEC amp Philips FF FF FF 00 00 00 Pingtel FF FF FF 00 00 00 Veritel FF FF FF 00 00 00 3COM Figure 4 19 Voice VLAN OUI Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description OUI Address User defined OUI MAC address Mask sis User defined OUI MAC address mask The description for the user defined OUI Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Voice VLAN Device This page is used to show voice devices that are connected to the ports The start time is the time when the device Is detected on this port the activate time is the latest time saw the device sending the traffic To view the following window click L2
396. sers can view and delete the local history log as compiled by the Switch s management agent To view the following window click System Configuration gt System Log Configuration gt System Log as show below 16 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Log Type Emergency Alert Critical L Error Warning L Notice J Informational L Debug LJ an LI Module List __ Log Software Module MSTP ERROR_LOG Clear Log Clear Attack Log Total Entries T Log Text 2000 02 06 02 30 26 INFO 6 Successful login through Web Username Anonymous IP 10 90 90 1 2000 02 06 02 00 08 INFOLE Web session timed out Username Anonymous IP 10 90 90 1 2000 02 05 22 22 52 INFO 6 Successful login through Web Username Anonymous IP 10 90 90 1 2000 02 05 22 09 54 INFO 6 Port 1 5 link up 100Mbps FULL duplex 2000 02 05 22 09 49 INFO 6 Stacking topology is Chain Master Unit 1 MAC 00 01 02 03 04 00 2000 02 05 22 09 49 CRIT 2 Unit 1 System started up 2000 01 27 05 25 45 INFO 6 Unit 1 Configuration and log saved to flash by console Username Guest an i E Figure 2 14 System Log window The Switch can record event information in its own log Click Go to go to the next page of the System Log window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Log Type In the drop down menu the user can select the log type that will be displayed Severity When selecting Sev
397. ss This value can be set from 7 to 1536 Auto Assign Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID for the rule being created Select Permitto specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Select Mirrorto specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set Priority 0 7 Tick the corresponding check box to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Replace Priority Tick this check box to replace the Priority value in the adjacent field Replace DSCP 0 63 Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that 166 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide meets the selected criteria
398. ss and password saved to the CS s database if a reboot occurs in the MS the CS will keep this MS information in its database and when a MS has been rediscovered it will add the MS back into the SIM tree automatically No configuration will be necessary to rediscover these switches There are some instances where pre saved MS switches cannot be rediscovered For example if the Switch is still powered down if it has become the member of another group pdefault 38 29 00 or if it has been configured to be a Commander Switch the rediscovery process cannot occur default 0 27 00 2 The topology map now includes new features for connections that are a member of a port trunking group It will display the speed and number of Ethernet connections creating this port trunk group as shown in the adjacent picture 3 This version will support switch upload and downloads for firmware configuration files and log files as follows a Firmware The switch now supports MS firmware downloads from a TFTP server b Configuration Files This switch now supports downloading and uploading of configuration files both to for configuration restoration and from for configuration backup MS s using a TFTP server c Log The Switch now supports uploading MS log files to a TF TP server 4 The user may zoom in and zoom out when utilizing the topology window to get a better more defined view of the configurations Single IP Settings The
399. ss through the switch create access profile profile_id 2 Create access profile 2 profile name 2 packet_content_mask The first chunk starts from Chunk 3 mask for Ethernet orter chunk gt OXEEEE Type Blue in Table 6 13th and 14th bytes offset chunk 2 7 OxFFFF offset chunk 3 8 0xFFFF0000 The second chunk starts from Chunk 7 mask for sender IP in ARP packet Green in Table 6 29th and 30th bytes The third chunk starts from Chunk 8 mask for Sender IP in ARP packet Brown in Table 6 31st and 32nd bytes config access_profile profile_id 2 Configure access profile 2 add access_id 1 packet_content offset_chunk_1 0x806 offset_chunk_2 OxA5A offset_chunk_3 0x5A5A0000 Steps save Save configuration The rest of the ARP packets whose Sender IP claim they are the gateway s IP will be dropped 320 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Appendix B Password Recovery Procedure This document describes the procedure for resetting passwords on D Link Switches Authenticating any user who tries to access networks is necessary and important The basic authentication method used to accept qualified users is through a local login utilizing a Username and Password Sometimes passwords get forgotten or destroyed so network administrators need to reset these passwords This document will explain how the Password Recovery feature can help network administrators reach this goal The fol
400. st Name Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters Priority 1 2 3 4 The user may add one or a combination of up to four of the following authentication methods to this method list local_enable Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local enable password database on the Switch The local enable password must be set by the user in the next section entitled Local Enable Password none Adding this parameter will require no authentication needed to access the Switch radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the 297 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide rs TACAGS protocol from a remote TACACS server Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry Local Enable Password Settings Users can configure the locally enabled password for Enable Admin When a user chooses the local_ enable method to
401. supplement these circumstances this switch now a implements 802 1X Guest VLANs These VLANs should MO cn Accepted have limited access rights and features separate from Process other VLANs on the network VLAN identification Process by Authenticator To implement 802 1X Guest VLANs the user must first create a VLAN on the network with limited rights and then enable it as an 802 1X guest VLAN Then the Sana administrator must configure the guest accounts accessing the Switch to be placed in a Guest VLAN when trying to access the Switch Upon initial entry to the Switch the client wishing services on the Switch will need ie y 7 to be authenticated by a remote RADIUS Server or local ctientPlacedin CllentPlacedin ciientReturnedto authentication on the Switch to be placed in a fully a A ee A ee operational VLAN N i Identified VLAN Unidentified VLAN Figure 8 12 Guest VLAN Authentication Process If authenticated and the authenticator possess the VLAN placement information that client will be accepted into the 211 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide fully operational target VLAN and normal switch functions will be open to the client If the authenticator does not have target VLAN placement information the client will be returned to its originating VLAN Yet if the client is denied authentication by the authenticator it will be placed in the Guest VLA
402. t lt Back Apply Figure 3 11 IPv4 Interface Settings Edit window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Sarwa Use the drop down menu to specify the method that this Interface uses to acquire an IP address IP Interface Name Enter the name of the IP interface being configured IPv4 Address Enter the IPv4 address used Subnet Mask Enter the IPv4 subnet mask used 33 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide VLAN Name Enter the VLAN Name used IPv4 State Use the drop down menu to enable or disable IPv4 State Interface Admin State Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the Interface Admin State Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page Click the IPv6 Edit button to see the following window IPv6 Interface Settings Interface Name System IPv6 State Enabled wt Interface Admin State IPv6 Network Address e 9 3710 1 64 NS Retransmit Time Settings NS Retransmit Time 0 4294967295 ms Automatic Link Local State Settings Automatic Link Local Address Disabled Ww View All IPv6 Address Figure 3 12 IPv6 Interface Settings window El Mode Only The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description NS Retransmit Time Enter the Neighbor solicitation s retransmit timer in millisecond here lt ha
403. t Never bl TCP Port Number 1 65535 Apply Figure 8 66 SSH Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description SSH Server State Use the radio buttons to enable or disable SSH on the Switch The default is Disabled Enter a value between 7 and 8 to set the number of users that may simultaneously access the Switch The default setting is 8 Connection Timeout Allows the user to set the connection timeout The user may set a time between 120 and 600 seconds The default setting is 120 seconds Authfail Attempts Allows the Administrator to set the maximum number of attempts that a user may try to log on to the SSH Server utilizing the SSH authentication After the maximum number of attempts has been exceeded the Switch will be disconnected and the user must reconnect to the Switch to attempt another login The number of maximum attempts may be set between 2 and 20 The default setting is 2 Rekey Timeout This field is used to set the time period that the Switch will change the security shell encryptions by using the pull down menu The available options are Never 10 min 30 min and 60 min The default setting is Never TCP Port Number Here the user can enter the TCP Port Number used for SSH The default value is 22 Click the Apply button to accept the changes made for each individual section SSH Authentication Method and Algorithm Settings Users can configure the desired types of SSH algor
404. t a range of ports from the pull down menus to be enabled or disabled for PoE Use the pull down menu to enable or disable ports for PoE Time Range Select a range of the time to the port set as POE If Time Range is configured the power can only be supplied during the specified period of time Priority Use the pull down menu to select the priority of the PoE ports Port priority determines the priority which the system attempts to supply the power to the ports There are three levels of priority that can be selected Critical High and Low When multiple ports happen to have the same level of priority the port ID will be used to determine the priority The lower port ID has higher priority The setting of priority will affect the order of supplying power Whether the disconnect method is set to deny low priority port the priority of each port will be used by the system to manage the supply of power to ports Power Limit This function is used to configure the per port power limit If a port exceeds its power limit it will shut down Based on 802 3af 802 3at there are different PD classes and power consumption ranges Class 0 0 44 15 4W Class 1 0 44 4 0W Class 2 4 7 0W Class 3 7 15 4W Class 4 15 4W The following is the power limit applied to the port for these five classes For each class the power limit is a little more than the power consumption range for that class This takes into account any power loss on the cable
405. t be set Priority 0 7 Tick the corresponding check box if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified 170 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Replace Priority Tick this check box to replace the Priority value in the adjacent field Replace DSCP 0 63 Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field When an ACL rule is added to change both the priority and DSCP of an IPv4 packet only one of them can be modified due to a chip limitation Currently the priority is changed when both the priority and DSCP are set to be modified Replace ToS Precedence Specify that the IP precedence of the outgoing packet is changed with the new value 0 7 lf used without an action priority the packet is sent to the default TC Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window Thi
406. t cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session and consists of three levels 1 Key Exchange The first part of the Ciphersuite string specifies the public key algorithm to be used This switch utilizes the Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA public key algorithm and the Digital Signature Algorithm DSA specified here as the DHE DSS Diffie Hellman DHE public key algorithm This is the first authentication process between client and host as they exchange keys in looking for a match and therefore authentication to be accepted to negotiate encryptions on the following level 2 Encryption The second part of the cipher suite that includes the encryption used for encrypting the messages sent between client and host The Switch supports two types of cryptology algorithms Stream Ciphers There are two types of stream ciphers on the Switch RC4 with 40 bit keys and RC4 with 128 bit keys These keys are used to encrypt messages and need to be consistent between client and host for optimal use 258 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide CBC Block Ciphers CBC refers to Cipher Block Chaining which means that a portion of the previously encrypted block of encrypted text is used in the encryption of the current block The Switch supports the 3DES EDE encryption code defined by the Data Encryption Standard DES to create the encrypted text 3 H
407. t for the trunk group using the drop down menu Use the drop down menu to toggle between Enabled and Disabled This is used to turn a port trunking group on or off This is useful for diagnostics to quickly isolate a bandwidth intensive network device or to have an absolute backup aggregation group that is not under automatic control Member Ports Choose the members of a trunked group Up to eight ports per group can be assigned to a group Active Ports Shows the ports that are currently forwarding packets Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Clear All button to clear out all the information entered Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered lt NOTE The maximum number of ports that can be configured in one Static Trunk or LACP Group are 8 ports LACP Port Settings In conjunction with the Trunking window users can create port trunking groups on the Switch Using the following window the user may set which ports will be active and passive in processing and sending LACP control frames To view the following window click L2 Features gt Link Aggregation gt LACP Port Settings as show below 88 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Unit From Port To Port Unit 1 Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 g Figure 4 32 LACP Port Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description
408. t packets and Broadcast packets continually flood the network as normal procedure At times this traffic may increase due to a malicious end station on the network or a malfunctioning device such as a faulty network card Thus switch throughput problems will arise and consequenily affect the overall performance of the switch network To help rectify this packet storm the Switch will monitor and control the situation Packet storms are monitored to determine if too many packets are flooding the network based on threshold levels provided by the user Once a packet storm has been detected the Switch will drop packets coming into the Switch until the storm has subsided This method can be utilized by selecting the Drop option of the Action parameter in the window below The Switch will also scan and monitor packets coming into the Switch by monitoring the Switch s chip counter This method is only viable for Broadcast and Multicast storms because the chip only has counters for these two types of packets Once a storm has been detected that is once the packet threshold set below has been exceeded the Switch will shut down the port to all incoming traffic with the exception of STP BPDU packets for a time period specified using the Count Down parameter If a Time Interval parameter times out for a port configured for traffic control and a packet storm continues that port will be placed in Shutdown Forever mode which will cause a warning message to be
409. t stop 5 seconds second stop 10 seconds third stop 20 seconds Once the flooding is no longer detected the wait period for dropping ARP and IP broadcast packets will return to 5 seconds and the process will resume In Fuzzy mode once the Safeguard Engine has entered the Exhausted mode the Safeguard Engine will decrease the packet flow by half After returning to Normal mode the packet flow will be increased by 25 The switch will then return to its interval checking and dynamically adjust the packet flow to avoid overload of the Switch NOTICE When Safeguard Engine is enabled the Switch will allot bandwidth to various traffic flows ARP IP using the FFP Fast Filter Processor metering table to control the CPU utilization and limit traffic This may limit the speed of routing traffic over the network Users can enable the Safeguard Engine or configure advanced Safeguard Engine seitings for the Switch To view this window click Security gt Safeguard Engine Settings as shown below 26 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Safeguard Engine State Enabled Disabled Safeguard Engine Current Status Normal CPU Utilization Settings Rising Threshold 20 100 30 Trap Log Disabled Falling Threshold 20 100 20 Mode Fuzy Apply Note D Link Safeguard Engine is a robust and innovative technology developed by D Link that will automatically throttle the impact of p
410. t the Switch All other options enter the factory defaults into the current configuration but do not save this configuration Reset System will return the Switch s configuration to the state it was when it left the factory Reset gives the option of retaining the Switch s User Accounts and History Log while resetting all other configuration parameters to their factory defaults If the Switch is reset using this window and Save Changes is not executed the Switch will return to the last saved configuration when rebooted O Reset Proceed with system reset except IP address log user account and banner Reset Config Switch will be resetto factory defaults Reset System Switch will be reset to factory defaults and reboot Apply Figure 12 19 Reset System window 312 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Selecting this option will factory reset the Switch but not the P Address User Accounts and the Banner Reset Config Selecting this option will factory reset the Switch but not perform a Reboot Reset System Selecting this option will factory reset the Switch and perform a Reboot Click the Apply button to initiate the Reset action Reboot System The following window is used to restart the Switch Do you want to save the settings Yes No If you do not save the settings all changes made in t
411. t to its PVID If the two are unequal the port will drop the packet If the two are equal the port will receive the packet The GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP enables the port to dynamically become a member of a VLAN GVRP is Disabled by default Ingress Checking This drop down menu allows the user to enable the port to compare the VID tag of an incoming packet with the PVID number assigned to the port If the two are different the port filters drops the packet Disabled disables ingress filtering Ingress checking is Enabled by default Acceptable Frame Type This field denotes the type of frame that will be accepted by the port The user may choose between Tagged Only which means only VLAN tagged frames will be accepted and All which mean both tagged and untagged frames will be accepted Al is enabled by default Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 71 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide MAC based VLAN Settings Users can create new MAC based VLAN entries search and delete existing entries When a static MAC based VLAN entry is created for a user the traffic from this user will be able to be serviced under the specified VLAN regardless of the authentication function operating on this port To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt MAC based VLAN Settings as show below MaCAddress 1 094 OMAN Name Find Add View All
412. t value is 5 seconds Retransmit 1 255 Enter the value in the retransmit field to change how many times the device will resend times an authentication request when the TACACS server does not respond Click the Apply button to accept the changes made lt Q Login Method Lists Settings User defined or default Login Method List of authentication techniques can be configured for users logging on to the Switch The sequence of techniques implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of techniques for example TACACS XTACACS local the Switch will send an authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group If no response comes from the server host the Switch will send an authentication request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed XTACACS If no authentication takes place using the XTACACS list the local account database set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user When the local method is used the privilege level will be dependent on the local account privilege configured on the Switch NOTE More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other 255 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 S
413. ta driven groups will be displayed Click the Clear Data Driven button to delete the specific IGMP snooping group which is learned by the Data Driven feature of the specified VLAN Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Clear All Data Driven button to delete all IGMP snooping groups which is learned by the Data Driven feature of specified VLANs IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table This page displays the switch s current IGMP snooping forwarding table It provides an easy way for user to check the list of ports that the multicast group comes from and specific sources that it will be forwarded to The packet comes from the source VLAN They will be forwarded to the forwarding VLAN The IGMP snooping further restricts the forwarding ports To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table as show below VID List e 9 146 find View All Total Entries 0 VLAN Name source P Multicast Group Port Member Figure 4 48 IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name The VLAN Name of the multicast group VID List The VLAN ID list of the multicast group Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the View All button to display all the existing entries IGMP Snooping Counter Users can
414. tackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Successful login using any of these techniques will give the user a User privilege only If the user wishes to upgrade his or her status to the administrator level the user must use the Enable Admin window in which the user must enter a previously configured password set by the administrator To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Login Method Lists Settings as shown below Method List Name Max 15 characters Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 Apply Total Entries 1 Method ListName Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 Figure 8 62 Login Method Lists Settings window The Switch contains one Method List that is set and cannot be removed yet can be modified To delete a Login Method List defined by the user click the Delete button corresponding to the entry desired to be deleted To modify a Login Method List click on its corresponding Edit button The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Method List Name Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters Priority 1 2 3 4 The user may add one or a combination of up to four of the following authentication methods to this method list tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will requir
415. tagged member port The member port of a secondary VLAN cannot be member port of other secondary VLAN at the same time When a VLAN is associated with a primary VLAN as the secondary VLAN the promiscuous port of the primary VLAN will behave as the untagged member of the secondary VLAN and the trunk port of the primary VLAN will behave as the tagged member of the secondary VLAN A secondary VLAN cannot be specified with advertisement Only the primary VLAN can be configured as a layer 3 interface The private VLAN member port cannot be configured with the traffic segmentation function This window allows the user to configure the private VLAN parameters To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt Private VLAN Settings as show below 72 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Add Private VLAN VLAN Name tax 32 characters VID 2 4094 sd O VLAN List od eg 2 46 Find Private VLAN VLAN Name _ ax 32 characters ees C Total Entries 0 VLAN Name Promiscuous Ports Trunk Ports Figure 4 14 Private VLAN Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name Enter a VLAN name VID 2 4094 Enter a VID value VLAN List Enter a list of VLAN ID Click the Add button to add a new entry based on the information entered Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click
416. tension Ex c cert der Key File Nam Enter the path and the filename of the key file to download This file must have a der extension Ex c pkey der Click the Download button to download the SSL certificate based on the information entered lt lt NOTE Enabling the SSL command will disable the web based switch management To log on to the NOTE Certain implementations concerning the function and configuration of SSL are not available on the web based management of this Switch and need to be configured using the command line interface Switch again the header of the URL must begin with https Entering anything else into the address field of the web browser will result in an error and no authentication will be granted SSH SSH is an abbreviation of Secure Shell which is a program allowing secure remote login and secure network services over an insecure network It allows a secure login to remote host computers a safe method of executing commands on a remote end node and will provide secure encrypted and authenticated communication between two non trusted hosts SSH with its array of unmatched security features is an essential tool in today s networking environment It is a powerful guardian against numerous existing security hazards that now threaten network communications The steps required to use the SSH protocol for secure communication between a remote PC the SSH client and the Switch the SSH server are as
417. terface Priority Enter a value between 0 and 240 to set the priority for the port interface A higher priority will designate the interface to forward packets first A lower number denotes a higher pri ority Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Link Aggregation Understanding Port Trunk Groups Port trunk groups are used to combine a number of ports together to make a single high bandwidth data pipeline The Switch supports up to 32 port trunk groups with two to eight ports in each group A potential bit rate of 8000 Mbps can be achieved An Example of Link Aggregation Ethemet Backbone Uplink 1000 Mops Connection 1000 Mbps Connection 1000 Mbps Connection S AS Q End Station Clients 4 30 Example of Port Trunk Group 86 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide The Switch treats all ports in a trunk group as a single port Data transmitted to a specific host destination address will always be transmitted over the same port in a trunk group This allows packets in a data stream to arrive in the same order they were sent Link aggregation allows several ports to be grouped together and to act as a single link This gives a bandwidth that is a multiple of a single link s bandwidth Link aggregation is most commonly used to lin
418. that new entries will appear Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 802 1X User Settings Users can set different 802 1X users in switch s local database To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X User Settings as shown below 210 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 802 1X User Password Confirm Password A a A Note 602 1 User and Password should be less than 16 characters 802 1X User Table Total Entries 1 User Name Password Figure 8 11 802 1X User Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description 802 1X User The user can enter an 802 1X user s username in here The user can enter an 802 1X user s password in here Confirm Password The user can re enter an 802 1X user s password in here Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry e lt Q NOTE The 802 1X User and Password values should be less than 16 characters Guest VLAN Settings On 802 1X security enabled networks there is a need for non 802 1X supported devices to gain limited access to ENABLE GUEST the network due to lack of the proper 802 1X software or i incompatible devices such as computers running Windows 98 or older operating systems or the need for guests to gain access to the network without full authorization or local authentication on the Switch To
419. the 802 1p priorities To view the following window click QoS gt 802 1p Settings gt 802 1p User Priority Settings as show below 141 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 02 1p User Priority Settings Priority Class ID 0 Class0 Apply 802 1p User Priority Table iori Class ID Class 2 Class 0 Class 1 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 Class Figure 6 3 802 1p User Priority Settings window Once a priority has been assigned to the port groups on the Switch then a Class may be assigned to each of the eight levels of 802 1p priorities using the drop down menus on this window User priority mapping is not only for the default priority configured in the last page but also for all the incoming tagged packets with 802 1p tag Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Bandwidth Control The bandwidth control settings are used to place a ceiling on the transmitting and receiving data rates for any selected port Bandwidth Control Settings The Effective RX TX Rate refers to the actual bandwidth of the switch port if it does not match the configured rate This usually means that the bandwidth has been assigned by a higher priority resource such as a RADIUS server To view the following window click QoS gt Bandwidth Control gt Bandwidth Control Settings as show below 142 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide From P
420. the Switch s CPU interface Employed similarly to the Access Profile feature previously mentioned CPU interface filtering examines Ethernet IP and Packet Content Mask packet headers destined for the CPU and will either forward them or filter them based on the user s implementation As an added feature for the CPU Filtering the Switch allows the CPU filtering mechanism to be enabled or disabled globally permitting the user to create various lists of rules without immediately enabling them 171 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide NOTE CPU Interface Filtering is used to control traffic access to the switch directly such as protocols transition or management access A CPU interface filtering rule won t impact normal L2 3 traffic forwarding However an improper CPU interface filtering rule may cause the network to become unstable To view CPU Access Profile List window click ACL gt CPU Access Profile List as shown below Creating an access profile for the CPU is divided into two basic parts The first is to specify which part or parts of a frame the Switch will examine such as the MAC source address or the IP destination address The second part is entering the criteria the Switch will use to determine what to do with the frame The entire process is described below Users may globally enable or disable the CPU Interface Filtering State mechanism by using the radio buttons to change the r
421. the changes made sFlow Analyzer Server Settings The Switch can support 4 different Analyzer Servers at the same time and each sampler or poller can select a collector to send the samples We can send different samples from different samplers or pollers to different collectors To view this window click Monitoring gt sFlow gt sFlow Analyzer Server Settings as shown below Analyzer Server ID 1 4 f Owner Name Timeout 1 2000000 O infinite Collector Address Collector Port 1 65535 Max Datagram Size 300 1400 Total Entries 0 Server ID Owner Timeout Es Collector 4ddress Collector Port Max Datagram Size Note CCT means Current Countdown Time Figure 11 20 sFlow Analyzer Server Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Analyzer Server ID The analyzer server ID specifies the ID of a server analyzer where the packet will be forwarded Parameter Description Owner Name The entity making use of this sFlow analyzer server When owner is set or modified the timeout value will become 400 automatically 297 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Timeout The length of time before the server times out When the analyzer server times out all of the flow samplers and counter pollers associated with this analyzer server will be deleted If not specified its default value is 400 Collector Address The IP address of the analyzer server If not specified or
422. the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the Switch Port List Enter the port number or list here to be used for the port security entry search When All is selected all the ports configured will be displayed MAC Address The MAC address of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the Switch Lock Mode The type of MAC address in the forwarding database table Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Clear button to clear all the entries based on the information entered Click the Show All button to display all the existing entries Click the Clear All button to remove all the entries listed Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry ARP Spoofing Prevention Settings The user can configure the spoofing prevention entry to prevent spoofing of MAC for the protected gateway When an entry is created those ARP packets whose sender IP matches the gateway IP of an entry but either its sender MAC field or source MAC field does not match the gateway MAC of the entry will be dropped by the system To view this window click Security gt ARP Spoofing Prevention Settings as shown below Gateway IP Address Gateway MAC Address Ports Po CE att ots Apply Delete All Gateway IP Address Gateway MAC Address 192 168 69 1 Figure 8 48 ARP Spoofing Prevention Settings window The fields that can be configured ar
423. the only information allowed to pass through the Authenticator before access is granted to the Client The second purpose of the Authenticator is to verify the information gathered from the Client with the Authentication Server and to then relay that information back to the Client Workstation Authentication Server 1 Client Figure 8 3 The Authentication Server al a Switch Authenticator RADIUS Server Authentication Server Client Figure 8 4 The Authenticator Three steps must be implemented on the Switch to properly configure the Authenticator 1 The 802 1X State must be Enabled Security 802 1X 802 1X Settings 2 The 802 1X settings must be implemented by port Security 802 1X 802 1X Settings 3 A RADIUS server must be configured on the Switch Security 802 1X Authentic RADIUS Server Client The Client is simply the end station that wishes to gain access to the LAN or switch services All end stations must be running software that is compliant with the 802 1X protocol For users running Windows XP and Windows Vista that software is included within the operating system All other users are required to attain 802 1X client software from an outside source The Client will request access to the LAN and or Switch through EAPOL packets and in turn will respond to requests from the Switch 206 yb RADIUS Server Authentication Server Switch Authenticator Workstation Cl
424. the output port list for the RSPAN VLAN packets If the redirect port is a Link Aggregation port the Link Aggregation behavior will apply to the RSPAN packets Tick Add or Delete to add or delete redirect ports Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page SFlow El Mode Only sFlow RFC3176 is a technology for monitoring traffic in data networks containing switches and routers The sFlow monitoring system consists of an sFlow Agent embedded in a switch or router or in a standalone probe and a central sFlow Collector The architecture and sampling techniques used in the sFlow monitoring system were designed for providing continuous site wide and enterprise wide traffic monitoring of high speed switched and routed networks sFlow Global Settings This window is used to enable or disable the sFlow feature To view this window click Monitoring gt sFlow gt sFlow Global Settings as shown below 296 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide sFlow Global Settings sFlow State Enabled Disabled Apply sFlow Version 1 00 sFlow Address 10 90 90 90 sFlow State Disabled Figure 11 19 sFlow Global Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description sFlow State Here the user can enable or disable the sFlow feature Click the Apply button to accept
425. the specific entry Enter a page number and click the Go button to navigate to a specific page when multiple pages exist After clicking the Add Rule button the following page will appear Profile Information Profile ID 30 Profile Name Profile Type Packet Content Chunk 1 1 Value 0x00000000 Rule Detail Keep the input field blank to specify that the corresponding option does not matter Access ID 1 1536 C Auto Assign Chunk 1 Chunk 2 Chunk 3 Chunk 4 Rule Action Action Priority 0 7 Replace Priority Replace DSCP 0 63 Replace ToS Precedence 0 7 Time Range Name Counter Pons Y Figure 7 21 Add Access Rule Packet Content ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Access ID 1 1536 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 1536 Auto Assign Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID for the rule being created Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below select Deny to specify that the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port mus
426. this check box will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID for the rule being created select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Select Mirrorto specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set Priority 0 7 Tick the corresponding check box if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Replace Priority Tick this check box to replace the Priority value in the adjacent field Replace DSCP 0 63 Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field When an ACL rule is added to change both the priority and DSCP of an IPv4 packet only one of them c
427. tify the HTTP or HTTPs packets that will be trapped to the CPU for authentication processing or to access the login page If not specified the default port number for HTTP is 80 and the default port number for HTTPS is 443 If no protocol is specified the default protocol is HTTP The following diagram illustrates the basic six steps all parties go through in a successful Web Authentication process 231 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Client 6 2 4 3 Client placed in HTTP access Switch redirects Client authentication sent from Client enters to preset redirection VLAN and Client to the login path URL The user is HTML login is Switch information to now free to access the prompted for be processed Internet the user Client information extracted and sent to RADIUS server or local authenticator for processing Authentication accepted by local authenticator or RADIUS server Client is placed in the pre configured Target VLAN N d RADIUS Authentication Server Conditions and Limitations 1 If the client is utilizing DHCP to attain an IP address the authentication VLAN must provide a DHCP server or a DHCP relay function so that client may obtain an IP address 232 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide 2 Certain functions exist on the Switch that will filter HTTP packets such as the Access Profile
428. time Contrast with full duplex Internet Protocol address A unique identifier for a device attached to a network using TCP IP The address is written as four octets separated with full stops periods and is made up of a network section an optional subnet section and a host section Internetwork Packet Exchange A protocol allowing communication in a NetWare network A network of connected computing resources such as PCs printers servers covering a relatively small geographic area usually not larger than a floor or building Characterized by high data rates and low error rates The delay between the time a device receives a packet and the time the packet is forwarded out of the destination port See baud rate The port in a resilient link that carries data traffic in normal operating conditions An Ethernet port connection where the transmitter of one device is connected to the receiver of another device Ethernet port connections where the internal transmit and receive lines are crossed Stores a device s management characteristics and parameters MIBs are used by the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP to contain attributes of their managed systems The Switch contains its own internal MIB 325 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide multicast protocol resilient link RJ 45 RMON RPS Redundant Power System server farm SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol
429. tion will allow the changes to be kept after the switch has rebooted Select All from the Type drop down menu and click Apply Save Configuration Log Type All Apply Figure 12 3 Save All window Stacking Information To change a switch s default stacking configuration for example the order in the stack see System Configuration gt Stacking gt Stacking Mode Settings window The number of switches in the switch stack up to 6 total are displayed next to the Tools drop down menu The icons are in the same order as their respective Unit numbers with the Unit 1 switch corresponding to the icon in the upper left most corner of the icon group When the switches are properly interconnected through their optional Stacking Modules information about the resulting switch stack is displayed under the Stacking Information link 304 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide To view this window click Tools gt Stacking Information as shown below Topology Duplex Chain My Box ID Master ID Box Count Box ID User Set Exist Priority MAC Prom Version Runtime Version HAN Version DGS 3120 24TC NOT_EXIST NOT_EXIST NOT_EXIST NOT_EXIST NOT_EXIST Figure 12 4 Stacking Information window The Stacking Information window displays the following information Parameter Description Master ID Display the Unit ID number of the Primary Master of the Switch stack Box ID can be assigned
430. tion will be required and that packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger will be encrypted Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry 53 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide SNMP Engine ID Settings The Engine ID is a unique identifier used for SNMP V3 implementations on the Switch To view the following window click Management gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Engine ID Settings as show below Engine ID S00000ab03000102030400 Apply Note Engine ID length is 10 64 the accepted character is from 0 to F Figure 3 39 SNMP Engine ID Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description To change the Engine ID type the new Engine ID value in the space provided The SNMP engine ID displays the identification of the SNMP engine on the Switch The default value is suggested in RFC2271 The very first bit is 1 and the first four octets are set to the binary equivalent of the agent s SNMP management private enterprise number as assigned by IANA D Link is 171 The fifth octet is 03 to indicate the rest is the MAC address of this device The sixth to eleventh octets is the MAC address Click the Apply button to accept the changes made ry lt Q NOTE The Engine ID length is 10 64 and accepted characters can range from 0 to F SNMP User Table Settings This wi
431. tocol address are filled with the same source IP address itself The Sender H W Address and Target H W address are filled with the same source MAC address itself The destination MAC address is the Ethernet broadcast address FF FF FF FF FF FF All nodes within the network will immediately update their own ARP table in accordance with the sender s MAC and IP address The format of Gratuitous ARP is shown in the following table Figure 4 317 xStack DGS 3120 Series 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Elhenet Header fades ratuitous ARP JA H W Protocol o Pere Length Length 6 bytes B bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte I byte 2 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes G bytes 4 bytes Sender Sender HAW Protocol FF FF 00 20 806 ARC 00 20 10 10 10 254 00 20 10 10 10 254 FF FF 5CM Relay 5C 01 5C 01 FFF 11 11 11 11 11 11 A common DoS attack today can be DNS Server done by associating a nonexistent or any specified MAC address to the IP Oe address of the network s default E gateway The malicious attacker only paes 00 20 5C 01 33 33 20 60 01 82 Internet needs to broadcast one Gratuitous 10 10 10 3 aaa ARP to the network claiming it is the Port 3 aa gateway so that the whole network Usar c uses tis atar operation will be turned down as all Lee packets to the Internet will be mamas 00 20 5C 01 54 54 directed to the wrong node 10 10 10 254 SS
432. ton to accept the changes made Voice VLAN Voice VLAN Global Settings Voice VLAN is a VLAN used to carry voice traffic from IP phone Because the sound quality of an IP phone call will be deteriorated if the data is unevenly sent the quality of service QoS for voice traffic shall be configured to ensure the transmission priority of voice packet is higher than normal traffic The switches determine whether a received packet is a voice packet by checking its source MAC address lf the source MAC addresses of packets comply with the organizationally unique identifier OUI addresses configured by the system the packets are determined as voice packets and transmitted in voice VLAN To view the following window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt Voice VLAN gt Voice VLAN Global Settings as show below Voice VLAN State Enabled Disabled Priority Aging Time 1 65535 720 min Log State Figure 4 17 Voice VLAN Global Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Voice VLAN State The state of the voice VLAN Voice VLAN Name The name of the voice VLAN Voice VID The VLAN ID of the voice VLAN The priority of the voice VLAN the range is 0 7 The default priority is 5 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Aging Time The aging time to set the range is 1 65535 minutes The default value is 720 minutes The aging time is used t
433. ton to accept the changes made for each individual section Click the Clear button to clear all statistics counters on this window Click the View Table link to display the information in a table rather than a line graph Click the View Graphic link to display the information in a line graph rather than a table Errors The Web manager allows port error statistics compiled by the Switch s management agent to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Four windows are offered 288 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Received RX To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Statistics gt Port Statistics gt Errors gt Received RX as shown below ot 1000 aati CRCError 800 UndersSize OO OwerSize 600 Fragment 500 Jabber 400 200 Drop 200 SyMmbolErr 100 T t Time Interval EE Record Number 200 ShowHide W CRCError if LinderSize W Oversize lf Fragment le Jabber W Drop W SyrnbolErr Figure 11 10 Received RX window for errors Click the View Table link to display the information in a table rather than a line graph ha Sa CRCError UnderSize Oversize Fragment Jabber Symbol Figure 11 11 RX Error Analysis window table The fields that
434. top Bits Display the stop bits used for the serial port connection Click the Apply button to implement changes made Warning Temperature Settings This window allows the user to configure the system warning temperature parameters To view the following window click System Configuration gt Warning Temperature Settings as show below Set Warning Temperature Traps State Disabled hal Log State Disabled High Threshold 500 500 celsius Low Threshold 500 500 celsius Apply Figure 2 10 Warning Temperature Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Traps State Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the traps state option of the warning temperature setting Log State Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the log state option of the warning temperature setting 14 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide High Threshold Enter the high threshold value of the warning temperature setting Low Threshold Enter the low threshold value of the warning temperature setting Click the Apply button to implement changes made System Log configuration System Log Settings The Switch allows users to choose a method for which to save the switch log to the flash memory of the Switch To view the following window click System Configuration gt System Log Configuration gt System Log Settings as show b
435. tream of multicast data will be relayed to the receiver ports in a much more timely and reliable fashion Restrictions and Provisos The Multicast VLAN feature of this Switch does have some restrictions and limitations such as 1 Multicast VLANs can be implemented on edge and non edge switches 2 Member ports and source ports can be used in multiple ISM VLANs But member ports and source ports cannot be the same port in a specific ISM VLAN 3 The Multicast VLAN is exclusive with normal 802 1q VLANs which means that VLAN IDs VIDs and VLAN Names of 802 1q VLANs and ISM VLANs cannot be the same Once a VID or VLAN Name is chosen for any VLAN it cannot be used for any other VLAN 4 The normal display of configured VLANs will not display configured Multicast VLANs 5 Once an ISM VLAN is enabled the corresponding IGMP snooping state of this VLAN will also be enabled Users cannot disable the IGMP feature for an enabled ISM VLAN 6 One IP multicast address cannot be added to multiple ISM VLANs yet multiple Ranges can be added to one ISM VLAN 111 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings Users can add a profile to which multicast address reports are to be received on specified ports on the Switch This function will therefore limit the number of reports received and the number of multicast groups configured on the Switch The user may set an IP Multicast add
436. trieve and modify MIB objects SNMPv3 uses a more sophisticated authentication process that is separated into two parts The first part is to maintain a list of users and their attributes that are allowed to act as SNMP managers The second part describes what each user on that list can do as an SNMP manager The Switch allows groups of users to be listed and configured with a shared set of privileges The SNMP version may also be set for a listed group of SNMP managers Thus you may create a group of SNMP managers that are allowed to view read only information or receive traps using SNMPv1 while assigning a higher level of security to another group granting read write privileges using SNMPvs Using SNMPv3 individual users or groups of SNMP managers can be allowed to perform or be restricted from performing specific SNMP management functions The functions allowed or restricted are defined using the Object Identifier OID associated with a specific MIB An additional layer of security is available for SNMPv3 in that SNMP 47 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide messages may be encrypted To read more about how to configure SNMPv3 settings for the Switch read the next section Traps Traps are messages that alert network personnel of events that occur on the Switch The events can be as serious as a reboot someone accidentally turned OFF the Switch or less serious like a port status change The S
437. ts ses Ann nn PP 205 B02 1K Global SUN Si aida 208 8021A POG A o lo ee 209 SoZ IX US SNS SINOS ini SNE Eran 210 GUEST VLAN SUN dd do a id o EE od 211 AUMentc ato OAE ini ll EN ls io a N N 212 AUINEntIc ato rotas OS is ode 213 Authenticator SESSION StaliSues iaa 214 PUTS TING ATOR Diagnosis A AAA ANA A adestosa ties 215 MUZE POS id 216 Reauthenticate Port S cccccccssssecccccesseeceecceeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeceeesaeaseeeeesseaeceeessaaeeeeeessuaaseceeseeaaeeeeesssneeeessaas 217 RADIS eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee 218 Authentication RADIUS Server SettingS sneis iapa e E ANETA TR EAA N NT N 218 PADIUS ACCOUNUNG Se TING Silao 219 RADIUS Autentic aO iesi iit args ac teat aa tecosciecoen R A R A R 219 PRADIG SAC COUNT OIEI i nan a ae ee eee ee ee eae 221 IP MAG Port Binding IMPB El Mode ONIY ui a ate 222 IMPB Global SEWING S us A sd 222 MPB POSES e lus e UL 223 MED EMY si 01 a6 ieee ae ree ee 224 Nai A A A 225 A A 225 DHCP Snooping Maximum Entry Settings cccccccssccsscccsccesccesecenccescceseceseceeeccseeseeseeteeseeesseesaeeseeeseeceaeeeeeees 225 DHCP SNOODINE EN adan 226 MAG based Access Control MAC ented iro a teeta eae eas ede oe a 227 MAGC based Access Control SEMA ee a he ee 227 MAC based Access Control Local Settings oooocconcccconnconccononcnnncnnnancnnnononancnnnononnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 229 MAC based Access Control Authentication State cccccoccnnccncc
438. tting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet e Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header e Ingress port A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made e Egress port A port on a switch where packets are flowing out of the Switch either to another switch or to an end station and tagging decisions must be made IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLANs are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLANs require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLANs allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLANs can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLANs will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLANs allows VLANs to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLANs to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally The IEEE 802 1
439. ttings VLAN Batch Settings Tab window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VID List Enter a VLAN ID List that can be added deleted or configured Advertisement Enabling this function will allow the Switch to send out GVRP packets to outside sources notifying that they may join the existing VLAN Port List Allows an individual port list to be added or deleted as a member of the VLAN Tagged Specify the port as 802 1Q tagged Use the drop down menu to designate the port as 66 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide a O Untagged Specify the port as 802 1Q untagged Use the drop down menu to designate the port as untagged Forbidden Specify the port as not being a member of the VLAN and that the port is forbidden from becoming a member of the VLAN dynamically Use the drop down menu to designate the port as forbidden Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Q NOTE The Switch supports up to 4k static VLAN entries 802 1v Protocol VLAN 802 1v Protocol Group Settings The user can create Protocol VLAN groups and add protocols to that group The 802 1v Protocol VLAN Group Settings support multiple VLANs for each protocol and allows the user to configure the untagged ports of different protocols on the same physical port For example it allows the user to configure an 802 1Q and 802 1v untagged port on the same physical port The
440. tton the following page will appear ash File Svstem seting Current Unit Current Path O List Boot Up Files Onl Info Attr size byte Update Time license_key dat 2000 01 01 00 05 42 runtime had RUN 2000 02 06 22 32 47 Soot Up config cfg CFG W 2000 02 06 22 34 06 Boot Up system 2000 02 07 02 43 04 29618 KB total 24750 KB free with boot up info bj with backup info Figure 9 12 Flash File System Setting Search for Drive window Click the Previous button to return to the previous page Click the Create Directory to create a new directory within the file system of the switch Click the Copy button to copy a specific file to the switch Click the Move button to move a specific file within the switch Tick the List Boot Up Files Only option to display only the boot up files Click the Active button to set a specific config file as the active runtime configuration Click the Boot Up button to set a specific runtime image as the boot up image Click the Rename button to rename a specific file s name Click the Delete button to remove a specific file from the file system After clicking the Copy button the following page will appear Figure 9 13 Flash File System Settings Copy window When copying a file to the file system of this switch the user must enter the Source and Destination path 2 8 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Apply b
441. tton to remove all the entries listed Click the Edit VLAN Name button to re configure the specific entry s VLAN Name Click the Edit VID button to re configure the specific entry s VLAN ID Click the Clear VLAN button to remove the VLAN information from the specific entry Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry WAC Port Settings Users can view and set port configurations for Web authentication 234 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide To view this window click Security gt Web based Access Control WAC gt WAC Port Settings as shown below From Port 01 we To Port Aging Time 1 1440 min _Jinfinite State Idle Time 1 1440 min Mi infinite Block Time 0 300 Aging Time Idle Tim 1 Disabled Infini 2 isabled Infinite isabled Infinite isabled Infini isabled Infinite Disabled Infinite Disabled Infinite Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled isabled isabled Disabled isabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Nicahled Figure 8 39 WAC Port Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Umit Select the unit you want to configure Use this drop down menu to select the beginning port of a range of ports to be enabled as WAC ports To Port Use this drop down menu to select the ending port of a range of ports to be enabled as WAC ports Aging Time
442. twork bandwidth and can cause network failure The port on the Switch accepting a terminal or modem connector It changes the parallel arrangement of data within computers to the serial form used on data transmission links This port is most often used for dedicated local management Channel access method used by Ethernet and IEEE 802 3 standards in which devices transmit only after finding the data channel clear for some period of time When two devices transmit simultaneously a collision occurs and the colliding devices delay their retransmissions for a random amount of time The point of aggregation within a corporate network where a switch provides high performance access to server farms a high speed backbone connection and a control point for network management and security A LAN specification developed jointly by Xerox Intel and Digital Equipment Corporation Ethernet networks operate at 10Mbps using CSMA CD to run over cabling 100Mbps technology based on the CSMA CD network access method IEEE 802 3X A means of holding packets back at the transmit port of the connected end station Prevents packet loss at a congested switch port The process of sending a packet toward its destination by an internetworking device A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received at the same time and in effect doubles the potential throughput of a link A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received but not at the same
443. ue is 500 Threshold Click the Apply button to accept the changes made IMPB Entry Settings This window is used to create static IP MAC binding port entries and view all IMPB entries on the Switch To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding IMPB gt IMPB Entry Settings as shown below TRIO Ey COS AAA IF Address MAC Address Ports Pf Pets View All Delete All Total Entries 1 IP Address MAC Address ACL Status Mode 10 90 901 00 0C 6E AA B9 C0 1 Static E Te Figure 8 28 IMPB Entry Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below 224 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Parameter Description IP Address Enter the IP address to bind to the MAC address set below MAC Address Enter the MAC address to bind to the IP Address set above Specify the switch ports for which to configure this IP MAC binding entry IP Address MAC Address Tick the All Ports check box to configure this entry for all ports on the Switch Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the Edit button to configure the specified entry Click the Delete button to remove the specified entry Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Delete All button to remove all the entries listed MAC Block List This window is used to view un
444. ueue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Replace DSCP 0 63 Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field When an ACL rule is added to change both the priority and DSCP of an IPv4 packet only one of them can be modified due to a chip limitation Currently the priority is changed when both the priority and DSCP are set to be modified Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Counter Here the user can select the counter By checking the counter the administrator can see how many times that the rule was hit When a range of ports is to be configured the Auto Assign check box MUST be ticked in the Access ID field of this window If not the user will be presented with an error message and the access rule will not be configured Ticking the All Ports check box will denote all ports on the Switch Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previ
445. ules These rules are used to block all DHCP server packets In addition to a permit DHCP entry it will also create one access profile and one access rule entry the first time the DHCP client MAC address is used as the client MAC address The Source IP address is the same as the DHCP server s IP address UDP port number 67 These rules are used to permit the DHCP server packets with specific fields which the user has configured When DHCP Server filter function is enabled all DHCP Server packets will be filtered from a specific port DHCP Server Screening Port Settings The Switch supports DHCP Server Screening a feature that denies access to rogue DHCP servers When the DHCP server filter function is enabled all DHCP server packets will be filtered from a specific port To view this window click Security gt DHCP Server Screening gt DHCP Server Screening Port Settings as shown below DHCP Server Screening Trap Log State O Enabled Disabled legitimate Server Log Suppress Duration O1 min 5 mins 30 mins Apply Unit From Port To Por 1 01 01 Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 8 53 DHCP Server Screening Port Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below 248 xStack DGS 3120
446. ulticast VLAN Source ports must be either tagged or untagged for any single multicast VLAN i e both types cannot be members of the same multicast VLAN Click the Select All button to select all the ports or click the Clear All button to unselect all the ports Tagged Source Ports Specify the source port or range of source ports as tagged members of the multicast VLAN Click the Select All button to select all the ports or click the Clear All button to unselect all the ports Click the Select All button to select all the ports for configuration Click the Clear All button to unselect all the ports for configuration Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 114 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Profile List link the following page will appear VIF SNOOPING MMUIICaSt VLAN Group ettiIngs VID VLAN Name Profile Name IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Group List Multicast Group Profiles 1 New show IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Entries Figure 4 66 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Group List Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Display the VLAN ID VLAN Name Display the VLAN name Profile Name Use the drop down menu to select the IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Group Profile name Click the Add button to ad
447. unning state Choose Enabled to enable CPU packets to be scrutinized by the Switch and Disabled to disallow this scrutiny CPU Interface Filtering State Enabled Disabled Add CPU ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 4 496 Profile Type enema Figure 7 23 CPU Access Profile List window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description CPU Interface Filtering Here the user can enable or disable the CPU interface filtering state State Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the Add CPU ACL Profile button to add an entry to the CPU ACL Profile List Click the Delete All button to remove all access profiles from this table Click the Show Details button to display the information of the specific profile ID entry Click the Add View Rules button to view or add CPU ACL rules within the specified profile ID Click the Delete button to remove the specific entry There are four Add CPU ACL Profile windows e one for Ethernet or MAC address based profile configuration e one for IPv6 address based profile configuration e one for IPv4 address based profile configuration and e one for packet content profile configuration Adding a CPU Ethernet ACL Profile The window shown below is the Add CPU ACL Profile window for Ethernet To use specific filtering masks in this ACL profile click the packet filtering mask field to highlight it red This will add more
448. ure 7 7 Access Rule Detail Information window Ethernet ACL Click the Show All Rules button to navigate back to the Access Rule List Adding an IPv4 ACL Profile The window shown below is the Add ACL Profile window for IPv4 To use specific filtering masks in this ACL profile click the packet filtering mask field to highlight it red This will add more filed to the mask After clicking the Add ACL Profile button the following page will appear 159 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile ID 1 768 Profile Name Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL 5 Pvd ACL TCP v Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask L2 Header VLAN IPv4 DSCP IPv4 Address 802 10 VLAN CIVLAN VLANMask O FFF sd IPv4 DSCP Llosce IPv4 Address L Source IP Mask C Destination IP Mask Figure 7 8 Add ACL Profile window IPv4 ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Enter a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 7 to 768 Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 address or packet content This will change the window according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet ACL to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 ACL to instruct the Switch to examin
449. user can enter a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 7 tod Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 address or packet content mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header 183 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified 0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to the 15th byte 16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31 32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 Click the Select button to select a CPU ACL type Click the Create button to create a profile Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicki
450. utton to initiate the copy Click the Cancel button the discard the process After clicking the Move button the following page will appear Pt Figure 9 14 Flash File System Settings Move window When moving a file to another place the user must enter the Source and Destination path Click the Apply button to initiate the copy Click the Cancel button the discard the process 2 9 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Chapter 10 OAM Cable Diagnostics Cable Diagnostics The cable diagnostics feature is designed primarily for administrators or customer service representatives to verify and test copper cables it can rapidly determine the quality of the cables and the types of error To view this window click OAM gt Cable Diagnostics as shown below Port 01 Link Status Test Result Cable Length M Link Down No Cable The cable diagnostics feature is designed primarily for administrators or customer service representatives to verify and test copper cables it can rapidly determine the quality of the cables and the types of error Note 1 lf cable length is displayed as NA it means the cable length is Not Available This is due to the port being unable to obtain cable length either because its link partner is powered off or the cables used are broken and or bad in quality 2 The maximum cable length is limited to 120 meters 3 The accuracy is 5 meters therefor
451. ven learning of MLD snooping groups State Data Driven Learning Enable or disable the age out function for data driven entries Aged Out Version Specify the version of MLD packet that will be sent by this port If a MLD packet received by the interface has a version higher than the specified version this packet will be dropped Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Modify Router Port link the following page will appear 105 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide VLAN Name default Static Router Port 01 02 03 TE 2 12 5 6 17 18 19 20 21 2 23 24 E E E E E E E A Forbidden Router Port 3 6 07 i 2 3 z 6 8 g a Q QL_a _ Dynamic Router Port Router IP Table Figure 4 53 MLD Snooping Router Port Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IT Select the unit you want to configure Static Router Port This section is used to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicast enabled routers This will ensure that all packets with such a router as its destination will reach the multicast enabled router regardless of the protocol Forbidden Router Port This section is used to designate a range of ports as being not connected to multicast enabled routers This ensures that the
452. vice ToS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 IPv6 Flow Label Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non default quality of service or real time service packets IPv6 TCP Source Port Mask Specify that the rule applies to the range of TCP source ports Destination Port Mask Specify the range of the TCP destination port range IPv6 UDP Source Port Mask Specify the range of the TCP source port range Destination Port Mask Specify the range of the TCP destination port mask ICMP Select CMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header IPv6 Source Mask The user may specify an IP address mask for the source IPv6 address by ticking the corresponding check box and entering the IP address mask IPv6 Destination Mask The user may specify an IP address mask for the destination IPv6 address by ticking the corresponding check box and entering the IP address mask Click the Select button to select an ACL type Click the Create button to create a profile Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button the following page will appear ACL Profile Details Profile Name Profile Type IPv6 Class Show All Profiles Figure 7 14 Access Profile Detail Inf
453. vices in full or half duplex except 1000 Mbps which is always full duplex The Auto setting allows the port to automatically determine the fastest settings the device the port is connected to can handle and then to use those settings The other options are 10M Half 10M Full 100M Half 100M Full 1000M Full Master 1000M Full Slave and 1000M Full There is no automatic adjustment of port settings with any option other than Auto The Switch allows the user to configure three types of gigabit connections 1000M Full Master 1000M Full Slave and 1000M Full Gigabit connections only support full duplex connections and take on certain characteristics that are different from the other choices listed The 1000M Full Master and 1000M Full Slave parameters refer to connections running a 1000BASE T cable for connection between the Switch port and other device capable of a gigabit connection The master setting 1000M Full_Master will allow the port to advertise capabilities related to duplex speed and physical layer type The master setting will also determine the master and slave relationship between the two connected physical layers This relationship is necessary for establishing the timing control between the two physical layers The timing control is set on a master physical layer by a local source The slave setting 1000M Full _ Slave uses loop timing where the timing comes from a data stream received from the master If one connection is set f
454. view the switch s IGMP Snooping counter table To view the following window click L2 Features gt L2 Multicast Control gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Counter as show below 101 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide VLAN Name VID List e g 1 4 6 Port List e 9 1 1 1 3 1 5 View All Total Entries 1 Port 1 20 Packet Statistics Figure 4 49 IGMP Snooping Counter window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description VLAN Name The VLAN Name of the multicast group VID List The VLAN ID list of the multicast group Port List The Port List of the multicast group Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the information entered Click the View All button to display all the existing entries Click the Packet Statistics link to view the IGMP Snooping Counter Table After clicking the Packet Statistics link the following page will appear IGMP Snooping Counter Table Port 1 20 Group Number 0 Receive Statistics Query Report amp Leave IGMP v1 Query IGMP v1 Report IGMP v2 Query IGMP v2 Report IGMP v3 Query IGMP v3 Report Total IGMP v2 Leave ooo amp Dropped By Rate Limitation Total iii Dropped By Rate Limitation Dropped By Max Group Limitation Dropped By Group Filter Dropped By Multicast VLAN ooea a a Transmit Statistics IGMP v1 Query IGMP v1 Report IGMP v2 Query IGMP v2 Report IG
455. will prompt the administrator for a password and then to re type the password for confirmation Public Key This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use the public key on a SSH server for authentication Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to identify the remote SSH user This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth Mode field Enter the corresponding IP address of the SSH user This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth Mode field Click the Edit button to re configure the specific entry Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Trusted Host Settings Up to thirty trusted host secure IP addresses or ranges may be configured and used for remote Switch management It should be noted that if one or more trusted hosts are enabled the Switch will immediately accept remote instructions from only the specified IP address or addresses If you enable this feature be sure to first enter the IP address of the station you are currently using To view this window click Security gt Trusted Host Settings as shown below NOTE To set the SSH User Authentication Mode parameters on the Switch a User Account must be previously configured IPv Address Net Mask ff 9 255 255 255 254 or 1 32 Access Interface OsnmP Telnet LISSH LJHtTP UHTrPSs Pin lan Add Delete All Total Entries 0 Access
456. wing page will appear ACL Rule Details Profile ID 302 Access ID 1024 Profile Type IPv6 Action Permit Ports 15 IPv6 Class 1 Show All Rules Figure 7 17 Access Rule Detail Information IPv6 ACL Click the Show All Rules button to navigate back to the Access Rule List Adding a Packet Content ACL Profile The window shown below is the Add ACL Profile window for Packet Content To use specific filtering masks in this ACL profile click the packet filtering mask field to highlight it red This will add more filed to the mask After clicking the Add ACL Profile button the following page will appear 167 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Profile ID 1 768 Profile Name Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL IPv4 ACL O IPv6 ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask Packet Content L Chunk 1 0 31 Ol Chunk 200 31 LI chunk 3 0 31 as L Chunk 4 0 31 Figure 7 18 Add ACL Profile Packet Content ACL The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Profile ID Enter a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 7 to 768 Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 address or packet content This will change the window according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet ACL to instruct
457. witch generates traps and sends them to the trap recipient or network manager Typical traps include trap messages for Authentication Failure Topology Change and Broadcast Multicast Storm MIBs The Switch in the Management Information Base MIB stores management and counter information The Switch uses the standard MIB II Management Information Base module Consequently values for MIB objects can be retrieved from any SNMP based network management software In addition to the standard MIB II the Switch also supports its own proprietary enterprise MIB as an extended Management Information Base Specifying the MIB Object Identifier may also retrieve the proprietary MIB MIB values can be either read only or read write The Switch incorporates a flexible SNMP management for the switching environment SNMP management can be customized to suit the needs of the networks and the preferences of the network administrator Use the SNMP V3 menus to select the SNMP version used for specific tasks The Switch supports the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 The administrator can specify the SNMP version used to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device SNMP settings are configured using the menus located on the SNMP V3 folder of the Web manager Workstations on the network that are allowed SNMP privileged access to the
458. witch of the group Member Switch MS which is a switch that is recognized by the CS a member of a SIM group and a Candidate Switch CaS which is a Switch that has a physical link to the SIM group but has not been recognized by the CS as a member of the SIM group e ASIM group can only have one Commander Switch CS e All switches in a particular SIM group must be in the same IP subnet broadcast domain Members of a SIM group cannot cross a router e ASIM group accepts up to 32 switches numbered 1 32 not including the Commander Switch numbered 0 36 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide e There is no limit to the number of SIM groups in the same IP subnet broadcast domain however a single switch can only belong to one group e f multiple VLANs are configured the SIM group will only utilize the default VLAN on any switch e SIM allows intermediate devices that do not support SIM This enables the user to manage switches that are more than one hop away from the CS The SIM group is a group of switches that are managed as a single entity The Switch may take on three different roles 1 Commander Switch CS This is a switch that has been manually configured as the controlling device for a group and takes on the following characteristics a lthas an IP Address b Itis nota command switch or member switch of another Single IP group c Itis connected to the member switches thr
459. with each other 204 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Protocol TACACS Timeout 1 255 sec pid Po Retransmit t 20 fe times ly characters Retransmit 1 20 2 times Apply Total Entries 0 IP Address Protocol Timeout Key Retrans mit Figure 8 61 Authentication Server Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the remote server host to add Protocol The protocol used by the server host The user may choose one of the following TACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol XTACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS protocol TACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol RADIUS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol Key Authentication key to be shared with a configured TACACS or RADIUS servers only Specify an alphanumeric string up to 254 characters Port 1 65535 Enter a number between 7 and 65535 to define the virtual port number of the authentication protocol on a server host The default port number is 49 for TACACS XTACACS TACACS servers and 1873 for RADIUS servers but the user may set a unique port number for higher security Timeout 1 255 sec Enter the time in seconds the Switch will wait for the server host to reply to an authentication request The defaul
460. with the value entered in the adjacent field When an ACL rule is added to change both the priority and DSCP of an IPv6 packet only one of them can be modified due to a chip limitation Currently the priority is changed when both the priority and DSCP are set to be modified Replace ToS Specify that the IP precedence of the outgoing packet is changed with the new value If Precedence 0 7 used without an action priority the packet is sent to the default TC Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Counter Here the user can select the counter By checking the counter the administrator can see how many times that the rule was hit When a range of ports is to be configured the Auto Assign check box MUST be ticked in the Access ID field of this window If not the user will be presented with an error message and the access rule will not be configured Ticking the All Ports check box will denote all ports on the Switch VLAN Name Specify the VLAN name to apply to the access rule VLAN ID Specify the VLAN ID to apply to the access rule Click the Apply button to accept the changes made Click the lt lt Back button to discard the changes made and return to the previous page After clicking the Show Details button in the Access Rule List the follo
461. wn menu to select a Power Disconnect Method The default Power Disconnect Method is Deny Next Port Both Power Disconnection Methods are described below Deny Next Port After the power limit has been exceeded the next port attempting to power up is denied regardless of its priority If Power Disconnection Method is set to Deny Next Port the system cannot utilize out of its maximum power capacity The maximum unused watt is 19W Deny Low Priority Port After the power limit has been exceeded the next port attempting to power up causes the port with the lowest priority to shut down so as to allow the high oriority and critical priority ports to power up Legacy PD Use the drop down menu to enable or disable detecting legacy PDs signal Click Apply to implement changes made PoE Port Settings To view the following window click System Configuration gt PoE gt PoE Port Settings as show below 12 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Unit From Port To Port State Time Range Priority Power Limit 1 w 01 vw 01 w Enabled w Critical Class 0 w Apply Unit 1 PoE Port Information Pot State TimeRange Priority PowerLimit mw Power mW Voltage Decivolt Current ma Status Figure 2 8 PoE Port Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Unit Select the unit you wish to configure From Port To Port Selec
462. word of the specified user If a username is lt username gt not specified the passwords of all users will be reset The show account command displays all previously created accounts 321 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Appendix C Trap Logs This table lists the trap logs found on the Switch Log Entry Description B L2macNotification This trap indicates the MAC address 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 101 1 2 100 1 2 0 1 variations in the address table L2PortSecurityViolationTrap When the port security trap is 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 101 1 2 100 1 2 0 2 enabled new MAC addresses that violate the pre defined port security configuration will trigger trap messages to be sent out PortLoopOccurred This trap is sent when a Port loop 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 41 10 0 1 occurs PortLoopRestart This trap is sent when a Port loop 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 41 10 0 2 restarts after the interval time VlanLoopOccurred This trap is sent when a Port with a 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 41 10 0 3 VID loop occurs VlanLoopRestart This trap is sent when a Port with a 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 41 10 0 4 VID loop restarts after the interval time SafeGuardChgToExhausted This trap indicates System change 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 19 4 1 0 1 operation mode from normal to exhausted SafeGuardChgToNormal This trap indicates System change 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 19 4 1 0 2 operation mode from exhausted to normal MacBasedAuthLoggedSuccess
463. ximum entry value Click the Apply button to accept the changes made DHCP Snooping Entry This window is used to view dynamic entries on specific ports To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding IMPB gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Snooping Entry as shown below Ports e g 1 1 1 7 View All Total Entries O IP Address MAC Address Left Time sec Figure 8 31 DHCP Snooping Entry window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Pot Use the drop down menu to select the desired port 226 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide Click the Find button to locate a specific entry based on the port number selected Click the Clear button to clear all the information entered in the fields Click the View All button to display all the existing entries MAC based Access Control MAC MAC based access conirol is a method to authenticate and authorize access using either a port or host For port based MAC based access control the method decides port access rights while for host based MAC based access control the method determines the MAC access rights A MAC user must be authenticated before being granted access to a network Both local authentication and remote RADIUS server authentication methods are supported In MAC based access control MAC user information in a local database or a RADIUS server database is searched for
464. ystem received an ARP request packet that is sent by an IP address that match the system s own IP address In this case the system knows that somebody out there uses an IP address that is conflict with the system In order to reclaim the correct host of this IP address the system can send out the gratuitous ARP request packets for this duplicate IP address Gratuitous ARP Normally the system will only learn the ARP reply packet or a normal ARP request Learning packet that asks for the MAC address that corresponds to the system s IP address The command is used to enable disable learning of ARP entry in ARP cache based on the received gratuitous ARP packet The gratuitous ARP packet is sent by a source IP address that is identical to the IP that the packet is queries for By default the state is Disabled status Click the Apply button to accept the changes made 28 xStack DGS 3120 Series Layer 2 Stackable Managed Switch Web Ul Reference Guide NOTE With the gratuitous ARP learning the system will not learn new entry but only do the update on the ARP table based on the received gratuitous ARP packet Gratuitous ARP Settings The user can configure the IP interface s gratuitous ARP parameter To view the following window click Management gt Gratuitous ARP gt Gratuitous ARP Settings as show below Gratuitous ARP Trap Log Trap Log Interface Name Gratuitous ARP Periodical Send Interval Interface Name Interval Time 0 655

D-Link DGS-3120-48PC

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents